Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 24 Nov 2023 13:54:06 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/ 32 32 Chestnut Stuffing https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/ https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/#respond Sat, 18 Nov 2023 20:54:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72033 Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings a special addition to the holiday table. Classic and simple, and a wonderful make ahead, let’s just say this will be one more task you can check off your holiday to-do list. If you are interested in more chestnut recipes, we have a delicious recipe for Cream of Chestnut Soup,...

The post Chestnut Stuffing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings a special addition to the holiday table. Classic and simple, and a wonderful make ahead, let’s just say this will be one more task you can check off your holiday to-do list.

If you are interested in more chestnut recipes, we have a delicious recipe for Cream of Chestnut Soup, too. But don’t stop there. Get to cooking throughout November with plenty of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes and Friendsgiving Food Ideas.

Chestnut stuffing in a casserole dish from the top view.

Ingredients

Whether you call it chestnut dressing or stuffing, the ingredients for this side dish remain the same. I provide plenty of tips when it comes to bread and chestnuts, too. We will need:

  • Bread: Go for white bread, sourdough bread, Italian bread, or cornbread, cut into ½-inch cubes with a sharp knife. Brioche is another option, however, store-bought brioche is very sweet and will alter the taste if you make a chestnut brioche stuffing. If you have a good bakery nearby or have the time to make Brioche at home, I say go for it. I personally think that it is worth all the effort.
  • Unsalted butter: Unsalted butter is best, but salted butter can be used, just make sure to adjust the salt in the recipe. Olive oil can be used as a dairy-free option.
  • Vegetables / Aromatics: A classic combo of onions and celery, along with fresh garlic for some punch, gives this chestnut sage stuffing recipe so much flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Savory herbs including fresh sage, parsley, and fresh thyme will provide the best flavor, but you can substitute dried herbs if you are short on time.
  • Large eggs: Eggs bind and hold the stuffing together and give it that sought-after stuffing texture. Beat the eggs together separately before adding to the chestnut turkey stuffing mix.
  • Stock: Keep it vegetarian with Vegetable Stock, or use Chicken Stock, turkey stock, or low-sodium store-bought chicken broth instead.
  • Seasonings: I like to keep the seasoning simple with salt and pepper to allow the flavor of the chestnuts to shine.
  • Chestnuts: Use cooked and peeled chestnuts rather than raw ones. Feel free to cook your fresh chestnuts by following any one of our recipes. We recommend Boiling Chestnuts for their optimal texture. Fire Roasted Chestnuts are quick and easy, and Roasted Chestnuts for stuffing is a little bit harder in texture, so I recommend chopping them into smaller pieces. For convenience, you can also buy pre-cooked chestnuts online (affiliate link) or at grocery stores, just make sure ‘chestnuts’ are the only ingredient (no sugar) and be sure to drain them before using.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While the basic ingredients I listed above are more than enough, you can customize this chestnut dressing for turkey according to your tastebuds with a few delicious ingredients. Here are a few ways to do it:

  • Meat: Pancetta, sweet Italian sausage (casings removed and crumbled), or bacon are delicious and add a meaty bite. My favorite is chestnut pancetta stuffing, but sauteed crumbled sausage is delightful as well. The key is to make sure to sautee your meat of choice before adding it to the stuffing mixture.
  • Other veggies: This is where you can get creative. I like the addition of thinly sliced mushrooms or fennel.
  • Heavy cream: For a richer chestnut stuffing, substitute ½ cup of the stock with heavy cream.
  • A touch of sweetness: One small cubed apple or a handful of dried cranberries or raisins adds a pop of sweet flavor that would pair beautifully with the nutty flavors of this dressing recipe.
  • Nuts: While it will no longer be a chestnut stuffing, you can swap chestnuts for toasted and chopped walnuts or pecans instead.

How to Make Chestnut Stuffing

Making this turkey stuffing with chestnuts couldn’t be easier. I have got you covered whether you want to bake it in a baking dish or stuff it into the turkey. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make stuffing with chestnuts.
  1. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch shallow casserole dish with softened butter.
  2. Saute vegetables: In a large saute pan over medium-high heat, melt butter. Then, saute onions and celery until softened, about 5-7 minutes.
  3. Add aromatics: Reduce to medium heat, add the garlic, and saute for 1 minute. Add the sage and saute for an additional minute. Remove from heat and allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  4. Mix bread and herbs: In a large bowl, toss the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme.
Step by step images showing how to make chestnut dressing for turkey.
  1. Make stuffing mixture: Add eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and vegetable mixture to the bread mixture, gently tossing until just combined.
  2. Add the star ingredient: Gently stir in the chopped chestnuts.
  3. When it comes to cooking it, you have two options:
    1. Bake in a casserole dish: Transfer the mixture to the shallow baking pan and spread into a single layer. Bake, uncovered until it is golden brown on top, about 35-40 minutes. Serve warm.
    2. Stuff the turkey: Transfer the chestnut stuffing for turkey into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Bake the turkey as needed until the internal temperature of the stuffing reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This old-fashioned chestnut stuffing recipe is a wonderful make-ahead dish. Here’s how I like to make it ahead, store, and reheat leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stuffing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes, or until warmed through.

What to Serve With Chestnut Stuffing?

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and not much different than making any other stuffing, I think there are a few things to pay attention to. Here are a few helpful tips for the best chestnut stuffing recipe:

  • Use day-old bread: Stale bread is best for stuffing as the dry texture absorbs all the moisture from the stock. If you only have fresh bread on hand, cut it into cubes and spread out onto a rimmed baking sheet to dry out overnight, or go for toasted bread by placing the bread cubes in a preheated 375 degrees F oven until slightly dry, about 7-10 minutes.
  • Store-bought bread cubes: If you are short on time, feel free to use Pepperidge Farm stuffing cubes or those clear bags of bread cubes you find throughout the grocery store this time of year.
  • Amount of liquid: We are looking for a texture that is ‘moist but not soggy’. To achieve this, the stock may have to be adjusted based on the type of bread you use. For best results, start with the 2 ½ cups in the recipe card, then add additional stock ⅛ cup at a time if you find the stuffing mix is a little dry.
  • Adding meat: If you are using meat, make sure to cook it through before adding it in.
  • Do not overmix: When you are mixing the chestnut turkey dressing, it is imperative that you are doing it in a gentle way. You do not want to break the bread cubes, as this will create a crumbly, mushy texture. The bread cubes will absorb the liquid and will produce a nice texture when gently tossed.
Vegetarian chestnut stuffing in a bowl from the top view.

FAQs

What is the origin of chestnut stuffing?

Stuffing with chestnuts is said to have been around for more than 200 years, with the first recipe in print found in The Frugal Housewife by Susannah Carter in 1772.

Are chestnuts supposed to be soft?

This is more about personal preference. Boiled chestnuts will be soft and creamy, whereas fire-roasted or roasted chestnuts will be harder. If you make roasted chestnut stuffing, cut them into smaller pieces.

Can chestnut stuffing be frozen?

Even though you can technically freeze this dish, we do not recommend freezing as the texture will be mushy once thawed. That being said, if you would like to freeze the chestnut stuffing, do so by transferring it to a freezer-safe airtight container with room at the top for expansion. Freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw the frozen stuffing overnight in the fridge. Reheat in a 325-degree oven for 15-20 minutes, or until warmed through.

What is the difference between stuffing and dressing?

While the two terms are used interchangeably, the name you use largely depends on the region you are from and the cooking method. Technically speaking, ‘stuffing’ is cooked inside the cavity of the turkey, whereas ‘dressing’ is baked exclusively outside the turkey in a separate baking dish.

Other Stuffing Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe for Chestnut Stuffing, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chestnut dressing in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chestnut Stuffing Recipe

Chestnut Stuffing, a classic Thanksgiving (or Christmas) dinner favorite, combines cooked chestnuts with a medley of vegetables and fresh herbs, creating a rustic, flavorful side dish that's a hit at any festive gathering.
Course American
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 287kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (2 oz) plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh sage chopped
  • 1 pound day-old white bread ~10 cups, cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 2 ½ cups vegetable stock or chicken or turkey stock would also work
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups cooked chestnuts* roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch casserole dish with softened butter.
  • Melt butter in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery and saute for 5-7 minutes until softened.
  • Add the minced garlic and saute for an additional minute, being careful not to burn it. If necessary, reduce the heat.
  • Add the chopped sage and saute for 1 minute. Take the skillet off the heat and set it aside to cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme in a large bowl. Toss to combine.
  • Add the eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and the cooked vegetables, lightly tossing everything until just combined. Do not overmix.
  • Using a spatula, gently fold in the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the mixture to the prepared baking dish and spread it evenly, lightly pressing in the dish. Bake uncovered for 35-40 minutes until it is lightly browned on top. Alternatively, you can transfer the chestnut stuffing into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Roast turkey as needed until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a stuffing good for 8 servings. It is enough the fill the cavity of a 14-20 pound turkey if you prefer to stuff it into your turkey. Otherwise, you can bake it in a 9X13 casserole dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Stale bread: Using a day-old (or dry) bread is key to making this recipe. You can cube the bread the night before and store it uncovered to dry it out. Or, you can bake the cubes on a baking sheet in a 375-degree F oven for 10 to 12 minutes without browning. However, make sure that they are fully cooled before using them in this chestnut stuffing recipe.
  • Chestnuts: You can purchase already-cooked chestnuts from the store. Just make sure that the only ingredient in the packaging is chestnuts. Alternatively, you can buy raw chestnuts and cook them yourself. I highly recommend buying Italian chestnuts (instead of Chinese) as they are easier to peel. You can boil chestnuts, roast them in the oven, or even roast them in an open fire following our recipes. 
  • Moisture: If you feel the chestnut dressing appears dry, you can add more stock in ⅛ cup increments to your preferred moisture. Remember that the stock will evaporate slightly during the cooking. It is best not to make this stuffing too moist.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare the dressing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Just make sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Covering the top: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover this dressing with foil while it was baking in the oven. However, if yours is browning too quickly (especially if you are cooking multiple things in your oven), you can cover it with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last 5-10 minutes to ensure it is fully cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 287kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 874mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 530IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Chestnut Stuffing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/feed/ 0
Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/#respond Wed, 15 Nov 2023 18:28:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71889 Green bean recipes are a must for tender, nutritious, and versatile eats. They are also a part of any collection of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes or Friendsgiving Potluck Ideas.  If you agree, I recommend trying my other crowd-pleasing green bean dishes, such as my rich and robust Buttery Garlic Green Beans. Or, transform this vegetable into an endlessly customizable vegan snack or side dish with my Air Fried String Beans recipe....

The post Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Green bean recipes are a must for tender, nutritious, and versatile eats. They are also a part of any collection of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes or Friendsgiving Potluck Ideas.  If you agree, I recommend trying my other crowd-pleasing green bean dishes, such as my rich and robust Buttery Garlic Green Beans. Or, transform this vegetable into an endlessly customizable vegan snack or side dish with my Air Fried String Beans recipe. No matter how you prepare them, these green beans will surely be the star of your dinner menu. 

Green bean casserole without mushroom soup on a wooden spoon.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You don’t have to sacrifice an ounce of flavor when making this gourmet mushroom-free recipe. A quick roux and umami-rich ingredients, like bold cheeses, are all you need to make the ultimate substitute for cream of mushroom soup in a green bean casserole. 

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh green beans: Fresh, firm, and unblemished green beans (also sold as string beans) are essential to giving this dish its mildly sweet, earthy flavor. Before using them in your recipe, clean and dry your veggies as much as possible, trim their ends, and cut them into two-inch pieces.
  • Unsalted butter: Butter is the key to achieving a rich, decadent flavor profile when making the roux and prepping your baking dish. You may also use salted butter instead, but be sure to adjust the other seasonings to avoid over-salting your recipe. 
  • All-purpose flour: Flour is an essential ingredient in any roux, which will help thicken the sauce of your green bean casserole.
  • Vegetable stock: I use vegetable stock in this recipe to lend it a light, fragrant flavor. However, you may also use chicken stock to give your mushroom-free green bean casserole extra hearty, savory undertones.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream is the key to giving creamy decadence to this simple casserole recipe. You can also use 2% milk for a lighter, low-calorie green bean casserole, though your recipe won’t have the same rich, thick flavors.
  • Cheese: Strong cheeses make the perfect substitute for cream of mushroom in green bean casserole, given their savory umami flavor. I use a mixture of white cheddar and parmesan cheese in this recipe, but you may also add more white cheddar if you prefer not to use parmesan. You can also use Colby Jack for a butterier, mildly sweet taste.
  • Fresh herbs, spices, and seasoning: Bright, warm, and savory, the ultimate seasoning for this green bean casserole recipe is a mixture of fresh thyme, ground nutmeg, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper. For a slight spice kick, you may also add a pinch of red pepper flakes, though this ingredient is optional.
  • French fried onions: Any store-bought French fried onions, including the Durkee brand, will give your casserole a crisp, rich topping.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Canned or Frozen Green beans: I recommend using fresh green beans when making this dish because of their crisp, bright taste. However, if desired, you may also prepare frozen or canned green bean casserole. If using canned green beans (or canned French-style green beans!), you’ll need three 14.5-ounce cans thoroughly drained and dried. If using frozen green beans, three 10-ounce bags should suffice. However, be sure to increase your casserole’s cooking time to 17-18 minutes to ensure it heats through, given the colder veggies. Furthermore, if you use canned or frozen green beans, you do not need to blanch the veggies before adding them to your casserole, so you can skip those steps.
  • Enhanced umami flavors: To give your cheesy green bean casserole without mushroom soup even more umami flavor, add one tablespoon of soy sauce or Worcestershire sauce to your sauce mixture. If you find this amount insufficient, feel free to add more, tasting as you go. However, please keep in mind that a little goes a long way with these salty ingredients, and you may have to adjust the amount of salt used to avoid an overly salty casserole.
  • Bacon: Crisp, rich, and salty, bacon (or turkey bacon) makes an impeccable addition to this green bean casserole recipe. To ensure the meat cooks fully and maintains its crunch, I recommend first cooking your bacon until lightly crispy, chopping it up, and sprinkling it on top of your casserole as an extra topping.
  • Sour cream: Want to give this dish extra tangy, creamy overtones? Making an old-fashioned green bean casserole with sour cream (Grandma’s style) is an easy way to do it. Simply use one cup of sour cream instead of this recipe’s chicken stock. Alternatively, to make a low-fat green bean casserole, use one-half Greek yogurt and one-half sour cream instead.

Alternative Toppings

Want to make your green bean casserole with an alternative topping that will make the most of your pantry and stun your dinner guests? Prefer to make it without fried onions or want to use up some of the crackers in your pantry? These simple solutions will ensure your side comes out with all the crisp, savory taste of traditional green bean casserole recipes.

  • Panko breadcrumbs: A go-to substitute for fried onions in green bean casserole, one cup of lightly toasted panko breadcrumbs make an excellent topping when mixed with two tablespoons of parmesan cheese. Even better, you can sprinkle this rich, savory mixture on top of your green bean casserole at the beginning of baking to simplify the cooking process.
  • Crumbled croutons: Crumbled croutons—pre-seasoned and already crisp—make another great topping for this green bean casserole recipe.
  • Crackers: Equally parts crunchy and buttery crackers are a simple, cost-effective substitution for fried onions in green bean casserole recipes. Most people prepare green bean casserole with Ritz crackers due to their rich, mildly sweet flavor, but feel free to experiment with whatever crackers best fit your desired flavor profile.
  • Cornflakes: Don’t want to run to the grocery store for extra ingredients? No problem! For this simple green bean casserole topping, you only need to crumble one cup of cornflakes on top of your casserole before baking.
  • Caramelized onions: Take your no-mushroom green bean casserole recipe to the next level by adding caramelized onions’ sweet, rich, and robust flavor. Simply prepare your caramelized onions separately and add them to your casserole while adding your blanched green beans. 

How to Make No Mushroom Soup Green Bean Casserole?

There’s no secret to making a delicious, crowd-pleasing green bean casserole without canned soup. These step-by-step instructions will ensure your casserole has all the tender, creamy, and rich flavors you love in this signature side.

Person washing and trimming green beans.
  1. Prep the green beans: Wash, dry, and trim the ends of your fresh green beans. Then, cut them into two-inch pieces and set aside.
  2. Boil water and prepare the ice bath: Add water and salt to a large pot and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. As this water heats, fill a separate large bowl with ice and water and set it aside.
Person blanching green beans to prepare for making green bean casserole.
  1. Boil the green beans: Following the blanching method I describe in my foolproof guide to boiling green beans, add the green beans to the boiling water and cook until crisp and tender—5-7 minutes in total. Be careful not to overcook the veggies during this step, as they should still maintain their shape and firm texture to avoid mushiness.
  2. Cool the green beans: Use a slotted spoon or strainer to transfer the cooked green beans directly to the ice water bath. Let the green beans sit in the ice bath for five minutes or until they cool to room temperature. Once cool, drain the green beans from the water, spread them on a clean kitchen towel, and pat dry as much as possible.
A collage of images showing how to make the sauce for green bean casserole without mushroom soup.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. While the oven heats, butter your casserole dish with a tablespoon of butter and set it aside.
  2. Saute the garlic: Melt the remaining butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute it for 30 seconds.
  3. Make the green bean casserole roux: Add the flour to the melted butter and whisk constantly until lightly browned (about five minutes). Then, gradually pour in the stock, followed by the heavy cream. Whisk the mixture constantly for about ten minutes until thickened, adjusting the heat as necessary to avoid burning.
Step by step images showing how to mix the sauce with green beans to make no mushroom string bean casserole recipe.
  1. Finish the sauce: Remove the roux from the heat and whisk in the cheddar cheese, parmesan, thyme, nutmeg, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using).
  2. Add the green beans: Fold the blanched green beans into the sauce until they are evenly coated.
Person preparing green bean casserole for baking with and without crispy fried onions on top.
  1. Fill the casserole dish: Transfer the green bean mixture to the prepared dish, evenly spreading the filling.
  2. Bake and serve: Bake the dish in the preheated oven for ten minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onion rings in an even layer over the casserole’s top and bake for five minutes or until the onions turn golden brown.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

You don’t need to stress over meal prep when making a homemade green bean casserole with no mushrooms. These pro tips make prep, storage, and reheating a breeze, whether you make this dish for Thanksgiving dinner or a weeknight meal.

  • Make ahead: To make your no-mushroom green bean casserole ahead of time, prepare the recipe until the step in which you transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish. Then, let the mixture cool down, cover it tightly with aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator for up to one day in advance. When ready to eat, bake the dish as directed.
  • Store: You can store your leftover green bean casserole in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your casserole, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 7-10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Though technically possible, I don’t recommend freezing green bean casserole without condensed soup, as it will likely come out mushy after thawing. Unlike soup-based versions of this recipe, this dish comes together with a roux base, and sauces that use flour for thickening don’t hold up well through the freezing process. Furthermore, the fried onion topping will lose its crispness and become mushy while storing.

What to Serve with this Dish?

No one can resist the creamy decadence of a thick, veggie-packed green bean casserole. Not only is this recipe perfect for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners (especially when served alongside roasted turkey, cranberry sauce, sweet potato casserole, and mashed potatoes!), but it also works as a tasty side dish ideal for Sunday supper.

  • Turkey: Roasted turkey is a given main when serving this decadent, creamy side dish. However, if you don’t want to spend all day in the kitchen, you can serve it with equally savory, tender turkey dishes, like Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, Baked Turkey Wings, and Turkey Meatloaf.
  • Chicken: Not a fan of turkey? No worries! No-mushroom soup green bean casserole makes an ideal pairing with any poultry main. Whole Roasted Chicken and Goat Cheese Chicken are five-star dishes worthy of a master chef’s kitchen, while Roasted Cornish Hens are a succulent way to prepare perfectly portioned meals for all your dinner guests.
  • Beef: When you make the best green bean casserole without cream of mushroom soup, it’s a given that you’ll want to serve it alongside your tastiest mains. My filling and savory Pot Roast and unbelievably tender Reverse Sear Chateaubriand are just what you need to satisfy your Instagram followers and your tastebuds.

Expert Tips

Below are some of the lessons we learned as we were testing this recipe for the blog. Follow our tips for the best green bean casserole without cream of mushroom soup:

  • Blanching the green beans: When boiling your green beans, be sure not to over-blanch them. Cooking them too long will produce a mushy casserole, so I suggest boiling the veggies long enough to maintain a firm texture and nice bite.
  • Making the roux: When preparing your roux, take your time cooking the flour, ensuring it’s lightly browned before adding more ingredients. Then, add the liquids gradually—whisking constantly—to avoid clumps, separating, and boiling.
  • Taste for seasoning: Just because this recipe is a healthier green bean casserole doesn’t mean you have to sacrifice an ounce of flavor. I highly recommend tasting your casserole sauce as you cook to ensure it achieves your desired flavor profile, adding more seasoning as necessary.
  • Fresh mushrooms: Clearly, this recipe teaches you how to make green bean casserole without mushrooms or mushroom soup. However, if you’d like to add fresh mushrooms to the mixture (preferably cremini or baby bella mushrooms), you won’t believe how easy it is. Simply saute the sliced mushrooms with a tablespoon of butter, remove them from the pan, and prepare your roux. Once you drain your sauteed mushrooms (if necessary), add them to the sauce mixture while adding the green beans, tossing them until thoroughly coated.
  • Covering the top: If you find your topping browns too quickly while baking, cover the casserole with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last few minutes until ready to serve.
  • Let it rest: After removing the green bean casserole from the oven, let it rest for 10-15 minutes so the sauce can set.

FAQs

If you want to know more about this easy homemade green bean casserole, look no further! This no-fuss FAQ will answer all your questions, from the origins of green bean casserole to ideal texture tips.

Where did green bean casserole originate?

According to Wikipedia, this classic Thanksgiving side comes from the kitchen of Dorcas Reilly—a home economist working for Campbell’s test kitchen—in 1955. Reilly created this dish hoping to make a simple, accessible recipe for Americans using ingredients many had on hand—namely, canned green beans and cream of mushroom soup. Though the original recipe called for a mixture of cooked green beans, cream of mushroom soup, seasonings, and crispy fried onions, many have since adapted this dish to meet their own dietary needs, taste preferences, and available ingredients, leading to this recipe for homemade green bean casserole no soup.

How do you make green bean casserole less soupy?

Because we make this easy green bean casserole without mushroom soup, it’s unlikely to come out soupy like other soup-based versions. However, if you want to reduce the casserole sauce, you may cook it longer, let it sit longer, or drain excess sauce before serving. You might also consider adding breadcrumbs on top of your casserole, as this addition will soak up some of the liquid from the mixture, eliminating unwanted soupiness.

Which is better in a green bean casserole: canned or frozen green beans?

Fresh green beans are the best option to give your casserole a nutritious, mild taste. However, between canned and frozen options, I prefer frozen because these veggies tend to have a better, firmer bite to them.

Other Green Bean Recipes You Might Also Like

Tender, mild, and endlessly customizable, it’s no wonder why green beans are such a popular veggie. Below, you’ll find just a few of my favorite green bean recipes, guaranteed to pack your table with fresh, savory flavors in minutes.

If you try this Green Bean Casserole recipe without mushroom soup, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Green bean casserole recipe made without mushrooms in a 9 X 13 casserole dish.
Print

Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup Recipe

Making Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup is easy, and let’s face it, it is much healthier because it is made from scratch! Follow our foolproof recipe to make the best homemade green bean casserole and impress your friends with this delicious version of the classic Thanksgiving side dish.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 397kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds fresh green beans* cleaned, ends trimmed, and cut into 2-inch pieces
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 ¾ cups vegetable stock or chicken broth
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 4 ounces shredded white cheddar cheese approximately 2 cups
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese* shredded approximately ¾ cup
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme minced
  • teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup French fried onions 6 ounces

Instructions

  • To blanch the green beans, place water and a pinch of salt in a large pot over medium-high heat. Bring it to a boil.
  • Meanwhile, fill a large bowl with ice and water. Set it aside.
  • Carefully add the green beans to the boiling water. Cook until crisp and tender, 5-7 minutes.
  • Using a slotted spoon or a spider strainer, transfer the green beans into the ice water. Let them cool to room temperature for about 5 minutes. Drain.
  • Spread out the blanched green beans on a clean kitchen towel and pat dry as much as you can.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Butter the casserole dish with a tablespoon of butter and set it aside.
  • In the large skillet, melt the rest of the butter over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds.
  • Add the flour and whisk constantly until lightly browned, for about 5 minutes.
  • While continuously whisking, gradually pour in the stock, followed by the heavy cream (again while gradually pouring), until thickened for about 10 minutes. Adjust the heat as necessary to avoid burning.
  • Off the heat, whisk in the cheddar cheese, parmesan, thyme, nutmeg, kosher salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using).
  • Fold in the green beans and toss until they are evenly coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish and spread it out evenly.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onion rings over the top of the casserole dish and bake for an additional 5 minutes until the fried onion rings are golden brown.
  • Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This homemade green bean casserole makes enough for 6 to 8 side dish servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Canned or Frozen Green beans: I recommend using fresh green beans when making this dish because of their crisp, bright taste. However, if desired, you may also prepare frozen or canned green bean casserole. If using canned green beans (or canned French-style green beans), you’ll need three 14.5-ounce cans thoroughly drained and dried. If using frozen green beans, three 10-ounce bags should suffice. However, be sure to increase your casserole’s cooking time to 17-18 minutes to ensure it heats through, given the colder veggies. Furthermore, if you use canned or frozen green beans, you do not need to blanch the veggies before adding them to your casserole, so you can skip those steps.
  • Heavy cream: You can also use 2% milk for a lighter, low-calorie green bean casserole, though your sauce won’t have the same rich, thick flavors.
  • Cheese: We found that the addition of parmesan cheese provided the overall dish with the umami flavors it was lacking. However, if you do not have parmesan cheese, you can use more cheddar cheese. Also, you can use sharp yellow cheddar cheese in place of white cheddar.
  • Fresh mushrooms: Clearly, we wanted to show you how to make green bean casserole without canned mushroom soup in this recipe. However, if you’d like to add fresh mushrooms to the mixture (preferably baby bella mushrooms), you can easily do so in a few basic steps. Simply saute the sliced mushrooms with a tablespoon of butter, remove them from the pan, and prepare your roux. Once you drain your sauteed mushrooms (if necessary), add them to the sauce mixture while adding the green beans, tossing them until thoroughly coated.
  • Covering the top: During our testing, we did not feel the need to cover the top with foil. However, if you find your topping browns too quickly while baking, cover the casserole with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last few minutes until ready to serve.
  • Make Ahead: To make it ahead of time, prepare the recipe until the step in which you transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish. Then, let the mixture cool down, cover it tightly with aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator for up to one day in advance. When ready to eat, bake the dish as directed.
  • Store: You can store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your casserole, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 7-10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Though technically possible, I don’t recommend freezing green bean casserole without condensed soup, as it will likely come out mushy after thawing.

Nutrition

Calories: 397kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 2196mg | Potassium: 383mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2102IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 325mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests. Ingredients Cooking new potatoes in...

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

Ingredients

Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
  • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
  • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

Other Seasoning Ideas

Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

  • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
  • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
  • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
  • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
  1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
  3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
  4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

How to Store and Reheat?

To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

  • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions:

This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

  • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
  • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

Expert Tips

Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

  • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
  • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
  • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
  • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
  • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

Can you air fry red potatoes?

Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

What temperature to air fry potatoes?

Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
  • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
  • Sprinkle it while it’s still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
  • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71576 While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it. Ingredients Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash? Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it.

Butternut squash cooked in air fryer on a white oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Butternut squash: Fresh, unblemished butternut squash is the key to making air fryer roasted squash. When selecting your squash, look for ones with an intact stem, a dark beige color, and matte skin. Once your squash is ready, peel and cut it into 1-inch cubes. Be careful when cutting it into cubes. If you are new to it, check out my foolproof guide to cutting butternut squash before you start. Also, to simplify your meal prep, you may use store-bought, pre-cut butternut squash for this recipe. However, remember that these cubes tend to be larger, so you may need to cut them into smaller, 1-inch cubes before tossing them in your seasoning mixture. 
  • Olive oil: I use olive oil to help my seasoning mix adhere to the butternut squash and give each cube a beautifully roasted exterior. However, you may also use avocado oil or coconut oil if you prefer.
  • Garlic powder: Though both have a robust garlicky flavor, I recommend using garlic powder instead of minced garlic for this recipe. Garlic powder allows for a more even flavor coating, ensuring every bite of your squash explodes with a rich, gourmet taste.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to give your air fryer butternut squash cubes a deliciously savory, sophisticated flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other spices: Want to infuse your air-fried squash with warm fall flavors? Add one teaspoon of ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, and a pinch of nutmeg to your seasoning mix for a fall-ready side no one can resist.
  • Sweetener: For a sweeter version of this recipe, prepare your air fryer butternut squash with a teaspoon of brown sugar, maple syrup, or coconut sugar—tossed in with your other seasonings. I recommend using a small amount of sweetener (no more than 1 teaspoon), as doing so might caramelize or burn the squash while it is air frying. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can drizzle it with maple syrup over the air-fried butternut squash after the cooking is completed.
  • Fresh herbs: Add a light, herbaceous flavor to your recipe by sprinkling your squash with whatever fresh herbs pair with your main dish, such as parsley, sage, rosemary, or thyme.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash?

Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple instructions. In six steps and fifteen minutes, your squash will come out delectably caramelized, rich, and soft.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. If you bought your squash as a whole, cut it into cubes using our guide on how to cut butternut squash.
The steps to making butternut squash in air fryer are laid out in a collage of photos.
  1. Toss the cubed butternut squash: Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add the ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup (or sweetener of choice) to the mix. Then, toss the ingredients to ensure each butternut squash cube has an even coating of the seasonings.
  2. Transfer the seasoned butternut squash: Place the cubed butternut squash into the air fryer basket, ensuring they lie in a single layer. If your cubes don’t all fit, air fry them in two batches.
  3. Cook: Air fry the butternut squash for 15 minutes or until fork tender, shaking the basket halfway through.
  4. Check for doneness: I think the best way to check doneness (and tenderness) when air frying butternut squash is to pierce a cube with a knife. The batch is ready to eat if the blade gently enters and exits the air fryer squash cube. If the cube is still tough, cook the basket in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Once you’ve roasted the butternut squash in your air fryer, transfer the cooked cubes to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the squash with a teaspoon of maple syrup for additional sweetness.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

It’s no secret that air fryer-roasted butternut squash is best on the day you make it. However, these pro storage tips will ensure that no bite will go to waste when putting away your leftover squash.

  • Store: When storing your butternut squash, first let the leftovers reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-roasted squash, place it in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.

Ways to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash

When you air fry butternut squash cubes, you’ll unlock countless other recipes to fill your table with sweet, savory, and garden-fresh flavors. Below are just a few of my favorite ways to incorporate this winter squash into my menus:

  • Serve it as a healthy Thanksgiving side dish: What better way to celebrate the holiday season than with air fryer winter squash? This hassle-free recipe makes for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish, complementing your favorite holiday mains with gorgeous color, caramelized taste, and simple prep.
  • Add it to salads: This recipe makes the most delicious crispy roasted squash, which pairs beautifully with any of your fall salads. I especially like using it in Ina’s Butternut Squash Salad or Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Feta Salad for a surprisingly complex, rich, and healthy dish.
  • Turn it into soups: Tender, mild, and exquisitely caramelized, air-roasted butternut squash is one of my favorite recipes to add to creamy soups. My Thai Butternut Squash Soup is a vegan dish brimming with aromatic, nutty flavors, while Butternut Squash Chicken Soup will warm your belly with a hearty, nutritious taste.
  • Add it to pasta or pizza as a topping: Believe it or not, air fryer cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect addition to all your Italian favorites, including pasta and pizza recipes. With this easy air fryer recipe, you can add a sumptuously sweet flavor to all your go-to weeknight meals.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Food Network star to roast butternut squash in the air fryer. This easy guide will give you expert guidance on everything from slicing tips to seasoning suggestions.

  • Equal-sized cubes: For best results, it is imperative that your squash cubes are similar in size. There’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of your butternut squash cubes, so keeping your cubes uniform will ensure no piece of squash comes out over- or under-cooked.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket: The key to proper air frying is adequate air circulation throughout the chamber. Therefore, you mustn’t overcrowd your basket when cooking, arranging your squash in a single even layer so that hot air reaches each side of your squash cubes. This positioning will ensure your squash cubes develop an even golden brown exterior and tender insides. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to cook your butternut squash in two batches if they don’t all fit in the basket.
  • Shake halfway through: Be sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the cooking process to ensure even air frying on all sides of the butternut squash.
  • Each air fryer is different: We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Pot Air Fryer, and the results were very similar. However, keep in mind that each brand of air fryer is different. Therefore,  your butternut squash may need more or less time, depending on the brand you own. When in doubt, check the doneness halfway through the cooking process by inserting a sharp knife into your squash and continue to cook it in one-minute increments until fork-tender.
  • Check doneness: Remember that this recipe’s recommended cooking time may change depending on your air fryer model and the size of your squash cubes. To check whether your butternut squash is ready to serve, I recommend using the “knife test.” In other words, insert a knife into one of your squash cubes and see whether it smoothly enters and exits the veggie. If it does, your air fryer squash is ready to eat.
  • Sugar: If you add sugar to your recipe, I recommend starting with a small amount— one teaspoon at most—to avoid over-caramelizing. If you prefer your butternut squash sweeter, you may drizzle or sprinkle it with additional sugar right after removing it from the air fryer (while it’s still hot).
  • Experiment with seasoning: Feel free to experiment with your squash’s seasoning blend based on what you’re serving it with. Depending on your menu, you may consider adding additional ingredients, like ground cinnamon, brown sugar, parsley, or even ground cumin.
  • Air fryer butternut squash fries: If you want to air fry butternut squash fries, cut your squash lengthwise into French fry-shaped pieces. Then, follow the recipe as directed, air frying them for 15 minutes at 375 degrees F.

FAQs

Want to know more about roasting squash in the air fryer? This handy FAQ will answer all your most pressing questions, whether you’re wondering about recommended cooking time or proper veggie prep.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air frying squash is an easy way to transform your winter squash into a deliciously tender, caramelized, and flavorful side. Even better, you can even use your air-fried squash in other recipes to cut down on prep time.

Should I peel butternut squash before air frying?

Yes, I recommend peeling your squash using a vegetable peeler before air frying it to eliminate unwanted toughness and ensure even cooking.

How long to air fry butternut squash?

When cut into 1-inch cubes, air fry your squash for about 15 minutes at 375 degrees F., shaking the basket halfway through. Remember, though, that every air fryer is different, so your squash may need more or less time, depending on what brand you own. To check for doneness, insert a knife into a cube and ensure it enters and exits the squash easily.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Also Like

Preparing air-roast butternut squash is an exceptionally tender, flavorful, and quick way to pack nutrition into your weekday meals. For even more delectable veggie recipes, this collection has just a few fan favorites that will satisfy the whole family.

If you try this Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted butternut squash on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Recipe

Made with just a few simple ingredients, this Air Fryer Butternut Squash makes a great side dish or addition to salads, pasta, and pizza dishes. With many seasoning options, you can take this basic recipe and customize it to your liking.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 90kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 cups butternut squash cubes* from a 2.5 pounds squash (peeled)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • Pinch of nutmeg optional
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup or brown sugar plus more for drizzling if preferred

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup. Give it a good toss, ensuring that all the butternut squash cubes are coated with the seasonings.
  • Transfer the seasoned butternut squash into the air fryer basket in a single layer. If they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for 15 minutes or until fork tender, making sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the process.
  • To check tenderness, pierce a cube with a knife. If it goes in and out gently, the squash is done. If not fully tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the butternut squash cubes with a teaspoon (or more) of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, made with 2 ½ pounds of squash, yields about 5 to 6 cups of air-fried cubed butternut squash, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Halved Squash: If you prefer to use halved squash instead of cubed squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves recipe.
  • Cutting butternut squash: If you are new to cutting squash, check out our guide on How To Cut Butternut Squash into cubes.
  • Evenly sized: For best results, it is important that your squash cubes are similar in size. Please keep in mind that there’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of the cubes, so keeping them uniform will ensure they are evenly cooked.
  • Adding sweetener: We intentionally limited the amount of sugar (maple syrup or brown sugar) to a small amount (only 1 teaspoon) as too much sugar might cause squash cubes to over-caramelize and potentially burn. If you prefer your dish to be sweeter, feel free to drizzle it with maple syrup after it is cooked (while it is still warm.)
  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place the cubed squash in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.
  • Frozen Butternut Squash Cubes: We also tested this recipe using a 15-ounce bag (standard size) of frozen butternut squash cubes that we bought from the grocery store. If you prefer to use frozen squash, you can follow the recipe as written but adjust the amount of oil and seasoning based on the weight of your squash. In our case, we halved the seasoning and oil. You do not need to wait for it to thaw. Just extend the air frying time to 20 minutes. Finally, be aware that because the butternut squash is frozen, when you air fry it, it will lose most of its moisture and the cubes will become smaller.

Nutrition

Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 394mg | Potassium: 507mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 14886IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:03:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71692 Ingredients Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour. How to Store and Reheat?...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butternut squash: The most essential ingredient in this air fryer recipe is—you guessed it!—butternut squash. Begin by selecting a butternut squash with a firm texture, matte surface, and no bruises. Then, cut it in half lengthwise with a sharp knife. Though slicing butternut squash may seem daunting, you’ll find all the pro tips you need in my foolproof guide on How to Cut Butternut Squash. You also don’t need to peel your squash before using it in this recipe, though you may use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin if you prefer.
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is crucial to giving your air roast butternut squash a moist, tender, and perfectly crisp taste. However, you may also use any other mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, melted butter, or ghee.
  • Seasonings: All you need is garlic powder, kosher salt and pepper to bring out the natural flavors of the squash. Optionally—depending on your recipe—you may also sprinkle your squash with cinnamon, nutmeg, cayenne pepper, and pumpkin spice for an extra warm, sweet, and spicy taste.
  • Optional sweetener: Though not necessary, you may also add light sweeteners like maple syrup or brown sugar to your whole squash to enhance its caramelization and give it a sweet flavor.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves

There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half.
  1. Cut the butternut squash: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Be sure to hold it firmly around its middle with your non-dominant hand. Using a sharp chef’s knife in your free hand, trim off the stem by cutting off about half an inch. Then, while holding it in its side position, cut the squash in half lengthwise through its center, beginning from the top and working your way to the bottom. Remember that you may have to jerk the knife back and forth while applying pressure to loosen the blade while cutting. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds and pulp from the core of the cut squash. You may either discard them or save the seeds to roast later.
Images showing how to air fryer halved butternut squash.
  1. Season the squash halves: Brush the cut side of the squash halves with olive oil and season them with garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  2. Air fry the butternut squash: Place the halved squash cut side down into the basket of the air fryer and cook them for 22 minutes.
  3. Flip the squash: Flip the squash halves so their cut sides face up and cook them for an additional 10 minutes.
  4. Check for doneness: Insert a sharp knife into the neck (i.e., the vertical top) of the squash. If the knife pierces the flesh easily, it’s ready to remove from the heat. If the knife encounters some resistance, continue cooking the squash in one-minute increments until done.

How to Store and Reheat?

Making this air-fried butternut squash recipe is one of the easiest ways to enjoy savory, tender squash all week long. None of your favorite veggies will go to waste with these expert storage tips.

  • Storage: You can store your leftover squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash leftovers, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.

How to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash Halves in Recipes?

Exquisitely tender and expertly flavored, there are dozens of butternut squash recipes to make in the air fryer. These tasty cooking ideas will fill your table with rich, flavorful meals no matter when the craving strikes.

  • Use the flesh: My favorite way to warm up during the chilly winter months is to transform this savory air fryer butternut squash recipe into a warm, hearty meal. My Butternut Squash Soup is luscious, bright, and savory, while my vegan Thai Curry Butternut Squash Soup is a faster way to fill your bowl with bold, aromatic flavors. You can even turn your air-roasted butternut squash into a rich and creamy pasta sauce or a decadent pie filling for a fan-favorite Butternut Squash Pie.
  • Stuff it: Visually stunning and packed with nutrition, Stuffed Squash is a gourmet meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.
  • Mashed butternut squash: Transform your air-fried squash halves into the perfect Thanksgiving side dish using a five-star mashed butternut squash recipe. Like my Sweet Potato Mash, this recipe is fluffy, rich, and flavorful—but with half the calories!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a squash expert to make a delicious side dish fit for a restaurant. These pro tips will ensure your air fryer butternut squash recipe is rich, caramelized, and tender every time.

  • Size of your squash matters: When making roasted butternut squash in the air fryer, you must select a squash that will fit in the basket of your air fryer. Therefore, take a minute when selecting your vegetable to ensure it is an appropriate size for your type of air fryer.
  • Air frying time: How long it takes to cook butternut squash in the air fryer may vary depending on the size of your squash and the brand of your air fryer. In this recipe, I cook my squash halves for 22 minutes cut-side down and another 10 minutes after flipping. However, I recommend checking the doneness of your air-fried squash using the knife test—inserting a knife into the neck of your squash—to tell if your veggie is appropriately tender. If the knife encounters resistance when inserted into the squash’s flesh, continue cooking it in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  • No need to peel: You don’t have to peel your butternut squash halves before adding them to the air fryer. Not only does keeping the skin cut down on prep time, but it also helps give you a good grip when scooping out the flesh to use in other recipes. However, you may peel the squash before air frying if preferred.
  • Start with skin side down: The key to cooking butternut squash halves in the air fryer is beginning the cooking process by placing the squash slices skin side down. This orientation ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Add the sweetener at the last minute: If you choose to make air fryer butternut squash halves with maple syrup, brown sugar, or other sweeteners, wait until the last 5-10 minutes of cooking before adding the ingredient. Limiting these sweeteners’ exposure to high heat will help prevent burning and over-caramelization.

FAQs

Have more questions about this easy air fryer recipe? This simple guide has everything you need, whether you’re wondering about the air frying process or proper squash preparation.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air-roasted butternut squash (whether you cook it in cubes or whole) is a tasty, tender, and quick alternative to oven-roasting, and it even helps free up oven space when preparing multiple dishes at a time.

Do butternut squash halves need to be peeled before cooking?

No, you don’t have to remove the butternut squash skin before cooking. Though some prefer removing the skin beforehand, leaving the skin on helps trap moisture in the veggie during the cooking process, and it makes it easier to scoop out the flesh if you plan on using it for other recipes.

Other Butternut Squash Recipes You Might Also Like

Make the most of squash season by filling your kitchen with all your favorite butternut squash recipes. These recipes have everything you need, from delicious holiday sides to easy weeknight meals.

If you try this Air Fried Halved Butternut Squash recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves Recipe

If cooking the whole butternut squash sounds daunting, try cooking them in the air fryer. The good news is that with this recipe, making Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves is not only easy but also convenient compared to other methods.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 32 minutes
Total Time 37 minutes
Servings 1 butternut squash
Calories 379kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole butternut squash approximately 2.5 pounds, cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. As you are cutting, you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it.*
  • Brush the cut sides of the butternut squash with olive oil and season with garlic powder, salt and pepper.
  • Place the butternut squash halves cut side down* and cook for 22 minutes.
  • Flip the butternut squash halves and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
  • Insert a knife in the “neck” of the squash. If it pierces easily, it should be ready. If it does not feel tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole butternut squash with two halves, which is good for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cutting the squash: It is imperative that you use a sharp knife and take your time as you are cutting the squash. If you are new to the process, be sure to check out our how-to guide to cutting butternut squash like a pro.
  • Sweetener: If you prefer, you can use a sweetener like maple syrup or brown sugar. However, we recommend brushing (or sprinkling) your butternut squash halves with the sweetener of your choice in the last 5 minutes of air frying to prevent over-caramelization or burning.
  • Start with skin side down ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Storage: You can store your leftover halved squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash halves, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.
  • Cubed Butternut Squash: If you prefer to air fry cubed butternut squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 2665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79728IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/feed/ 0
Turkey Injection Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/#respond Tue, 31 Oct 2023 20:02:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71619 Why Inject Your Turkey? This injectable turkey marinade recipe is a must for anyone who wants to make thoroughly seasoned, irresistibly moist turkey meat. Below are a few reasons why using a turkey injection solution will take your turkey game to the next level. Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Injectable Turkey Marinade Now that we covered the equipment, let’s delve into the basic ingredients and explore optional additions and substitutions...

The post Turkey Injection Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Inject Your Turkey?

This injectable turkey marinade recipe is a must for anyone who wants to make thoroughly seasoned, irresistibly moist turkey meat. Below are a few reasons why using a turkey injection solution will take your turkey game to the next level.

Person injecting garlic butter marinade into a turkey's thigh.
  • Flavor enhancement: This turkey injection recipe is the ultimate way to infuse each bite of turkey meat with expert seasoning. Though delicious, turkey rubs and glazes only flavor the skin of the turkey, which may leave you with bland turkey meat. However, injecting a turkey with a marinade-like mixture ensures every morsel has the same robust, savory taste.
  • Moisture and juiciness: Unlike a traditional roasted turkey recipe, there’s no need to frequently baste your meat when you use this marinade injection recipe. The turkey’s skin will trap the moisture within the meat, ensuring your bird comes out as succulent and tender as possible while introducing additional liquid to keep your meat juicy during cooking.
  • Even seasoning from within: In addition to being delectable, this turkey syringe seasoning creates an even internal flavor profile by seasoning the bird from within. As a result, you can reduce the amount of extra seasoning that you use to cover the entire surface of the turkey.
  • Better browning: No one can resist a turkey dinner with a perfectly golden-brown and crispy exterior. In addition to adding a lot of flavor, injecting turkey with this recipe also ensures your turkey browns better during the cooking process, leading to a gorgeous presentation and even better taste.
  • A faster way to marinate: Making a homemade turkey injection is a great way to get the luscious taste of marinated turkey in a fraction of the time. Rather than letting your meat sit in marination juices for hours (if not days), injections will give your turkey the same full-bodied, robust flavor from the moment the marination reaches the meat. With that being said, you can make this turkey injection marinade recipe and inject your turkey for up to 36 hours in advance.

Equipment You Will Need

While we usually refrain from using any type of special equipment in our recipes, this one is different. You will need a meat injector (or a syringe) to inject the marinade into the turkey.

Luckily, it is not hard to find. Most grocery or hardware stores sell turkey seasoning injection kits during the holiday season. The good news is that once you make the investment, you can use it for injecting other types of meat as well.

The injector kit and the needle tip needed to make this recipe.

For this recipe, you will need:

  • Meat Injector: A suitable turkey injector is the most critical component of this recipe’s equipment. We recommend purchasing a stainless steel syringe with a needle that has one opening at the tip. Even though nowadays, most kits come with multiple needle heads, we found that using the one with a single opening gives you better control over the flow of the marinade as you inject it. Additionally, using this type of needle will prevent the injection liquid from leaking out. If you are in the market for a new one, this Stainless Steel Meat Tenderizer Injection Syringe Kit (affiliate link) is the one we used.
  • Baking Sheet or a Large Plate: While you might be tempted to use an oven-roasting bag, thinking that you might need something to capture the leaking liquid, during our testing, we found that there was minimal leakage from the areas injected. Therefore, all you need is a baking sheet or a plate that is large enough to accommodate your turkey.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Injectable Turkey Marinade

Now that we covered the equipment, let’s delve into the basic ingredients and explore optional additions and substitutions to craft your own injection flavors for turkey:

Ingredients needed to make the recipe from the top view.
  • Unsalted butter: Butter is essential to giving this garlic butter turkey injection recipe its iconic rich, savory taste. Though I prefer using unsalted butter to control the meat’s saltiness, you may also use salted butter if you adjust the amount of extra salt accordingly.
  • Chicken stock at room temperature: Chicken stock is the key to giving your turkey injection liquid an irresistibly elegant, moist flavor. You can purchase low-sodium chicken stock from the grocery store or make your own homemade chicken stock.
  • Lemon juice
  • Worcestershire sauce
  • Seasonings: This flavor injection for turkey achieves its savory, robust profile with just a few simple ingredients, including onion powder, garlic powder, and Kosher salt.
  • Turkey: This recipe yields 12 oz. of marinade, ideal for 14-16 pounds of bird. Therefore, feel free to adjust the recipe to accommodate more or less meat. Also, if your turkey is frozen, be sure to fully thaw the meat before beginning your injections.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins:

  • Stock: Though I use chicken stock, you may also use turkey stock for a similarly rich taste as you make your own injection recipe.
  • Fresh garlic: I don’t recommend using minced garlic, as it will clog the syringe of your injector. However, you can mince garlic and infuse the butter with it should you want a bolder, more pungent taste. After all, who doesn’t like the taste of a rich Garlic Butter Sauce? However, be sure to drain the butter-garlic mixture before adding it to your turkey injection fluid in case the remaining garlic pieces clog the syringe.
  • Olive oil: If you enjoy the flavors of olive oil, you can adjust this recipe by using one-half olive oil and one-half butter. With that being said, you can use other mildly flavored oils, such as avocado oil.
  • Sweetener: Want to give your lemon butter turkey injection a slightly sweeter flavor? To cut back on the acidity of this simple recipe, you can make an apple cider, apple juice, or orange juice (without pulp) turkey injection by swapping out this recipe’s lemon juice for these other liquids.
  • Spices: A great way to give your turkey a different seasoning profile is to substitute my recommended injection mix for another delectable profile. For a sweet, salty, and spicy injection for turkey, I recommend adding Old Bay seasoning to your injection mixture. Or, for an even more pronounced heat, you can prepare a piquant Cajun injection marinade using Cajun seasoning. Spices like paprika, black pepper, and cayenne will immediately elevate the heat and depth of flavor, creating an enticing contrast to turkey’s natural flavor. Finally, you may also add a tablespoon of poultry seasoning for more fragrant, herbaceous undertones.
  • Liquid smoke: You can use this turkey injection recipe for smoking, but if you do not have the means to smoke the turkey yet still desire those flavors, liquid smoke is a great option. To make a liquid smoke turkey injection recipe, add ½ teaspoon of liquid smoke to the mixture, taste it, and add more as necessary. However, please keep in mind that a small amount goes a long way, so be sure to taste after every addition.
  • Fresh herbs: Bright, garden-fresh, and aromatic, an herb turkey injection recipe is easy to make. Simply steep a small amount (a tablespoon or so) of roughly chopped fresh rosemary, sage, or thyme in your butter injection sauce for 10-15 minutes and remove them before injecting the mixture into your turkey.
  • Ground black pepper (or white pepper): We decided to keep black pepper as an optional ingredient in our turkey injection marinade, as most roasted turkey recipes use black pepper in the seasoning for the exterior of the bird. However, if you like the peppery flavors, you can add a small amount (no more than ¼ teaspoon) to this liquid turkey seasoning mixture.

How to Make Turkey Injection Marinade?

Ready in just ten minutes, this DIY injectable turkey marinade is the easiest way to elevate your turkey to a holiday centerpiece. Follow these two simple steps, and you’ll have everything you need to make an exquisitely juicy, flavorful turkey meal.

Two images side by side showing how to make turkey injector marinade.
  1. Melt the butter: Place butter in a saucepan over medium heat and cook until just melted.
  2. Add the remaining ingredients: Remove the melted butter from the heat and add the chicken stock, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder, and Kosher salt. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly mixed, then let the liquid cool for a few minutes. Though the mixture doesn’t have to be cold, ensure that it reaches close to room temperature before using it to inject the turkey.

How to Inject Turkey With Butter?

Injecting turkey for roasting, smoking, and deep-frying is a piece of cake with these hassle-free instructions. 

A collage of images showing how to prepare and inject turkey marinade into the breast and thigh of a turkey.
  1. Dry the turkey: Before beginning the injection process, place the turkey on a sheet pan or a large enough plate and dry thoroughly on all sides using paper towels. Set it aside.
  2. Fill the injector: Place the injector tip into the now-slightly cooled butter garlic injection and pull the plunger back until the syringe fills. If the mixture separates, agitate the butter marinade by plunging back and forth until the ingredients re-incorporate and emulsify.
  3. Inject turkey with seasoning: Insert the tip of the turkey injector into the thickest parts of the turkey meat, starting from the breast and moving down to the thighs. As you are injecting the marinade, be free to go in at least one inch deep at a 45-degree angle, pushing ½ ounce of marinade per site. You may begin pulling the tip out as you slowly inject the liquid but don’t force it. Stop your injection just before reaching the turkey’s skin. If you hit a bone with your injector, pull the needle back slightly and continue the injection process.
Person shown as she injects the turkey and then covers it with plastic wrap.
  1. Continue with the remaining turkey: Continue the injection process throughout the turkey, including the wings, breast, thighs, and legs—20-24 times in total. Try not to massage or distribute the liquid after injecting, as the solution will naturally flow into the meat as it rests in the fridge. If any solution drips out of a piercing site, apply gentle pressure to the hole with a finger as you continue injecting the bird in an adjacent area.
  2. Let the turkey rest: Place the turkey onto a large cooking pan, cover it with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and refrigerate it overnight.

When to Inject Turkey?

The ideal time for injecting turkey with butter depends on your goals for preparation and cooking methods. Below, you’ll find just a few tips for ensuring your turkey comes out perfectly succulent, no matter how you cook it.

  • For roasting or smoking: If you plan to roast or smoke your bird, I recommend injecting your turkey marinade at least 4-6 hours before cooking, overnight, or for up to 36 hours.
  • Deep-frying: When deep-frying a turkey, you only need to inject the turkey seasoning into the bird between thirty minutes and an hour before cooking. 

Variations on this Seasoning Injection for Turkey

The best recipe for injecting turkey is one you can make your own, regardless of your ideal flavor profile. The recipe we are using here is a basic one that is ideal for a Thanksgiving turkey. However, you can play with the flavors depending on the occasion and your preference. 

Below are a few variations with unique combinations of rich, sweet, and spicy ingredients. Feel free to try them as you make your own injection marinade. However, as we mentioned earlier,  if you choose to use spices, make sure to run them through a spice grinder so that they won’t clog the injection needle.

  • Beer and butter poultry injection: Beer can add incomparably tender, aromatic, and deep flavor to your turkey injections. If you want to go for it, omit the lemon juice and chicken stock and, instead, add six ounces of beer (brown ale or lager). If you prefer, you can also add a teaspoon of hot sauce, such as Tabasco, to give your injection a kick of heat.
  • Honey butter injection for turkey: For a slightly sweeter injection, melt a teaspoon of honey in the hot butter mixture. This honeyed blend balances out this recipe’s bolder, savory flavors, giving you a mild, caramelized-like taste.
  • Creole or Cajun turkey injection recipe: Few main dishes are as robustly seasoned, fiery, or delectable as authentic Creole cuisine. You, too, can transform your injectable marinade into a classic Creole injection for turkey by omitting this recipe’s Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, and onion powder. Instead, add one tablespoon of ground blackening seasoning and a pinch (or more!) of cayenne pepper.

Expert Tips

We learned so much as we were working on this recipe. Come to find out, there is so much to know when it comes to injecting a turkey with marinade. Below, we are sharing everything you need to know, including where to inject the turkey with butter to ideal marinade temperatures:

  • Thaw frozen turkey: If you are using frozen turkey, ensure it’s fully thawed before you start the injection process. Otherwise, the injection marinade won’t spread evenly throughout the meat. 
  • You don’t need to wait for the turkey to come to room temperature: Though I don’t suggest injecting your turkey while the meat is frozen, I warn against letting it come to room temperature before inserting it with the butter injection. Allowing the turkey to heat and cool repeatedly can grow unwanted bacteria, making the meat unsafe to eat. 
  • Ensure your butter isn’t too hot: Though your injection marinade doesn’t have to be at room temperature, it shouldn’t be boiling, either. Injecting your turkey with a too-hot marinade may begin cooking the meat, resulting in overcooked or unsafe turkey after the final cooking process. I recommend letting the mixture cool for 10 minutes or so while you are preparing the turkey for injection.
  • Move quickly to avoid butter solidification: The best injectable marinade for turkey is neither too hot nor too cold. You can start injecting as soon as it is lukewarm. However, I recommend moving quickly as butter tends to solidify as it sits.
  • Use hot tab water: Towards the end of the injection process, as the butter cools down, it may clog the needle. If and when that happens, an easy solution is to run the syringe (and the needle tip) under hot tap water for 15-20 seconds.
  • Practice makes perfect: If you’ve never used an injector before (or want to test your marination recipe before using it on a full bird), I suggest starting on less meaty parts of the bird (such as wings and drumsticks) to practice before you begin injecting the “big-ticket portions.”
  • Don’t pierce the bird’s cavity: When injecting your bird, try not to penetrate beyond the meat and into the turkey’s inner cavity, as the marinade won’t infuse the meat unless the needle lands within its fibers.
  • Don’t worry about solidified butter: Since you need to store your turkey in the fridge after injection, don’t worry if you find hardened butter around the bird’s injection sites. This butter seepage represents a small amount of the total marination liquid within the bird, and it will help the turkey brown during the cooking process.
  • Brining and injecting: You might be wondering, can I use this garlic butter injection if I am brining my turkey? The answer is yes. You can both brine and inject a turkey with marinade before roasting. However, keep in mind that the two methods should complement each other in terms of potency, flavor, and the amount of salt used. If you choose to use both preparation methods, I recommend brining the meat first for 12-24 hours, then rinsing off the bird and pat-drying it with a paper towel. Then, you can inject the meat with the injection marinade. However, when preparing the injection solution, omit using salt to prevent your turkey from being overly salty.
  • Use this injection for turkey breast, drumsticks, thighs, and more: You don’t need to cook up a whole bird to use this tasty injection blend. However, if you plan to inject smaller cuts of turkey meat, adjust the amount of marinade you use according to the size of the meat you are injecting. You can then store your leftovers in the fridge in an airtight container, reheating the mixture before using it again. 
  • Food safety: After injecting your turkey with this injector recipe, promptly transfer it to the refrigerator. This cool temperature will allow the flavors to evenly distribute throughout the meat while also protecting against unwanted bacterial growth. Furthermore, don’t reuse excess marinade that came into contact with uncooked meat.

FAQs

Should I inject turkey the night before?

To inject turkey before roasting or smoking, I highly recommend injecting your turkey overnight (or up to 36 hours!), ensuring the flavors have time to distribute evenly throughout the bird. However, if you plan on deep-frying your turkey, you may insert the injectable butter marinade for the turkey thirty minutes before cooking. 

Does injecting a turkey make it juicier?

Yes! The additional liquids, oils, and fats common in injector marinades will keep your turkey from becoming dry, with an even distribution of succulent, moist texture throughout the bird.

How to inject a turkey without an injector?

I don’t recommend trying to internally marinate a turkey without a turkey injector. However, if you don’t have an injector, you may create knife pockets or slits in the turkey meat using a sharp knife. Then, use a spoon to pour the marinade into these pockets. Though the mixture won’t distribute as evenly as it would with an injector, it’ll still introduce some flavor and moisture to the turkey meat.

Can I use an injected turkey to make gravy?

Absolutely! The flavors from the infused turkey will help enhance the gravy, lending it all the rich, savory undertones of the injection marinade.

Can you inject a butterball turkey?

You can definitely use this turkey injector recipe on butterball turkey! This succulent addition adds tender juiciness to your meat, and you can also use it on leaner poultry, such as heritage turkey or chicken.

Other Turkey Marinades and Rubs You Might Also Like

Do you love to make your own turkey injection marinade? Then these other five-star flavoring recipes will astound you with their simple, decadent, and lively profiles.

If you try this injection recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Person injecting marinade into a turkey's thigh.
Print

Turkey Injection Recipe

Here’s a simple turkey injector recipe made with butter and chicken broth. Use this easy recipe to add flavor and moisture to your turkey from the inside out. It can be used for the whole turkey or the turkey breast (or other parts.)
Course Dinner, Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Injecting Time 20 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 926kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter One 4 oz. stick
  • 1 cup chicken stock at room temperature (or turkey stock)
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 Turkey 14-16 pounds – fully thawed if frozen, cleaned and dried with paper towel

Instructions

  • Place the butter in a saucepan over medium heat and cook until just melted. Do not let it turn brown.
  • Off the heat, add the chicken stock, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder, garlic powder, and Kosher salt. Whisk until everything is incorporated. Let it cool for a few minutes. It doesn’t have to be cold, but rather just close to room temperature.
  • Place the injector tip into the butter mixture and pull the plunger back to fill the syringe. If the mixture separates, you can “agitate” the butter solution by plunging back and forth a couple of times to emulsify and incorporate all the ingredients.
  • Prior to injecting the bird, make sure that any air pockets in the syringe are removed. To do so, point the syringe upwards and gently push the plunger until all the air is extracte.
  • Using the injector, insert the tip at a 45-degree angle, distributing ¼ ounce per site at least 1 inch deep. You can start to pull the tip out as you slowly inject but do not force it. Stop the injection just before you reach the skin.
  • Continue this process throughout several areas of the turkey, including the wings, breast, thighs, and legs, for a total of 20 to 24 times. Don’t be tempted to massage or distribute the liquid because once it is injected, the solution will self-absorb as it rests in the fridge. If you see the solution escaping from a different pierced area, you should apply slight pressure using your finger so that the solution does not ooze out while you are injecting it into an adjacent area.
  • Cover it with stretch film and refrigerate for at least 4 hours, overnight or up to 36 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 ounces (1 1/2 cups) of injection fluid, which is ideal for a turkey that is between 14-16 pounds. The nutritional values below do not include turkey, and they are for the whole injector recipe.
  • Make Ahead: You can technically make this recipe ahead of time, but if you do, you still have to warm it up on the stove. Therefore, we do not recommend making it ahead.
  • Storage: If you decide not to use the whole marinade, we recommend discarding it to prevent contamination.
  • Move quickly to avoid butter solidification: As you inject the bird, we recommend moving quickly as butter tends to solidify as it sits. Towards the end of the injection process, as the butter cools down, it may clog the needle. If that happens, an easy solution is to run the syringe (and the needle tip) under hot tap water for 15-20 seconds.
  • Don’t pierce the bird’s cavity: When injecting your bird, try not to penetrate beyond the meat and into the turkey’s inner cavity, as the marinade won’t infuse the meat unless the needle lands within its fibers.
  • Brining and injecting: You can both brine and inject a turkey with marinade before roasting. However, keep in mind that the two methods should complement each other in terms of flavor, and the amount of salt used. If you choose to use both preparation methods, I recommend brining the meat first for 12-24 hours, then rinsing off the bird and pat-drying it with a paper towel. Then, you can inject the meat with the injection marinade. However, when preparing the injection solution, omit using salt to prevent your turkey from being overly salty.
  • Use any of your favorite turkey recipes: You can use any of your favorite turkey recipes once the marinating time is complete. However, make sure to adjust the amount of salt used if you are using other seasonings to flavor your turkey.
  • You can use this injection marinade recipe for chicken as well. However, be sure to adjust the recipe according to the size of your chicken.

Nutrition

Calories: 926kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 94g | Saturated Fat: 58g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 25g | Trans Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 248mg | Sodium: 2906mg | Potassium: 502mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 2821IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Turkey Injection Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-injection-recipe/feed/ 0
Turkey Wings Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/#respond Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:29:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71401 Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe hits the spot, I have so many other turkey recipes guaranteed to delight your tastebuds—without having to cook the entire turkey! My Baked Turkey Tenderloin is an elegant, herby main worthy of a food magazine spread, while my Turkey Drumsticks packs all the juicy, savory goodness of the whole bird...

The post Turkey Wings Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe hits the spot, I have so many other turkey recipes guaranteed to delight your tastebuds—without having to cook the entire turkey! My Baked Turkey Tenderloin is an elegant, herby main worthy of a food magazine spread, while my Turkey Drumsticks packs all the juicy, savory goodness of the whole bird in perfectly portioned pieces.

Southern style turkey wings garnished with thyme from the top view.

Why Does This Recipe Work?

If you’ve ever tried baking turkey wings in the oven like you would cook chicken wings, chances are, you’ve ended up with dry, flavorless meat. However, I’ve designed this recipe to give you juicy turkey wings packed with savory flavor every time you prepare it. 

During our recipe testing, we learned two important lessons:

  1. Gentle heat is the best: You probably already know this, but turkey meat tends to be tougher than chicken, requiring a different cooking method. While you can technically roast turkey wings in the oven like you would with chicken wings (and they will look nice and crispy), the meat ends up being tough and dry.
    In our quest for a solution, we came across a Southern turkey wings recipe. In this method, the wings were cooked low and slow, with a bit of extra liquid added to the baking pan. Following in the food steps of the Southerners, we were able to achieve turkey meat that was juicy and tender on the inside, complemented by a beautifully browned, crispy exterior.
  2. Start with a cover and then remove it for browning. Another trick we learned was to bake them covered for an hour, followed by an additional thirty minutes uncovered. This initial covered phase helped wings retain moisture, ensuring a juicy interior, while the subsequent uncovered phase allowed them to develop a crispy exterior.

Ingredients

Tired of bland, flavorless wings? This recipe combines fresh, rich, and flavorful ingredients to make the best seasoning for turkey wings—a savory combination of fresh herbs and spices no one can resist. Below is everything you’ll need:

Turkey wings seasoning, oil, stock and turkey wings from the top view.
  • Fresh turkey wings: Whole turkey wings have three distinct parts to them: the drumette, the wingette (also known as the “flat”), and the tip or “flapper.” The turkey wing tips are small and have little meat, so they’re prone to burning. Therefore, I recommend removing the tips and saving them to make turkey stock. While you can cook turkey wings as a whole, I prefer cutting them before roasting. If you’d like some help with this step, you can buy your turkey wings whole, cut them yourself, or ask the local butcher at your grocery store to cut them for you. If you prefer using frozen turkey wings, be sure to fully thaw them first. No matter how you buy your turkey wings, though, just be sure to avoid smoked turkey wings (which come pre-cooked), as they’ll dry out while making this recipe.
  • Oil: I prefer olive oil to give my slow-roasted turkey wings their iconic crispy exteriors and tender, succulent insides. However, another mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
  • Turkey wings seasonings: In my opinion, the best seasoning for turkey wings comes with a savory mix of pantry-ready ingredients, including onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, Kosher salt, and black pepper. To add extra-fresh overtones to your seasoning, I also recommend adding dried thyme and parsley to the mixture. You may also add cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for an extra kick of spice, though this ingredient is optional.
  • Stock: Use either chicken broth or turkey stock to give your baked turkey wings extra succulent meat.
  • Fresh herbs: Though this garnish is optional, fresh herbs—like parsley, thyme, and rosemary—will transform your tender baked turkey wings into a gourmet meal, infusing each bite with herby, bright flavors.

How to Make It

This oven-baked turkey wings recipe takes only a handful of simple steps, giving you tender, juicy turkey no matter when you prepare it. 

  1. Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
A collage of images where a person is showing what to season turkey wings with.
  1. Dry the meat: Place the turkey wings on a cutting board and use paper towels to pat dry each piece on all sides. Once dry, transfer the wings to a large bowl.
  2. Season the turkey wings: Drizzle olive oil over the turkey wings and sprinkle them with an even coating of onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper. 
  3. Marinate turkey wings: Toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Then, cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat sit in the turkey wing marinade for a minimum of 30 minutes in the fridge. If possible, I recommend marinating the turkey wings overnight to ensure they soak up as much flavor as possible.
Step by step images showing how to make turkey wings fall off the bone.
  1. Add the stock: When ready to bake, place the marinated turkey wings in a Dutch oven or casserole dish and add the stock to the base.
  2. Roast the turkey wings: Cover the dish with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven. Then, bake the turkey wings for one hour. After one hour, remove the foil and cook them in the baking dish for another 30 minutes. You may remove your slow-baked turkey wings from the oven when their thickest portions reach an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. However, it is OK to let the meat cook until it reaches a maximum of 180 degrees F.
  3. Serve: Transfer the roast turkey wings to a serving platter when ready. Drizzle them with the juices in the pan for maximum juiciness and flavor, then garnish the meat with fresh herbs.

How to Make Turkey Wings Crispy?

For extra crispy baked turkey wings, broil them for a few minutes. Here is how I do it:

Crispy turkey wings on a wire rack.
  1. Remove the cooked turkey from the pan after baking and transfer the wings to a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. 
  2. Place the meat under the broiler for 1-2 minutes or until the skin crisps up. However, keep a close eye on the turkey to avoid burning, as this meat can go from perfectly juicy to thoroughly dry in very little time.
  3. Let the broiled turkey wings rest for 5 minutes before serving.

How to Store, Reheat, Freeze, and Thaw?

One taste of these oven-fried turkey wings, and you won’t want to sacrifice a single bite. Storing your turkey wings is a cinch with these pro tips, giving you easy meal prep for days on end.

  • Store: After slow-cooking turkey wings in the oven, first cool them to room temperature, and then place them in an airtight container. Store them in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Allow the baked turkey flats and drummettes to come to room temperature. Once they’ve cooled, place them in an airtight container, ensuring they are well-covered to prevent freezer burn. These turkey pieces can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: I recommend thawing your frozen turkey overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: To reheat your turkey wings, place them in a casserole dish with the juices and warm them in a 350-degree Fahrenheit oven for 10-15 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Recipe Variations

The best-baked turkey wings recipe is one that you can customize according to your personal preference. Below, I’ve included some of my favorite ways to switch up this delectable main to satisfy all your cravings.

  • Marinade: Take this easy recipe to the next level; marinate turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a casserole dish that will accommodate all the wings comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Southern-style: Looking for an authentic Southern recipe for turkey wings? To make this fresh, flavorful variation, add hardy vegetables (such as bell peppers and onions) into your cooking liquid. If preferred, you can strain the juices post-cooking, place them in a small saucepan, and reduce them until they thicken to a sauce-like texture. Then, serve your turkey wings and veggies over a bed of rice and drizzle them with the sauce for a five-star meal that tastes straight out of Tennessee.
  • Smothered: Preparing smothered baked turkey wings is an easy way to give each bite decadently rich flavors. To make the sauce, use the leftover pan drippings to make turkey gravy and pour it over the freshly baked turkey wings. Alternatively, I’ve also seen examples where people prepare cream of mushroom turkey wings instead of cooking their own gravy. If you prefer that shortcut, warm up the cream of mushroom soup and smother the meat just before serving.
  • Cajun seasoning: Give your meat a kick of savory, smoky flavor by baking Cajun turkey wings in the oven. All you need to do is change the seasoning for the turkey wings and use our spicy and bold Blackened Seasoning instead.
  • Lemon pepper turkey wings: To add bright, citrusy zest to your baked turkey wings, I recommend swapping out our recommended poultry seasoning mixture for a five-minute Lemon Pepper Seasoning.

What To Serve With Turkey Wings?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving up a platter of turkey wings and stuffing for a small holiday gathering or making your favorite comfort foods for Sunday supper. These ideas will fill your table with delectable sides, whether you’re preparing your go-to Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes, Friendsgiving Recipes, or looking for creative ideas for your next Football Food spread.

Turkey wings and rice in a bowl with a person drizzling rice over the meat.
  • Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving: Not a fan of cooking the full bird? Make this easy recipe instead! Serving a menu of turkey wings and Cornbread Dressing with a side of Maple Cranberry Sauce is an automatic hit among guests, especially when paired with my creamy Green Bean Casserole recipe. Or, if you’re looking for a rich, filling side, my Mashed Sweet Potatoes or Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes will fill every fork with the velvety taste of seasoned potatoes.
  • Sunday dinners: With this iconic menu, you’ll never run out of turkey wing dinner ideas. All your Sunday supper guests will be satisfied when you pair your wings with cheesy classics like my Healthy Mac and Cheese and Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread. You can even add a touch of Southern goodness by baking a batch of Sweet Potato Biscuits. Or, for a healthy yet hearty meal, you can serve a spread of baked turkey wings and rice using any of your favorites, from wild rice to brown jasmine rice or even white rice.
  • Game day: No game day menu is complete without your go-to dip recipes. Your guests won’t be able to resist dipping their tender turkey meat in creamy, tangy, and light sauces, like my Yogurt Ranch Dip or Blue Cheese Dip.

Expert Tips

It is no secret that slow-baked turkey wings are a great option when trying to serve a lot of people with minimal time in the kitchen. However, there are a few lessons we learned during our recipe testing. Below are our foolproof tips for success:

  • The size of the turkey wings matters: There is a direct correlation between the size of the wings and the cooking time. For instance, young/small turkey wings will need less time in the oven than big turkey wings. Therefore, it’s best to buy wings that are similar in size to ensure even cooking. For reference, when testing this recipe, I used four wings totaling about three pounds. Furthermore, I don’t recommend using wing tips, as there is very little meat on them, and they will overcook when following this recipe.
  • Marinate longer: If you have the time, let the meat marinate overnight. While a 30-minute marination is effective, letting it sit longer ensures the flavors meld and deepen, yielding more flavorful meat.
  • Even layer: Ensure that the drummettes and wingettes are on an even layer in the baking dish. Overcrowding the dish will result in under or over-baked meat.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where people bake their wings at higher oven temperatures—like 350, 375, or even 400 degrees F. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings, whereas cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.
  • Cover it well: If you own a Dutch oven with a lid (such as this Le Creuset Braiser – affiliate link), this is the time to use it. The tight-fitting lid of a Dutch oven is ideal for keeping the meat’s juices contained, giving you succulent, moist turkey wings while cooking them in the oven. However, if you don’t have a Dutch oven, just be sure to tightly cover your casserole dish with aluminum foil to ensure it is fully sealed.
  • Turkey wing temperature: Technically, your turkey is safe to eat when the thickest part of the wing reaches 165 degrees F. when tested with a digital thermometer. However, please be aware that following the recipe below, your wings could register for up to 180 degrees. But, because we are cooking it low and slow and in a bit of liquid, this is okay. As a matter of fact, it is recommended for the most tender turkey wings. According to science writer Andrew Zimmerman Jones, “As you cook the turkey, muscle fibers contract until they begin to break up at around 180 F. Bonds within the molecules begin to break down, causing proteins to unravel, and the dense muscle meat to become more tender.”
  • Experiment with the recipe: Feel free to take this basic recipe and cooking method and experiment with various seasoning blends, serving styles, and favorite side dishes to make it your own.

FAQs

What temperature to bake turkey wings?

To achieve maximum tenderness, I recommend cooking your turkey wings (covered) at a low temperature, like 300 degrees F., for one hour, followed by thirty minutes uncovered.

How long to cook turkey wings in the oven?

When making slow-cooked turkey wings in the oven, I suggest cooking them for one hour, covered, at 300 degrees F. Then, bake the meat for an additional 30 minutes, uncovered, at the same temperature. This cooking time will ensure your meat comes out both tender and crisp without being dry or lacking in flavor.

Why are my turkey wings tough?

Your turkey meat will be tough if you cook it in a high-temperature oven for a long time without any liquid.

How to make turkey wings tender?

We found that the best way to tenderize turkey wings is to cook them at a low temperature (I recommend 300 degrees F.) for a long time (about 1 ½ hours.) Cooking the meat covered for the first hour and uncovered for the last half-hour ensures that the meat cooks evenly without drying.

Do you boil turkey wings before baking?

No, I don’t recommend boiling your turkey wings before baking them, as this additional step will strip the meat of their natural juices, leaving them flavorless and rubbery.

How long to marinate turkey wings?

When you marinate your turkey wings, let them sit in your seasoning mixture or your favorite turkey marinade for a minimum total time of thirty minutes. However—if possible—I recommend letting your meat marinate overnight in the fridge for extra deep, developed flavors.

Do you cover turkey wings when baking?

Yes, we do recommend covering them for the first half of roasting and then removing the cover for the last 30 minutes to ensure browning on the skin.

At what temperature are turkey wings done?

The internal temperature for turkey wings should reach a minimum of 165 degrees F. before serving. However, it is okay to cook wings until they reach 180 degrees F. to give them time to crisp up and tenderize.

Are turkey wings healthy?

Turkey wings contain many essential nutrients, such as protein, iron, and calcium, that make them a healthy choice. However, unlike turkey breast, turkey wings are dark meat, which also tends to be high in fat. If you want to reduce your cholesterol intake, I recommend removing the skin from the turkey wings before preparing this recipe.

How many turkey wings in a pound?

The number of wings in a pound depends on the size of the turkey, as large turkey wings weigh more than small turkey wings. However, the wings I used in this recipe were of medium size, weighing 0.7 pounds each with the drumette and wingette (three pounds total).

Other Turkey Recipes You Might Also Like

Can’t get enough of this tasty turkey dinner’s rich, tender taste? These other healthy turkey dishes will fill your plate with savory, succulent, and flavorful meals every night of the week.

If you try this Baked Turkey Wings recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked turkey wings freshly baked in a casserole dish.
Print

Baked Turkey Wings Recipe

Baked Turkey Wings perfectly seasoned with a simple spice mixture and then roasted in the oven low and slow, resulting in wings that boast crispy skin and succulent meat.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 545kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds turkey wings drumettes and flats separated, and tips removed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika for a smoky flavor
  • 1 tablespoon dried thyme
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 cup chicken stock or turkey stock
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme or parsley as garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
  • To prepare the turkey wings, place them on a cutting board and pat dry each piece on all sides using paper towels. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  • Drizzle the turkey wings with olive oil and sprinkle them with onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper.
  • Toss to combine. Cover the seasoned wings with stretch film and let them marinate for at least 30 minutes in the fridge. You can let them marinate overnight if you have the time.
  • When ready to roast, transfer the wings into a casserole dish or a Dutch oven. Add the stock, making sure to not pour it directly over the turkey (we do not want all the spices to wash away.)
  • Cover the dish tightly with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven and bake for 1 hour. After 1 hour, remove the cover and continue cooking for another 30 minutes. During this time, the turkey will reach the ideal 165 degrees F. when a meat thermometer is inserted into the thickest part of a drumette. However, it is okay to let the meat cook after it exceeds the 165 degrees F. mark (up to 180 degrees F.).
  • When ready to serve, transfer the turkey wings onto a serving platter, drizzle them with the juices in the pan, and garnish with fresh herbs.
  • Alternatively, if you prefer them to have a crispy skin, you can remove the wings from the pan onto a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. Place them under the broiler and roast for a minute or two while keeping a very close eye on them.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6-7 pieces of wings made up of drumettes and wingettes. Depending on the weight and size of your wings, this amount might change. However, we think it is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Wings: You can buy whole wings and cut them yourself (here is a tutorial on how to cut turkey wings into segments) or ask your butcher to cut them for you.
  • Size of the wings & cooking time: There is a direct correlation between the size of your wings and the time it will take them to roast thoroughly. The best way to measure doneness is by using a meat thermometer. If the wings register between 165 degrees F and 180 degrees F, they should be safe to eat.
  •  Marinade: Alternatively, you can marinade turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a baking dish that will accommodate all the pieces comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where wings are baked at higher oven temperatures. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings. Instead, cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.

Nutrition

Calories: 545kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 161mg | Sodium: 797mg | Potassium: 678mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 622IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Turkey Wings Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/feed/ 0
How To Cut Turkey Wings https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/#respond Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:22:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71471 While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier process. Thankfully, nowadays, you can find turkey wings sold separately in supermarkets, making it easier for the consumer. You can certainly ask your butcher to do it for you, but if that is not an option, this short tutorial is here to show you how. Equipment You Will Need Cutting...

The post How To Cut Turkey Wings appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier process. Thankfully, nowadays, you can find turkey wings sold separately in supermarkets, making it easier for the consumer.

You can certainly ask your butcher to do it for you, but if that is not an option, this short tutorial is here to show you how.

Turkey wings cut into sections from the top view.

Equipment You Will Need

Cutting turkey wings into segments is a relatively easy task that requires a few basic kitchen tools, which you probably already have. You will need:

  • A sturdy cutting board: While any cutting board will work for cutting raw turkey wings, having a dedicated cutting board specifically for poultry is recommended. Most chefs recommend using a plastic cutting board that is easier to clean, so that is what we recommend.
  • A sharp knife: While a sharp Chef’s knife would work, if you have a smaller knife like a boning or pairing knife, it would be ideal. Poultry sheers could work as well, but cutting through turkey wing joints with kitchen shears proves to be more challenging than with chicken wings.

Parts of A Turkey Wing:

Before diving into how to section a turkey wing, it is essential to understand the fundamental parts of a turkey wing.

A turkey wing typically has three parts: the drumette, the wingette (or flat), and the wing tip (or flapper). The joints are the points where these parts connect. If you put your index finger in these joints, you can easily feel the natural gap between each section.

Three parts of a turkey wing on a cutting board with text over the image.

Now, you can cook turkey wings as a whole, but because of their uneven size and thickness, cutting them helps with even cooking and easier consumption. Plus, by separating wings into sections, you can achieve consistent browning and crispiness, especially if you are frying or roasting them in the oven.

This is especially true when it comes to the wing tip. Since it has very little meat and tends to burn easily, it is often used to make turkey stock.

How to Cut Up A Turkey Wing into Parts?

A collage of images showing how to cut a turkey wing into segments.
  1. Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on your cutting board. Dry it thoroughly on all sides. Turn it to its back, ensuring that the skin connecting the wingette and drumette lays flat on the cutting board.
  2. Cut the skin: Carefully cut the skin flap until you reach the joint. This step will give us more control when breaking the joints.
  3. Break the bone: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette. Simply use your index finger to locate the natural gap between the bones. Take the wingette with one hand and the wing tip with the other. Gently pull them away from one another to “crack” the joint. While this is an optional step, doing so will help you find and cut through the joint easily.
  4. Separate the wingette from the drumette: Place your knife over the joint and carefully apply pressure while adjusting the angle to cut through it. Be careful not to cut through the bone. Instead, aim for the cartilage and soft tissue of the joint.
Person cutting the wing tip of a turkey wing.
  1. Cut the wing tip: Locate the joint between the wing tip and the wingette. Run your knife through the joint to loosen it. If it is resisting, use both hands to break the joint to make it easier to separate them. 
  2. Examine for bone fragments: After cutting, check each joint to make sure that there are no small bone fragments left.

Expert Tips:

Cutting turkey wings might seem straightforward, but for the best results, there are a few nuances to consider. Below are some tips to help you refine your technique and make the process even smoother:

  • Safety first: Remember to always use caution when using sharp knives on slippery surfaces like raw poultry. Take your time as you cut through skin, and always make sure it is securely positioned on the cutting board to avoid any accidents. 
  • Do not skip the drying: While it may come as an unnecessary step, drying the skin on the wings will make it easier (and safer) to handle the wings and cut the joints. If they are still slippery, use a paper towel to grip and hold them.
  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Sanitize: Cross contamination is always a major concern when working with poultry. Therefore, it is important to thoroughly clean and sanitize all equipment and surfaces that come in contact with raw meat.

If you try this method, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of giving it a try.

Turkey wing sections on a cutting board from the top view.
Print

How To Cut Turkey Wings

Learn How To Cut Turkey Wings into segments at home using this step-by-step tutorial.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 turkey wing
Calories 338kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Boning knife or any other smaller (easy to control) sharp knife
  • 1 Cutting Board (plastic) Ideally used only when handling poultry

Ingredients

  • 1 Turkey Wing

Instructions

  • Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on the cutting board and pat it dry on all sides using paper towels. Position it so that the skin connecting the drumette and wingette is flat against the cutting board.
  • Cut the skin: Gently cut the skin flap up to the joint so that you can have better control as you “break” the joint.
  • “Crack” the joint: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette using your index finger. Try to feel the natural separation between the bones. Hold the wingette in one hand and the wing tip in the other and carefully pull them apart to expose the joint.
  • Separate the wingette from the drumette: Position your knife over the exposed joint and apply pressure. You would have to adjust as needed to cut through, navigating your way between the bone and the soft tissue.
  • Remove the wing tip: Locate the joint connecting the wing tip and wingette. If you can, cut through it. If it is tight, manually break the joint holding each piece with one hand and crack the joint. You may have to go back and forth with the knife to achieve a clean cut.

Video

Notes

  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Need a delicious recipe to use your wings? Be sure to try our Baked Turkey Wings recipe.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Protein: 35g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 120mg | Sodium: 94mg | Potassium: 412mg | Vitamin A: 19IU | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Cut Turkey Wings appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/feed/ 0
How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/#respond Mon, 16 Oct 2023 23:02:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71239 We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time. If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole...

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time.

If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole grains, including Black Rice, Bulgur Wheat, Quinoa, and Wild Rice.

Cooked jasmine brown rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Jasmine Brown Rice

In and of itself, jasmine brown rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. The additional ingredients add that much more flavor, character, and color. We will need:

  • Rice: Brown jasmine rice, also referred to as whole-grain jasmine rice, brown Thai rice, jasmati brown rice, or unpolished rice, is a type of long-grain brown rice coming from Thailand and Southeast Asia. Its distinctive light brown color comes from retaining the outer layers, which are removed, along with the germ, to create white jasmine rice. Because jasmine brown rice is a whole-grain rice, it has a slightly matte finish, nutty taste, and chewy texture. You can find it in the global section of the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or even online. My favorite brands are Lundberg organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). We tested this recipe using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Water is the most common cooking liquid for rice and offers the easiest approach. With that being said, you can add more flavor by swapping the water for Chicken Stock, Vegetable Broth, or Veggie Scrap Stock instead.
Ingredients to make the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

While the below additions are optional, I chose to use them in the recipe for extra flavor. Luckily, they are ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Olive oil or butter: To give the rice a glossy sheen and extra flavor, add 1-2 tablespoons olive or butter right into the cooking liquid.
  • Kosher salt: Adding salt at the beginning of cooking will enhance the natural flavor of the rice.
  • Black pepper: For some slight heat, I like to add freshly ground black pepper after the rice is done cooking.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh parsley at the end adds both color and flavor. However, feel free to adjust the herbs you choose based on the dish you are serving it with. I usually pair it with different herbs that complement Asian flavors, like cilantro, mint, basil, or scallions.

Brown Jasmine Rice Cooking Instructions (Stovetop)

This Thai brown jasmine rice recipe is a cinch to make. Since brown rice takes longer to cook than white rice, the hardest part is waiting for it to finish on the stove. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to cook brown jasmine rice on the stove top.
  1. Rince rice: Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Boil water: In a heavy-bottomed, medium saucepan over high heat, add 2 cups of cooking liquid, along with the olive oil and salt (if using). Bring to a boil.
  3. Add rice: During our recipe testing, we found that the best brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio is 1:2. Therefore, as soon as your cooking liquid comes to a boil, add 1 cup of rinsed and drained rice to the cooking liquid.
  4. Cover and cook: Cover with the lid, and reduce the heat to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid. After 30 minutes, open the lid and check to see if the liquid is fully absorbed. If not, continue to simmer in 3-minute increments until the excess water has been absorbed.
Cooked jasmine brown rice being fluffed.
  1. Rest: Remove from the heat and rest the rice for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  2. Fluff and serve: Gently fluff the rice with a fork. Season with black pepper and parsley, if desired. Serve.

How to Store and Reheat

Stovetop brown jasmine rice is a wonderful meal prep recipe. I like to keep a container of this whole grain in either the fridge or freezer so I can have a hearty side dish ready at a moment’s notice. To store properly, simply:

  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet (this speeds up the process and prevents the formation of ice crystals in the freezer). Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. (If you are big into meal prep, package in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between, until warmed through. Or steam or stir-fry in a skillet on the stove.

Other Methods of Cooking Brown Jasmine Rice

Brown Jasmine rice is just like any other rice, in that it can be cooked following a different cooking method. Some other methods of cooking Thai jasmine rice include:

  • In a Rice Cooker: Follow the ratio of 1 ½ cups liquid to 1 cup of uncooked rice. Place in your rice cooker and set it to the ‘Rice’ setting (or ‘Brown Rice’ setting, if your cooker has it). When done cooking, fluff it and serve.
  • In the Instant Pot: Follow the ratio of 1 ¼ cups liquid to 1 cup of rice. Place in the pressure cooker, set the vent to ‘Sealing’ position, select ‘Manual’ on high pressure, and set the cooking time to 20 minutes. Once done, allow the pressure to naturally release for 10 minutes, then manually release the remaining pressure. Fluff it with a fork and serve. For more information, check out our detailed post on cooking brown jasmine rice in the instant pot.

To make it easier, below is a breakdown of the brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio for each method of cooking:

MethodRice AmountWater AmountCook TimeNotes
Stove Top1 cup2 cups30-40 minutesCheck after 30 minutes.
Rice Cooker1 cup1 1/2 cups40-60 minutesThe timing might change based on your rice cooker.
Pressure Cooker1 cup1 1/4 cups23 minutesPlus, 10 min each to come to pressure and release.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice is an incredibly versatile side dish that can be served just as is with stir-fried vegetables, added to soup and salads, turned into grain bowls, and in some cases, even transformed into dessert-like rice pudding. Make it a great addition to any of your favorite meat, chicken, seafood, and vegetarian meals. A few of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the best brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to follow these expert tips:

  • Do not skip rinsing the rice: Rinsing removes the excess starch on the coating of the rice, resulting in light and fluffy grains. Place the rice in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse under cool running water until the water runs clear.
  • Keep the lid on: The key is to cook the rice over consistent heat, low and slow, so you want to refrain from opening the lid while cooking. In other words, no peeking.
  • Use a thick-bottomed saucepan: The thick bottom of the pan serves as a protective barrier, preventing the rice from burning or sticking. In addition, it ensures even heat distribution, resulting in perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice with uniform consistency.
  • Make sure to rest: The key to perfectly cooked rice is resting it for 10 minutes, with the lid still on, as soon as you remove it from the heat. This essentially steams the rice all the way through.
  • Fluff: When ready, use a fork to gently fluff the rice. Doing so helps release steam and separate the grains, resulting in a soft, airy texture.
  • Get creative: Don’t be shy when it comes to cooking rice the way you want it. Use any cooking liquid of your choice, throw in some aromatics like garlic cloves and bay leaves, and finish with herbs and seasonings like parsley, cilantro, basil, chives, red pepper flakes, and more.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook brown jasmine rice?

The cooking time for brown jasmine rice is anywhere between 30-40 minutes when cooking on the stove. Be mindful of the cooking liquid and cook until all the liquid is absorbed and the rice is tender.

Is jasmine rice whole grain?

There are two varieties of jasmine rice: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice is considered a whole grain because it contains the endosperm, bran, and germ.

Is jasmine rice brown rice?

Jasmine rice comes in two forms: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice boasts a tan color, a chewy texture, and an earthy flavor. On the other hand, white jasmine rice has a white appearance, with a tender yet slightly sticky texture, and is accompanied by a delightful floral aroma.

What does brown jasmine rice look like?

Brown jasmine rice is tan to light brown in color, with long and slender grains. The finish is somewhat matte, thanks to the presence of the bran layer.

If you try this Jasmine Brown Rice Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice

Here’s the foolproof recipe for perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice on the stovetop. No special equipment is needed for this gluten-free and vegan side dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 203kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups water*
  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine Rice* thoroughly rinsed*

Optional add-ins:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Place your cooking liquid in a medium-sized saucepan over high heat. If using, add in olive oil and salt as well. Cover and bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rice, stir to combine, and bring it to a rolling boil. Put the lid on and turn the heat down to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid.
  • At the end of the 30 minutes of simmering, open the lid and check whether or not the liquid is fully absorbed. If it hasn’t, then continue to simmer at 3-minute increments until no liquid is left.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork.
  • If preferred, season with black pepper and garnish with chopped parsley. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 3 ½ cups cooked. A side serving is suggested at ½-1 cup, so it would be good for approximately 4 servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want to add more flavor, you can vegetable stock or chicken broth in place of water.
  • Do not skip on rinsing: Rinsing the rice is an important step as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • Jasmine Brown Rice: We tested this recipe using two different national brands: Lundbery Organic Jasmine Brown Rice and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Rice. They yielded similar results in terms of cooking time and the amount of cooked rice. However, please keep in mind that the age of the rice plays an important role in the final product. The fresher the rice, the more fragrant it will be. Additionally, if you decide to purchase brown jasmine rice from the bulk bin, the time of cooking might be different. We recommend using the visual cues we listed within the blog post to gauge doneness.
  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. If cooking Thai jasmine brown rice is a part of your meal prep, I recommend packaging it in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need. Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, mixing each time in between until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 591mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 0
Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/#comments Mon, 16 Oct 2023 22:54:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71283 I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite. Ingredients Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more...

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite.

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more personality. We will need:

Ingredients laid out from the top view.
  • Brown jasmine rice: Brown jasmine rice is a long grain rice with the outer coating (bran and germ) still intact. Look for brown rice, sometimes labeled Thai jasmine brown rice, in the international aisle at the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or online sellers, such as Amazon. My favorite brands are Lundberg Organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). This instant pot jasmine brown rice was tested using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Use water for a clean, neutral flavor, or opt for Vegetable Broth, Chicken Stock, or Veggie Scrap Stock. Omit the salt if using stock instead of water.
  • Olive oil: A mere teaspoon of olive oil gives the rice a nice glossy sheen. Feel free to swap it out for avocado oil, coconut oil, or ghee.
  • Kosher salt: A little salt enhances the natural flavor of the rice and makes it that much more delicious.
  • Black pepper: Freshly ground black pepper is best sprinkled on top at the end of cooking to preserve those natural oils.
  • Fresh herbs: While not mentioned in the recipe card, fresh herbs or complimentary flavors really enhance the flavor of the rice and give balance to your meal. A few popular herbs and seasonings include fresh cilantro, basil, mint, green onions, lime juice, or sesame seeds.

Brown Jasmine Rice to Water Ratio for Pressure Cooker

If this is the first time cooking jasmine brown rice in the Instant Pot, there are keynotes to point out when it comes to the rice-to-water ratio. Here’s what I have discovered:

  • Firmer rice: If you prefer your rice on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Softer rice: If you prefer soft rice that is bouncy with a chewy texture, use a 1:1.25 ratio. As in, for every 1 cup of rice, use 1 ¼ cups of cooking liquid and set the cooking time to 23 minutes (this is my preferred rice and the recipe that is written in the recipe card).

How to Cook Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot?

This Instapot brown jasmine rice recipe is so easy and virtually hands-free you’ll wonder why you never started cooking rice in the pressure cooker in the first place. Much like the rice setting on your rice cooker, this Instant Pot jasmine rice recipe is ready after the push of a button. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to cook jasmine brown rice in Instant Pot.
  1. Rinse the rice: Place the rice in a colander and rinse under cold water, stirring with your fingers (or a spoon) until water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Add ingredients to Instant Pot: Into the steel inner pot, add brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt. Give it a good stir.
  3. Close lid: Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  4. Pressure cook: Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes of pressure cooking time. It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. 
  5. Release pressure: Natural pressure release (NPR) for 10 minutes, and then manually release the remaining pressure.
Jasmati rice in instant pot insert being fluffed by a person.
  1. Fluff and serve: Carefully remove the Instant Pot lid and fluff with a fork. Season with black pepper and serve.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe bodes wonderful for meal prep, or simply any time you want to have whole grains on hand. Here’s how I like to store, freeze and reheat:

  • Storage: Leftover rice will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. To speed up the cooling process, spread the cooked brown rice out on a baking sheet (this prevents clumps from forming as the rice cools).
  • Freezing: Once completely cool, transfer to a heavy-duty freezer bag or freezer-safe airtight container with some room at the top for expansion. (If you regularly meal prep, package the rice in 1-2 cup portions. This way, you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen brown rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Add a few tablespoons of water to the rice. Then, steam or stir-fry with your recipe in a skillet on the stove or microwave on high in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, until warm.

What to Serve it With?

Instant pot Brown rice is a nutritious and delicious side dish that can be served with vegetables alongside any main dish. With a delicious nutty flavor, it pairs beautifully with meat or vegetable-based dishes. Some of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the absolute best Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to take note of these expert tips:

  • Rinse before cooking: Rinsing the brown rice prior to cooking washes away excess starch on the surface, resulting in perfectly fluffy brown rice. The best way is to rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer, stirring with your hands or a spoon, until the water runs clear.
  • Natural release: When the cooking time is up, allow the Instant Pot to naturally release the pressure for about 10 minutes. This allows time for the rice to cook further through.
  • Do not overfill: If you are doubling or tripling the recipe, avoid filling the steel pot more than halfway. Rice expands when cooked, and too much starch can clog the vent when the pressure is released.
  • Fluff with a fork: Make sure to fluff the rice with a fork as soon as it is done cooking. Fluffing actually helps steam to release, resulting in a lighter, softer texture.

FAQs

How long to cook brown jasmine rice in a pressure cooker?

Cook time depends on the desired texture. For firm brown rice, set the pressure cooking time to 20 minutes and adjust the ratio to 1:1. For a softer texture, set the pressure cooking time to 23 minutes and use a 1:1.25 ratio of rice to liquid.

Should I soak brown jasmine rice before cooking?

I do not soak brown rice, but according to Healthline, soaking brown rice helps to remove some of the naturally occurring phytic acid (antinutrients) present in whole grains. This makes it easier for digestion and promotes increased nutrient absorption. Soaking brown rice also reduces the cooking time.

How does brown jasmine rice taste compared to white rice?

Brown rice has a slightly more earthier and nuttier flavor compared to white jasmine rice because brown jasmine rice retains the bran layers and germ, which contributes to its richer taste.

Other Rice Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of rice as much as I am, you might like the following basic rice recipes from the archives:

If you try this basic recipe for Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Pressure cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe

Put your electric pressure cooker to use with this Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice recipe. It comes together with only 5 minutes of hands-on time and cooks perfectly fluffy and delicious every time.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 23 minutes
Pressure time 17 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 180kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine rice* rinsed thoroughly
  • 1 ¼ cup water vegetable stock, or chicken stock
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

Instructions

  • Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds while stirring with your fingers or a spoon.
  • Place brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt in the insert of the Instant Pot. Stir to combine.
  • Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  • Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes* of pressure cooking time.
  • It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, and then manually release the rest of the pressure.
  • Carefully remove the lid. Fluff it with a fork.
  • Season with black pepper and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately about 3 cups of cooked long-grain brown rice, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rice: We tested this recipe using two national brown jasmine rice brands, Lundberg and Mahatma. They delivered similar results in terms of cooking time, taste, and texture. Please keep in mind that the timing might be slightly different based on the brand.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want your rice to be flavorful, you can vegetable broth or chicken stock in place of water.
  • Rice to water ratio and time of cooking: The recipe, as written (1 to 1 ¼ rice to water ratio cooked for 23 minutes), yields soft and chewy brown rice. However, if you prefer it to be on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Storage: If you have any leftovers, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, cool completely by spreading the rice on a baking sheet. Transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to a month.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a microwave-safe bowl in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until it is thoroughly heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 2
Cauliflower au Gratin https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/ https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/#comments Thu, 12 Oct 2023 22:38:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7676 I am always inspired by cauliflower because of the incredible recipes that are created from this humble vegetable. But let me tell you, this cauliflower au gratin recipe is so special. Adapted (with minor changes) from Ina Garten’s Cauliflower Gratin recipe, this is a sure winner. A year-round recipe that does especially well as a Thanksgiving side dish or as a part of your holiday dinner, it will be love...

The post Cauliflower au Gratin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I am always inspired by cauliflower because of the incredible recipes that are created from this humble vegetable. But let me tell you, this cauliflower au gratin recipe is so special. Adapted (with minor changes) from Ina Garten’s Cauliflower Gratin recipe, this is a sure winner. A year-round recipe that does especially well as a Thanksgiving side dish or as a part of your holiday dinner, it will be love at first bite. Think of this cauliflower side dish as comfort food the whole family will love.

If you love cauliflower as much as I do, be sure to check out Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad and Cauliflower Curry.

Cauliflower gratin in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This cheesy cauliflower au gratin recipe requires a list of simple ingredients, one of the main ingredients being cauliflower. We will need:

Ingredients for scalloped cauliflower recipe in individual portions.
  • Cauliflower: The key to this recipe is to have 3 pounds of cauliflower florets. In other words, we want 3 pounds total after cutting into pieces and removing the stalks and stems. I found the best way to ensure enough cauliflower to fill a 9 x 13-inch baking dish is to purchase a 3-pound and 2-pound head of cauliflower. Fresh cauliflower has a higher water content, so in this case, we want cauliflower that is a bit older.
  • Unsalted butter
  • Fresh cloves of garlic: While we prefer fresh garlic cloves, you can use garlic powder, but if you want to take this cauliflower au gratin casserole to the next level, do yourself a favor and use roasted garlic.
  • All-purpose flour
  • Whole milk: Low-fat milk can be used in place of whole milk, but it will not be as creamy. There is also a higher chance of curdling if a lower fat milk is used.
  • Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and nutmeg elevates the dish to new heights. For extra kick, a pinch of cayenne pepper can also be added.
  • Cheese: We are following along with the Barefoot Contessa’s cheesy cauliflower gratin recipe and using a mix of Gruyere and Parmesan cheese, but sharp cheddar cheese, Swiss cheese, or Fontina can be used in place of the Gruyere. Steer clear of pre-packaged shredded cheese, which contains anti-caking agents and can affect the consistency of the cheesy sauce.
  • Bread crumbs: Yet unlike Barefoot Contessa’s recipe, we went with Panko breadcrumbs for extra crunch. For extra indulgence, you could try crushed Ritz crackers mixed with a bit of melted butter for a salty, buttery crunch.
  • Optional garnish: Fresh parsley gives it a beautiful finish and color. Fresh chives would be a nice addition, too.

How to Make Cauliflower Gratin?

If you are looking for an easy recipe for cauliflower au gratin, you have come to the right place! There are three main parts to making a cauliflower gratin, but I can assure you your efforts will be worth it. Here’s how to do it in a few basic steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cauliflower gratin recipe.
  1. Boil cauliflower: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. In a large pot, place the cauliflower florets, a few teaspoons of salt, and enough water to cover everything. Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes, or until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife. Drain and shake to remove any excess water. Set aside.
  2. Make a roux: Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and stir for 30 seconds until fragrant. Add the flour and whisk constantly until the flour is cooked (but not browned) for 1 minute, until a thick paste forms.
  3. Make the white sauce: While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a gentle boil and cook for 2-3 minutes, or until slightly thickened.
A collage of images showing how to prepare gratin of cauliflower.
  1. Add the cheese: Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4  cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.
  2. Add cauliflower: Add the cooked cauliflower florets and toss to combine. Transfer the mixture to a 9 x 13-inch baking pan. Sprinkle the top with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese, and panko breadcrumbs.
Ina Garten's cheesy cauliflower gratin before and after it is baked.
  1. Bake: Bake for 25-30 minutes until the cheese is bubbling and the top is browned. At this point, the cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork.
  2. Garnish and serve: Allow to cool for 5-10 minutes. Garnish with a sprinkle of parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This scalloped cauliflower recipe is a wonderful make-ahead and can be stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so properly, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Blanch the cauliflower and make the creamy sauce up to 2 days in advance. Store each separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator. Or, make the entire casserole dish 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge at least 30 minutes before baking.
  • Storing Leftovers: Leftover gratin of cauliflower can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing: Cauliflower gratin can be frozen, but keep in mind the texture may be affected once reheated due to the water content in cauliflower. For best results, cool the gratin completely (to prevent the formation of ice crystals) and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container with a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen gratin overnight or up to 24 hours in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Reheat leftovers, uncovered, in a preheated 350 F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen but thawed cauliflower gratin, it could take up to 30 minutes. If reheating from frozen, bake at 350 F for 45 minutes – 1 hour, tented with aluminum foil, then remove the aluminum foil during the last 15 minutes of baking.

Variations

Cauliflower gratin is a gorgeous recipe that can be elevated or adapted based on what you are craving. Below are a few variations of this basic recipe that you can also try:

  • Roasted Cauliflower Au Gratin: If you enjoy the smoky roasted flavors, instead of blanching your cauliflower, you can roast them in the oven. To do so, drizzle the florets with a tablespoon of olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Bake for 15-20 minutes or just until softened. Transfer it to your baking dish and drizzle the creamy cheese sauce over the cauliflower. Then bake your roasted cauliflower gratin following the recipe as written.
  • Broccoli Cauliflower Au Gratin: For more of a healthy and veggie-packed version, you can swap out half the cauliflower for an equal amount of broccoli instead. You can blanch them at the same time, so it is just a quick and easy swap.
  • Potato and Cauliflower Gratin: If you want to incorporate potatoes into this dish, it is totally possible and easy to do so. Simply swap out one pound of cauliflower for one pound of peeled and cubed Yukon gold potatoes. I recommend cutting the peeled potatoes into bite-sized chunks and boiling them in water until al dente. Be sure to drain them well before adding them to the cheese sauce with the cauliflower florets.
cauliflower gratin in a casserole dish right after it came out of the oven.

What to Serve It With?

Decadent yet easy cauliflower au gratin is a beautiful side dish for holidays and special occasions. I love to make it a part of my Thanksgiving dinner menu, and it makes a fun addition to Friendsgiving menu ideas. But it is delicious enough to enjoy with any main dish when you are craving a cheesy, delectable vegetable side dish. Serve it with:

Expert Tips

As you can see, the recipe for this creamy side dish is pretty straightforward. However, we learned a few lessons during our recipe testing that I think are important to share to help you end up with the best cauliflower au gratin of your life (I know it is quite a bold statement, but I mean it.):

  • Cauliflower florets: As noted above, the total weight of the cauliflower is in reference to the cauliflower florets, not the whole head of cauliflower. I’ve found the stalks weigh about 1 pound each per head, so pick up a 2-pound and 3-pound cauliflower head to get 3 pounds of florets in total.
  • Blanching the cauliflower: Make sure to cook the cauliflower in a large pot of boiling salted water and keep a close eye on the texture. We are not cooking the cauliflower all the way through, just enough to parboil it into tender cauliflower florets as it will continue to cook in the oven.
  • Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.
  • Patience is key with the bechamel sauce: When you are making the roux (aka bechamel sauce), patience is the key. Do not rush, and be sure to cook the flour with the butter for at least 1 minute so that you cook out the raw flavor of the flour. For ease, make the roux with a wooden spoon, then switch to a whisk when you begin adding the milk. And whatever you do, do not leave it unattended.
  • Look for nape: A simple way to check if the sauce has the right thickness is to dip a wooden spoon in it. When you remove the spoon, the sauce should cling to its back rather than being runny. This is referred to as “nape” in French.
  • Cold milk vs warmed milk: Slightly warmed or room temperature milk mixes better, but we tested the recipe with cold milk, and it worked just as well.
  • Don’t fret about consistency: Upon first making the cheese sauce, it may seem a little loose, but keep in mind that some of the moisture will evaporate in the oven, and it will thicken as it bakes.
  • Browning: If the cauliflower is tender, but the top hasn’t browned enough, place it under the broiler for 1 minute or until browned to your liking. Make sure to check it often to avoid burning.

FAQs

What is cauliflower au gratin?

Cauliflower au gratin is a twist on the French potatoes au gratin that features delicious cauliflower coated in a cheesy bechamel sauce, then topped with breadcrumbs and baked until golden brown and bubbly.

Why is my cauliflower gratin watery?

A watery cauliflower au gratin can be due to overcooked cauliflower, too thin bechamel sauce covering the dish while baking, or too low of an oven temperature. To remedy this, place it back in the oven, uncovered, to evaporate some of the moisture.

Can you make cauliflower au gratin ahead of time?

Yes, easy cauliflower gratin is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and can be made 1 day in advance. Bring it to room temperature before baking.

Can cauliflower au gratin be frozen?

Yes, you can freeze cauliflower au gratin. Keep in mind, however, that freezing the gratin may affect the texture upon reheating. Simply bring it to room temperature, and transfer it to a freezer-friendly container. Cover well (to avoid freezer burn) and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

Other Cauliflower Side Dishes You Might Like:

It is no secret that this cauliflower bake makes a delicious side dish to serve along with any of your favorite main dishes. Here are a few other cauliflower recipes that you might also like to try:

If you try this Cauliflower Gratin recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cauliflower Au Gratin in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Cauliflower Au Gratin Recipe

This Cauliflower Au Gratin is a delightful cheesy bake that elevates cauliflower to a golden and crispy treat. Whether you make it a part of your Thanksgiving menu or serve it as a side dish to accompany your favorite steak and chicken recipes, it is guaranteed to impress.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 heads cauliflower cut into bite-sized florets (total of 3 pounds of florets) *
  • Kosher Salt
  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 ¼ cups whole milk
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ¾ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • Pinch of nutmeg
  • 1 ¾ cups Gruyere cheese shredded, divided – 6 ounces – Swiss or Cheddar cheese would also work
  • ¾ cup grated Parmesan cheese divided
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Place the cauliflower florets in the stock pot and a few teaspoons of salt and cover with water.
  • Cover the pot and bring it to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Drain and shake to remove any excess water. Set aside.
  • Meanwhile, melt the butter in a large skillet* over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds to soften.
  • Add the flour. Whisk constantly until the flour is cooked (but not browned) for 1 minute.
  • While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a boil and cook for 2-3 minutes or until thickened but still smooth.
  • Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4 cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.
  • Add the cauliflower florets and toss to combine.
  • Place the mixture into the baking dish and smooth it out evenly.
  • Sprinkle the top of the mixture with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese and panko bread crumbs.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes until the cheese is bubbling and the top is browned. The cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Cool for 5 minutes, garnish with parsley if desired and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a 9 by 13 casserole full of cauliflower gratin, which is ideal for serving as a side dish for 6 (generous portions.) The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cauliflower florets: The total weight of the cauliflower (3 pounds) is in reference to the cauliflower florets, not the whole head of cauliflower. During our recipe testing, we found the stalks weigh about 1 pound each per head, so pick up a 2-pound and 3-pound cauliflower head to get 3 pounds of florets in total. 
  • Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this dish a day in advance. Simply follow the recipe until you place the cheese and cauliflower mixture into the casserole dish (until step 11.) Bring to room temperature and cover well. Keep it in the fridge until you are ready to bake. When ready, follow the recipe as written and bake.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers of this cauliflower casserole (after they come to room temperature) in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. 

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 1148mg | Potassium: 224mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 910IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 629mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cauliflower au Gratin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/feed/ 8
Chicken Butternut Squash Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/#respond Tue, 10 Oct 2023 20:34:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71101 Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my time. As always, all opinions expressed in this post are my own. On a cold day, nothing satisfies me more than a yummy soup full of great flavors. While I adore the more standard Vegan Butternut Squash Soup or globally inspired Butternut Squash Thai Soup (Zoup! also makes a creamy, heat-and-eat butternut squash soup), there...

The post Chicken Butternut Squash Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my time. As always, all opinions expressed in this post are my own.

On a cold day, nothing satisfies me more than a yummy soup full of great flavors. While I adore the more standard Vegan Butternut Squash Soup or globally inspired Butternut Squash Thai Soup (Zoup! also makes a creamy, heat-and-eat butternut squash soup), there is something so special about a healthy chicken soup with butternut squash.

Butternut Squash Chicken Soup in a bowl garnished with parsley and pumpkin seeds.

Creamy or chunky, made entirely from scratch using the most delicious Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth, I have got you covered with plenty of ways to make this creamy chicken and butternut squash soup your own. 

Ingredients

Butternut squash soup with chicken requires nothing more than a few simple ingredients. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
  • Olive oil: You can also use avocado oil or clarified butter (aka ghee) in this recipe.
  • Vegetables: Go for an aromatic background of yellow onions, red bell pepper, and garlic cloves. 
  • Spices + seasonings: Ground cumin adds depth and complexity to this butternut chicken soup. You could also try ground coriander or turmeric to celebrate that orange color and make it even more nutritious.
  • Chicken: Go for boneless, skinless chicken thighs for a richer flavor, but leaner chicken breasts can also be used.
  • Butternut squash: Pick up a butternut squash that is heavy for its size and prep when you get home. If working with butternut squash is new to you, check out my post on the Best Way to Cut Butternut Squash before you get started.
  • Chicken broth: While you can make your own Homemade Chicken Stock when I am short on time, I reach for Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth. I love purchasing Zoup! as it has the same complex, homemade taste with a balanced flavor. While it is widely available in retailers across the country, you can also purchase it online at ZoupBroth.com, Amazon, and Walmart.com. Plus, Zoup! has a number of different broths to choose from, but in this instance, I would stick to the Chicken Bone Broth, Original Chicken Broth, or Low Sodium Chicken Broth.
  • Lemon juice: A squeeze of freshly squeezed lemon juice is a last-minute addition to brighten up the flavors.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley gives the slowly simmered soup a nice pop at the end. Reserve some on the side for garnish, too. For even more depth of flavor, consider adding fresh thyme or sage while the soup simmers on the stove.
  • Optional toppings: Pumpkin seeds add a wonderful crunch, but they are optional.

Variations and Substitutions

If you find yourself short on time or are looking to make this squash soup recipe on a busy weeknight, here are some short-cut suggestions to save you some time in the kitchen:

  • Rotisserie chicken: It is no secret that rotisserie chicken or cooked leftover chicken is a great shortcut when you are short on time, and this chicken soup with squash is no different. If you use either one of these options, simply shred them and add them to the soup at the same time as you are adding the butternut squash. You will need about 4-5 cups of shredded or cubed chicken.
  • Roasted butternut squash: Use leftover Roasted Butternut Squash to add extra depth and caramelized flavor, thanks to all those natural sugars.
  • Winter squash: Can’t find butternut squash? Use any winter squash that is available, like roasted acorn squash, roasted delicata squash, or pumpkin. Alternatively, you can swap out half the squash for some diced carrots and sweet potatoes for a slightly different flavor texture or flavor that is just as delicious.
  • Lime juice and cilantro: Give it a unique twist by swapping out the lemon juice and parsley for lime juice and fresh cilantro.
  • Add grains: Make it a complete meal with the addition of leftover cooked quinoa, brown rice, or pasta. Toss it right into the soup near the end of cooking.
  • Coconut milk: If you want an even more luxurious creamy texture, consider finishing it with a touch of coconut milk or heavy whipping cream.
  • Extra toppings: Add even more contrast to flavor and texture by topping it off with croutons, a swirl of yogurt or sour cream, fresh herbs like chives, basil or tarragon, or a sprinkle of red pepper flakes.

How to Make Butternut Squash Chicken Soup?

I like to think of this as a high-protein butternut squash soup, thanks to the addition of chicken. It is also a great soup to make on a cold night in chilly weather. Not to mention, it is easy to make. Here’s how I like to make it in a few easy steps on the stovetop:

A collage of images showing how to make chicken and squash soup.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a large Dutch oven or large soup pot over medium to medium-high heat. Add onion, bell pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes. Add the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 minute.
  2. Simmer soup: Add the chicken, butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a good stir. Cover and bring to a boil. Then, reduce to low heat, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
  3. Shred chicken: With a large slotted spoon or tongs, remove the chicken and allow to cool slightly. Shred it with two forks or cut it into cubes.
  4. Blend half of the soup: Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup into a large heatproof bowl. Blend until smooth with an immersion blender.
A collage of images showing how to make chicken and butternut squash soup.
  1. Finish: Carefully transfer the pureed soup back into the pot (be careful, it will still be hot!) along with the shredded chicken. Bring the soup to one last boil. Finish with lemon juice and parsley.
  2. Garnish and serve: Ladle into bowls, top with pumpkin seeds and more parsley. Serve with lemon wedges on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

This Chicken squash soup stores beautifully in both the fridge and freezer. Just like so many soup recipes, the flavors get better the longer they have time to marry together. To store and reheat, simply:

  • Store: Cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely and ladle soup into freezer-safe airtight containers, leaving some room at the top to allow for expansion. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Reheat: If frozen, thaw the soup overnight in the refrigerator. When ready to reheat, place a pot over medium heat, add the soup, and bring to a gentle simmer. Or, reheat individual servings in a microwave-safe bowl, covered, in 30-second intervals in the microwave. Stir each time in between and continue until warmed through.

What to Serve with this Butternut Squash Soup?

Butternut squash and chicken soup is a meal all its own, but I love to serve it with crusty bread or winter greens on the side to round it out as a complete meal. You could try:

Expert Tips

  • Save on time: The majority of the prep work comes from peeling and cubing the butternut squash, so if you are short on time, you can prep the vegetables the day before or buy pre-cut vegetables from the grocery store.
  • Blending is personal: I really want you to make this soup your own, so you can blend half the soup as I do in the recipe card, skip the blending altogether, or blend the entire soup for a creamy, thick consistency. Just make sure to remove the chicken prior to blending.
  • If you do not own an immersion blender, blend until smooth in a high-powered blender or food processor, or use a potato masher to puree it. However, keep in mind that when blending hot liquids, always make sure to fill no more than halfway, remove the measuring cap, and partially cover with a kitchen towel so the steam will be able to escape.

More about Zoup!

Zoup! was created by the founders of Zoup! Eatery, which served soup face-to-face to consumers for over two decades. In other words, they really know their soup! In addition to their expertise and knowledge, I always pick up a jar of Zoup! Broth (packaged in recyclable glass jars, by the way) whenever I get a chance because:

  • The Zoup! Good, Really Good® Broth lineup includes original and low-sodium chicken broths, veggie broth, seafood broth, and chicken and beef bone broths.
  • The broth is kettle-cooked in small batches using the freshest and finest ingredients.
  • It is low in calories, paleo-friendly, and completely free of artificial ingredients, preservatives, gluten, GMO’s, fat, trans fat, and saturated fat. 
  • Zoup! has also introduced Culinary Concentrates™, gourmet broth bases available in Chicken Bone Broth and Beef Bone Broth, plus Savory No Chicken Vegan Broth, offering a space-saving solution for home cooks.
  • And for when you crave soup but want something you can just heat and eat, Zoup! makes shelf-stable soups in nine flavor-forward recipes, including Chicken Potpie, Garden Vegetable, and Butternut Squash with Brown Butter and Sage.

If you are interested in learning more, visit ZoupBroth.com and follow @ZoupGoodReallyGood on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok and @ZoupGoodReallyGoodBroth on Pinterest.

As a reader of Foolproof Living, Zoup! is offering 20% off your first order of Zoup! Products on Amazon. Use the code, 20FOOLPROOF at checkout (under the payment section.) The code is valid until November 6, 2023.

A collage of photos showing the squash chicken soup in a bowl and while it is being poured.

FAQs

What herbs go with butternut squash soup?

Hearty herbs such as rosemary, thyme, sage, and bay leaf add depth and herbal complexity, while fresh herbs like parsley, cilantro, basil, tarragon, and chives give it the finish of fresh flavor.

Can you use chicken broth in butternut squash soup?

Yes, both chicken broth and chicken stock can be used to make butternut squash soup. The delicate meaty flavor is a nice addition to an otherwise vegetarian soup.

Is butternut squash soup good when sick?

According to Healthline, butternut squash has many health benefits. It contains high amounts of powerful vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, most notably vitamin A and vitamin C, making it an ideal choice to keep a sore throat at bay. So, yes, butternut squash soup is a good way to soothe yourself when you are feeling under the weather.

Do you need to peel butternut squash for soup?

We do recommend peeling butternut squash when making soup, as doing so will result in a creamy and smooth texture.

What protein goes with butternut squash soup?

Butternut squash pairs well with a variety of animal and plant-based protein resources. Chicken, beef, quinoa, and tofu are just a few to name.

Other Comforting Soup Recipes for Fall and Winter:

If you try this Chicken Butternut Squash Soup, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Butternut squash chicken soup in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Chicken Butternut Squash Soup Recipe

Butternut Squash chicken soup combines the heartiness of chicken thighs with the warmth of homemade soup. Great for a chilly evening, this one-pot meal is both nourishing and flavorful.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 284kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped (~2 cups)
  • 1 medium red bell pepper chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 4 cloves garlic minced or pressed
  • 1 pound boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 6 cups butternut squash* peeled and cut into cubes (2 pounds)
  • 5 cups Zoup! Good Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt more to taste
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped, plus more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds optional, for garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a large, heavy bottom pot over medium-high heat. Add in onion, pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 more minute.
  • Add in the chicken, cubed butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a stir.
  • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. As soon as it comes to a boil, turn down the heat to low, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
  • Using a slotted spoon, remove the chicken from the soup and shred it (or cut it into cubes). Set the now-shredded chicken aside.
  • Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup mixture into a large heatproof bowl. Using an immersion blender, blend until smooth.
  • Transfer the pureed soup back into the pot along with the shredded chicken. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Bring the soup to one last boil.
  • Stir in the lemon juice and parsley. Ladle into bowls, garnish with the additional parsley and pumpkin seeds (if desired), and serve with lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This soup makes 6-7 cups of soup, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: To store leftovers, cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Squash: While we used butternut squash in this recipe, you can pretty much use any squash you have on hand, including pumpkin, acorn squash, kabocha squash, and even delicata squash.

Nutrition

Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 750mg | Potassium: 1018mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 15646IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Chicken Butternut Squash Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 0
Tuna Melt Sandwich https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/ https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/#comments Fri, 06 Oct 2023 22:22:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18745 I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I find that the bread and cheese transform it into something spectacular. Because of this, I have done my research on what makes an unforgettable tuna melt. In other words, I have got you covered with plenty of variations for the bread, cheese, and cooking style. So don’t be shy and...

The post Tuna Melt Sandwich appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I find that the bread and cheese transform it into something spectacular. Because of this, I have done my research on what makes an unforgettable tuna melt. In other words, I have got you covered with plenty of variations for the bread, cheese, and cooking style. So don’t be shy and have some fun with this tuna melt recipe!

If you love the convenience of canned tuna recipes, be sure to try Chickpea Tuna Pita Sandwich or Chickpea Salad with Tuna.

Homemade tuna melt sandwich from the front view.

Ingredients – What’s in a Tuna Melt?

I find the best tuna melt recipe starts with quality ingredients. The recipe starts with making a classic tuna salad, which is used to layer with cheese in between two pieces of bread before baking it in the oven or cooking it on the stovetop. Here is what you will need to make the tuna salad, along with the bread, cheese, and toppings:

Tuna Salad Ingredients

  • Tuna: Look for 5-ounce cans of high-quality wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water. If you are concerned about mercury, go for skipjack tuna (sometimes labeled light tuna), which has lower mercury levels than larger albacore or yellowfin tuna.
  • Celery stalk
  • Pickles: Go for your favorite pickles, such as Kosher, dill pickles, or bread and butter pickles. Or swap out the pickles for pickle relish instead.
  • Hard-Boiled Egg: I follow this recipe on how to make hard-boiled eggs, which works every time.
  • Parsley: Fresh herbs, like parsley, give it a refreshing bite. Experiment with other herbs, like tarragon or dill, or give it a final sprinkle of fresh chives.
  • Mayonnaise: Mayonnaise brings the tuna salad together. Feel free to use vegan mayo or swap out half the mayo for plain Greek yogurt for a nice protein boost or sour cream for some tang.
  • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice will provide the best flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
  • Black Pepper
Ingredients for tuna melt recipe laid out from the top view.

Tuna Sandwich Ingredients

  • Buns / Bread Slices: I used Brioche Buns for their buttery richness, but plain, sesame seed, or poppy seed hamburger buns will also do. If you want to go more on the traditional hot tuna melt, you can use ½-inch slices of white bread. However, sourdough bread, whole grain bread, ciabatta, or even English muffins would also work.
  • Cheese: Sharp cheddar cheese makes a classic tuna fish melt, which is why most people say that it’s the best cheese for a tuna melt. However, you can also use provolone, mozzarella, Swiss cheese, or Havarti in this sandwich recipe. If you want to take things up a notch, feel free to experiment with different types of cheese, like pepper jack, Monterey jack, Gruyere, fontina, or smoked gouda. You can use slices of cheese from the deli counter or grate a whole block of cheese when you get home.
  • Cucumber: Fresh cucumber slices offer a nice crunch and color.
  • Avocado: Peel, seed, and slice a fresh avocado just before serving to add some healthy fats and extra richness.
  • Tomato Slices: Use ripe tomatoes for the best flavor, such as Roma, tomatoes on the vine, or heirloom tomatoes. Once sliced, lay them out on paper towels to absorb excess moisture so your tuna and tomato sandwich doesn’t get too soggy.
  • Salad Greens: Salad greens, baby arugula, or chopped romaine lettuce offer a nice crunch and contrast to the creamy tuna salad.
  • Cornichons: Optional, but I love the extra gourmet touch of cornichons as garnish if you so choose.

Optional Add-Ins:

  • Onion: Finely dice half of a red onion or some green onion to add to the tuna salad for an extra savory bite.
  • Dijon Mustard: Add 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard to the tuna salad mixture.
  • Spicy Peppers: Give the tuna salad a little kick with a pinch of cayenne pepper or a seeded and diced jalapeno or Fresno chile.
  • Butter / Olive Oil: When I do not have buns on hand and decide to go for sliced sandwich bread, I love to slather one side of the bread with butter or drizzle with extra virgin olive oil for extra richness (keep reading to learn more!).

How to Make a Tuna Melt Sandwich in the Oven?

This recipe for tuna melt sandwich starts with homemade tuna salad. Once you have that prepped and ready, the rest is so easy. Follow these step-by-step directions to make the tuna fish sandwich in the oven:

Tuna salad in a bowl with the rest of the sandwich ingredients around it.
  1. Make the tuna salad: In a medium bowl, mix together the tuna, celery, pickles, hard-boiled egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Taste and adjust the seasoning to your liking.
  2. Prep the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper. Place all 4 buns open-face on the baking tray. Top each bottom bun with 1 slice of cheese, followed by ½ cup of the tuna filling. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun.
A person is layering tuna melts from the top view.
  1. Bake: Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until the cheese melts. Remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly.
  2. Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a handful of salad greens. Top with the top bun. Garnish with a cornichon (if desired) and enjoy!

How to Make Tuna Melt on the Stove?

Alternatively, you can make this tuna salad melt in a large skillet on the stove. It is really not much different than making a grilled cheese sandwich. I find this works best if you are using white sandwich bread or English muffins. If you decide to go for the stovetop method, here’s how I like to do it:

  1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread or the outside of 4 English muffins.
  2. Assemble: Flip the bread or English muffins over, and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread or the 4 bottom halves of the English muffins. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread or English muffin (buttered side out).
  3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 tuna melt sandwiches.
  4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

The most time-consuming part of this recipe is making the tuna salad. So if you want to get ahead, I recommend prepping the tuna salad in advance. With that out of the way, the tuna melts come together in less than 15 minutes. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad and store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The tuna and veggies will leach out a bit of water the longer it sits in the fridge, so give it a good stir just before using.
  • Storage: The recipe makes 4 sandwiches, so if you are only serving 1-2 people, I recommend storing leftover tuna salad and toppings in separate airtight containers in the fridge. Assemble and bake the sandwiches just before serving.

With that being said, if you end up with leftovers of this melted tuna sandwich, you can store them in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 degrees F.) oven until heated through.

How to Serve

Think of this as a tuna cheese sandwich with all the fix-ins. Because of this, I like to serve it a bit more casually, either as a light lunch or simple dinner, with any of the following:

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this easy tuna melt sandwich recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I learned during my recipe testing. So, here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Drain the tuna well: Make sure to drain the cans of water-packed tuna before mixing to prevent too much water in the tuna salad, which could make it soggy.
  • Preheat the oven or skillet: Whether you are using the oven or a skillet, make sure it is properly preheated before you start cooking.
  • Medium to low heat is key: Keep it low and slow. Bake at the recommended 350 degrees F or cook over medium to medium-low heat on the stove to melt the cheese without burning the bread.
  • Give it a gentle press: If using the stovetop method, feel free to gently press down on the sandwich with a spatula to give the bread a nice sear. Be careful not to push so hard that all the filling spills out the sides.
  • Serve open-faced sandwiches: If you want to cut down on the carbs or prefer to eat an open-face tuna melt with a fork and knife, assemble open-faced tuna melts by simply omitting the top slice of bread.

FAQs

What is a tuna melt?

A tuna melt is a hot sandwich that combines tuna salad with melty cheese between two slices of griddled bread. Additional toppings, such as avocado, tomato, and lettuce, can be included.

What goes good with tuna melts?

Tuna melts are a classic sandwich that pair well with tomato soup, coleslaw, pickle spears, potato chips, garden salad, potato salad, and pasta salad.

What cheese is best with tuna?

Cheddar cheese is classic in a toasted tuna sandwich, but have fun and experiment with different cheeses such as provolone, mozzarella, pepper jack, Havarti, Gruyere, fontina or smoked gouda.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Tuna Melt Sandwich recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Tuna melt sandwich with a pickle on top.
Print

Tuna Melt Sandwich Recipe

Tuna Melt Sandwich layered with cheddar cheese, homemade tuna salad and baked in the oven for all the ooey-gooey goodness. Later, topped off with sliced avocado, tomatoes and salad greens to turn it in a out-of-this world delicious sandwich. Ready in 30 minutes and great for any meal of the day.
Course Sandwich
Cuisine American
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 447kcal

Ingredients

For The Tuna Mixture:

  • 2 cans tuna 5 oz. each (I prefer wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water) – drained
  • 4 stalks celery chopped
  • 2-3 small pickles chopped
  • 1 hard boiled egg peeled and chopped
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Sandwich:

  • 4 hamburger buns* sliced in half as you see in the photos (or your favorite toast)
  • 8 slices cheddar cheese or provolone, mozzarella or Havarti would also work
  • 1 cucumber sliced thinly
  • 1 avocado ripe sliced
  • 1 large tomato sliced
  • ½ cup salad greens or arugula
  • 4 cornichon as garnish – optional

Instructions

  • To make the tuna mixture: Mix together drained tuna, celery, pickles, egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • To make the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
  • Place 1 slice of cheese on the bottom half of a bun and top it off with ½ cup of the tuna mixture. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun. Place both of them (facing up) on the sheet pan. Repeat the same process with the rest of the buns.
  • Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until cheese melts. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for a minute.
  • To Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a green salad leaf. Put the top bun.
  • If preferred, garnish with a cornichon (as seen in the photos) and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 sandwiches, which is good for 4 servings. The nutrition information below is per serving.
  • Bread: We opted for brioche buns, but regular sliced whole wheat or white sandwich bread can also be used.
  • Cheese: Sharp yellow cheddar is ideal, but white cheddar, provolone, or Havarti can also be used.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the tuna salad a day in advance. When ready to serve, simply assemble the tuna melts as written in the recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to one additional day.
  • To cook it on the stovetop:
    1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread.
    2. Assemble: Flip the bread and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread (buttered side out).
    3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 sandwiches.
    4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 447kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 113mg | Sodium: 955mg | Potassium: 696mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1081IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 363mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Tuna Melt Sandwich appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/feed/ 9
Blackened Cod https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/#respond Tue, 03 Oct 2023 17:57:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70886 Cajun cod is a must when it comes to tasty, stress-free, and well-seasoned fish recipes. However, if you’re craving other simple seafood meals, there are tons of other easy fish dinners to try on this website! My zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon uses only a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to fill your table with brilliant color and buttery taste. Or, try out my Baked Breaded Fish for a crispy, garlicky meal...

The post Blackened Cod appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cajun cod is a must when it comes to tasty, stress-free, and well-seasoned fish recipes. However, if you’re craving other simple seafood meals, there are tons of other easy fish dinners to try on this website! My zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon uses only a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to fill your table with brilliant color and buttery taste. Or, try out my Baked Breaded Fish for a crispy, garlicky meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.

Blackened cod placed on a dish with lemon wedges on the side.

Ingredients

This blackened cod recipe only needs a few simple, all-natural ingredients to get its mouthwateringly smoky, bold taste—no trip to the grocery store is necessary!

Ingredients for the cod fish recipe from the top view.
  • Cod: The best codfish recipe begins with quality white fish fillets. This recipe will work with a range of cod varieties, including Alaskan cod, Pacific cod, and black cod (also known as sablefish)—all of which have a deliciously mild, sweet taste. Furthermore, I also tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen cod. Though I recommend preparing this recipe with fresh fish for maximum flavor, you may use frozen fillets. Just be sure to thaw them in the fridge overnight.
  • Olive oil: I used olive oil in this recipe to ensure my cod developed a rich, seared exterior without burning. However, any oil with a high smoke point—such as avocado oil, canola oil, and clarified butter—will also work.
  • Unsalted butter: Salted butter would also work, but if use salted butter, be sure to adjust the seasoning.
  • Lemon: Lemon makes a perfect pair with this healthy cod dinner. Serve a few wedges as garnish alongside your blackened cod, and your tastebuds will light up with zesty flavors.
  • Fresh parsley: Though optional, fresh and colorful parsley makes the ultimate garnish for these cod fish fillets.

Seasoning for Cod Fish

In my opinion, the best seasoning for cod fish is an authentic Cajun blackened seasoning. While you can buy this blend from the store, you can also put your spice cabinet to good use by following my simple blackened seasoning recipe

Cod fish seasoning spices on a plate with text on each spice.

To make a homemade blackening blend, you’ll need the following ingredients:

  • Paprika: Paprika is a surefire way to give your codfish deliciously peppery, sweet flavors. However, you may also use smoked paprika to lend your recipe extra deep, smoky undertones.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Feel free to adjust how much salt you add to your cod spices based on your preference (or if you’re following a low-sodium diet!).

To give your blend a kick of spice and a more robust Cajun profile, I recommend adding ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper to your cod fish seasoning. 

Alternatively, you may add a teaspoon of brown sugar to your seasoning blend for a sweeter, more caramelized taste.

How to Make Blackened Cod?

It takes less than half an hour to prepare this healthy cod recipe. With just a handful of ingredients and minimal cooking time, you can make a recipe for blackened cod that will impress even the biggest seafood fans. 

A collage of images showing how to prepare blackened cod for cooking.
  1. Prepare the cod seasoning: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, oregano, thyme, pepper, and Kosher salt. Break up any clumps of seasoning that form, and set the mixture aside.
  2. Dry the cod: Use a paper towel to pat dry the cod filets on all sides.
  3. Brush fish with olive oil: Brush all the sides of the cod with olive oil.
  4. Season the cod fillets: Evenly sprinkle the blackened seasoning on all the cod’s sides. Gently press the seasoning onto the fish’s flesh to keep it from falling off during the cooking process.
Seasoned cod being cooked in a cast iron skillet.
  1. Add the fish to the skillet: Set the stove to medium-high heat and melt the butter in a large skillet. Once the butter melts and the skillet is hot, gently add the seasoned cod. If the skillet isn’t large enough to accommodate all of your filets, sear the fish in two batches, using one tablespoon of butter for every two pieces of cod.
  2. Flip the cod: Cook the cod for 2-3 minutes without moving the fillets. Then, use a thin spatula to flip the fish and cook for another two minutes. When finished cooking, the cod should flake easily. If they don’t, continue sealing the blackened fish in 30-second intervals until a meat thermometer registers an internal temperature of 145 degrees F.
  3. Serve: Garnish the seared blackened cod with chopped parsley and serve it with lemon wedges on the side.

Other Ways to Cook Blackened Cod

Don’t want to cook your blackened cod fillets in a skillet? Below, you’ll find three other simple ways to cook cod, giving you tender, flavorful seafood every time.

  • In the oven: To make baked blackened cod, begin by preheating the oven to 400 degrees F. and lining a baking sheet with parchment paper—no butter needed. Then, lay your seasoned fillets on top of the baking tray and bake without flipping them for 10 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 145 degrees F. Alternatively, you can increase air circulation and add extra citrusy flavor by baking your cod fish on top of two slices of lemon.
  • On the grill: To grill your blackened cod filets, first preheat your gas grill to medium heat. Once hot, clean the grates and oil them generously with a wad of oil-soaked paper towels. Finally, add your seasoned fish to the grill and cook the fillets for 2-3 minutes on each side—until their internal temperature reaches 145 degrees F. (For more in-depth tips on grilling seafood, my recipe for Grilled Mahi Mahi has everything you need to prepare exquisitely seasoned, smoky fish.)
  • In the air fryer: To make blackened cod in the air fryer, first preheat your air fryer to 400 degrees F. Then, cook your fish for 8-10 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 145 degrees F. I also recommend checking your cod halfway through the air frying process, as this total time may vary depending on the thickness of your filets. For example, if your filets are thinner, too much time in the air fryer may dry out the meat, resulting in rubbery, tough flesh.

How to Store and Reheat?

Once you make this easy cod fish recipe, you won’t want a single bite to go to waste. With these expert storage tips, you can enjoy your leftovers as a tasty dinner, a light lunch, or even a protein-packed snack.

  • Storage: Though this healthy cod fish recipe tastes best on the day you prepare it, you may store it in the refrigerator for up to two days. Just be sure to let the fillets reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. 
  • To reheat: When reheating your blackened cod, first preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Then, place the fish on a sheet of precut parchment paper or aluminum foil, sprinkle it with a few drops of water, and loosely wrap it. Place the blackened cod in the oven for ten minutes or until heated through.

Serving Suggestions

If you’re at a loss for what to make with cod fish, these expert serving tips will give you a five-star meal without any extra hassle. This light seafood dish will be your new go-to with these gourmet pairings.

Baked blackened cod served with rice and roasted vegetables on a plate.
  • Cod and rice: My favorite way to serve this rich cod recipe is with a side of tender brown jasmine rice and savory caramelized Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts. Not only is this pair expertly balanced, but it also gives every plate an immaculate presentation.
  • Make it into tacos: Cod fish tacos are a tasty way to transform simple fish recipes into a fun weeknight meal. This bold Cajun fish recipe tastes out of this world when served with corn tortillas and topped with tasty, fan-favorite sides. Guacamole, pickled onions, and cherry tomato salsa (or your favorite pico de gallo!) are just a few of my go-to’s. However, you can even top your spread with cilantro and a squeeze of zesty lime juice for even brighter flavors.
  • Fruit salsa: No one can resist the sweet-and-spicy blend of blackened cod topped with mango salsa. My Pineapple Mango Salsa offers fruity, tropical overtones, while Mango Habañero Salsa has a delicious kick of spice perfect for spice lovers. Or, if you want to add a few juicy tomatoes to your sauce, my Peach Salsa strikes a delightful balance between tangy and fresh flavors.
  • With a big salad on the side: Looking for a lighter way to enjoy your blackened cod? Any of my hearty salads make a great option to round out your menu with garden-fresh tastes. Creamy and crisp, my No-Mayo Coleslaw and Mexican Corn Salad are excellent choices for those who love a salad with a little tang. Or, if you’re looking for a recipe filled with classic superfoods and full-bodied flavors, my Kale Avocado Salad and Brussels Sprout Kale Salad will disappear in minutes.
  • Starches: A great way to enjoy a filling, delicious meal is to whip up a hearty starch to pair with your blackened cod. My Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are the ultimate crowd-pleaser, with a creamy, decadent taste the whole family will love. Or, for something lighter, you can also balance your table with zesty, earthy undertones with delectable sides like my Lemon Quinoa and Wild Rice Pilaf.
  • Vegetable Side Dishes: You don’t need hours of prep time to enjoy a rich, savory dish loaded with nutrition. My Buttery Garlic Breen Beans and Sautéed Asparagus take less than 15 minutes to make, and will pack each bite with bold garlic, tender greens, and expert seasoning.

Expert Tips

When you use this easy recipe for cod fish, there’s no reason to stress. These pro tips will ensure your fillets are as tender, moist, and flavorful as possible—whether you cook your cod in a cast iron skillet or use frozen fillets.

  • Frozen cod: If you choose to use frozen cod fillets for this dish, it’s vital that you fully thaw them before beginning the recipe. Frozen fish won’t cook evenly, resulting in a burnt exterior and uncooked insides. Though your codfish doesn’t need to reach full room temperature before cooking, it shouldn’t have any remaining frozen areas before you begin preparation.
  • Coat fish with seasoning on all sides: The key to making this heartily flavored recipe is to season the cod fish thoroughly during prep. Be sure to coat every side of your fillets with the Cajun seasoning blend—not just the top and bottom—and gently press the spices into the meat before cooking. This way, each bite will have a taste of this recipe’s signature blackened crust.
  • Cooking time: Because there’s a direct correlation between fillet thickness and cook time, try to select equally sized cod fillets to ensure even cooking. Also, remember that—though this recipe has basic guidelines for cooking time—thicker fillets will need more time in the pan, while thinner filets will need less. To ensure you properly cook your fish, use a meat thermometer to check its internal temperature. You can remove your fillets from the heat when they reach 145 degrees F.
  • Pat dry the fish: It’s essential that you use paper towels to thoroughly pat dry your cod fillets before seasoning them. Removing this excess moisture will help the blackened seasoning stick to the meat and give your fish a good sear when added to the pan.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: If you find that not all four fillets fit in the pan, it’s best to cook them in batches to keep the pan hot and ensure even searing. I recommend using one tablespoon of butter for every two fillets.
  • Well-seasoned pan: If you want to make pan-seared cod in a cast iron skillet, ensure the pan is well-seasoned, well-oiled, and super hot before adding your fish. This high heat will keep your cod from sticking to the pan, helping it naturally release from the skillet’s surface before flipping it with a thin spatula. However, a non-stick skillet will also work if you don’t have a cast-iron skillet on hand. You may also transform this dish into a low-calorie and low-fat cod recipe by substituting the butter for a little olive oil.
  • Avoid moving the fish: The best way to cook cod fish is by letting it sear undisturbed in the pan. Keeping the fish from moving will help develop a good crust and keep the delicate meat from breaking.
  • Check for doneness: An easy way to tell if your cod fish is ready is by performing the flake test. In other words, if the fish’s flesh flakes easily, it’s probably ready to remove from the heat. However, a foolproof method of ensuring doneness is by using a digital thermometer (affiliate link.) Your fish is ready to eat when its internal temperature reaches 145 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Safety: Because of its spicy and aromatic ingredients, blackened seasoning often produces smoke when exposed to high heat. To avoid respiratory irritation, ensure your kitchen is well-ventilated before cooking, or consider cooking this recipe outdoors if you have a suitable burner.

FAQs

Want to know more about this delectable cod dinner? This simple guide will answer all your remaining questions, from what to season cod fish with to must-know kitchen terms.

What is the difference between grilled and blackened cod?

Though these terms often go hand-in-hand, their meanings are a little different. Grilling refers to a specific cooking process, while blackening refers to a particular spice mixture and coating method. Blackening seasoning is a smoky, savory Cajun blend that flavors various foods, including fish, chicken, and veggies.

Is cod good for blackening?

Absolutely! Cod’s naturally sweet, mild flavor expertly balances the smoky, spicy taste of blackened seasoning, resulting in a rich and bold seafood meal.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this recipe for a perfectly seasoned cod dinner, you won’t believe how many other tasty seafood dishes there are to try. These other fresh fish recipes will satisfy your cravings for flavorful coastal eats.

If you try this seasoned cod recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened Cod on a plate served with lemon wedges on the side.
Print

Blackened Cod Recipe

This 20-minute Blackened Cod recipe is the perfect blend of smokey seasoning with flaky cod pan-seared to perfection. Made with simple ingredients, this easy and healthy dish is a great dinner for a busy weeknight.
Course Seafood
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 324kcal

Ingredients

For Homemade Blackened Seasoning:

  • 3 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme
  • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Cod:

  • 4 cod fillets fresh or frozen & thawed 4 ounces each
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 lemon cut into wedges
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley optional

Instructions

  • Start by making the blackened seasoning. In a mason jar or bowl, mix together the smoked paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, oregano, thyme, pepper, and Kosher salt, breaking up any possible “clumps.” Set aside.
  • Pat dry the cod filets on all sides with a paper towel.
  • Brush the cod filets on all sides with the olive oil.
  • Sprinkle the blackening season evenly on all sides of the cod filets. Gently press the seasoning on the cod filets to ensure the coating adheres.
  • Melt the butter in a well-seasoned cast iron or non-stick skillet on medium-high heat. Once the skillet is hot, gently add the cod filets. If your skillet is not big enough, it is best to cook them in two batches. If that is the case, we recommend using one tablespoon of butter per two pieces of cod.
  • Cook for 2-3 minutes without moving the filets. Using a spatula, flip the filets and cook for an additional 2 minutes. They should flake easily. If not, continue to cook in 30-second intervals until done or the internal temperature of the thickest part of the fish reaches 145 degrees F. when inserted with a meat thermometer.
  • If preferred, garnish with chopped parsley and serve with a wedge of lemon on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 cod fillets, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Drying & seasoning the fish fillets: Do not skip the pat drying of the cod fillets, as it is an important step to reduce moisture and assist with the coating of the blackening season. Also, it is best to sprinkle the blackening season on all sides evenly and press down so the seasoning will stick.
  • Skillet: If you are using a cast iron skillet, make sure that it is well seasoned. Otherwise, the fish might stick to the pan. Using a cast iron skillet will help the fish cook fast and produce a nice “crust.” If you do not have one, you can use a non-stick skillet as well.
  • Fresh or Frozen Cod: We tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen cod. Both worked beautifully. However, it is imperative that you thaw the fish fully before cooking.
  • Time of Cooking: Cooking times will vary based on the thickness of the filets. It is best to start with shorter times until you see the flakiness or the internal temperature to avoid overcooking.
  • Make it dairy-free: If you do not want to use butter, you can substitute with additional olive oil.
  • Storage: Though this dish tastes best on the day you prepare it, you may store it in the refrigerator for up to two days. Just be sure to let the fillets reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. 
  • To reheat: When reheating it, first preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Then, place the fish on a sheet of precut parchment paper or aluminum foil, sprinkle it with a few drops of water, and loosely wrap it. Place the blackened cod in the oven for ten minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 324kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 112mg | Sodium: 709mg | Potassium: 1071mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1220IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Blackened Cod appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/feed/ 0
French Apple Cake https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/#comments Fri, 29 Sep 2023 17:16:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1966 If you have ever wondered what to bake with apples, this easy apple cake will offer the perfect solution. Adapted from the incredible David Lebovitz (who actually adapted it from Dorie Greenspan’s cookbook Around My French Table), it is a great alternative to my other favorite fall-inspired apple dessert, Almond Flour Apple Cake. And if you have plenty of fresh apples on hand or just want to celebrate apple season,...

The post French Apple Cake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever wondered what to bake with apples, this easy apple cake will offer the perfect solution. Adapted from the incredible David Lebovitz (who actually adapted it from Dorie Greenspan’s cookbook Around My French Table), it is a great alternative to my other favorite fall-inspired apple dessert, Almond Flour Apple Cake.

And if you have plenty of fresh apples on hand or just want to celebrate apple season, be sure to also check out my Apple Cranberry Cake and Apple Roses.

French apple rum cake sliced from the top view with a knife on the side.

Ingredients

This French apple rum cake requires just a short list of simple ingredients, many of which are probably already in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter allows you to control the level of salt in the cake, but salted butter can also be used. If you decide to use salted butter, be sure to omit using salt in the batter.
  • Apples: I used a mix of Honeycrisp apples and Granny Smith apples, but you can use any variety of apples. Some other good baking apples include Fuji, Golden Delicious, Braeburn, Jonagold, and Pink Lady.
  • All Purpose Flour
  • Baking Powder
  • Kosher Salt
  • Whole Eggs: Use large eggs for the most consistent texture.
  • Coconut Sugar: Since we only share desserts made with natural sweeteners, I made this easy fresh apple cake with coconut sugar, but you can use your favorite dry granulated sugar, like regular white sugar or brown sugar.
  • Dark Rum: Dark rum transforms it from a regular apple cake to an easy French apple rum cake with a touch more elegance. My favorite rum to use here is Myer’s or Mount Gay.
  • Vanilla Extract: If a fresh apple cake with rum is not your cup of tea (or prefer a no-alcohol version), you can skip the rum altogether and use a full tablespoon of vanilla extract in its place.

Optional Add-Ins

If you want to jazz things up a bit, you can add one, two, or all of the following to make this apple cake recipe just the way you want it.

  • Ground Spices: Sprinkle in 1-2 teaspoons of ground cinnamon and a dash of fresh nutmeg, or give it a nice warmth with 1 teaspoon of apple pie spice mix.
  • Nuts: Toss in some toasted, chopped walnuts, pecans, or slivered almonds for extra crunch.
  • Dried Fruit: Give it even more sweetness with raisins or golden raisins.

How to Make an Apple Cake?

For a fast and easy method, I like to bake the apple cake in a springform pan. With that being said, you can use a regular cake pan, just make sure to grease the pan well before adding the batter. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Prep equipment: Place the oven rack in the middle position. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Generously butter an 8-inch** round springform pan. Line the bottom with parchment paper, place it on a sheet pan, and set it aside.
  2. Melt butter: Melt the butter in a small saucepan. Set it aside to cool while you prepare the rest of the batter.
  3. Prepare the apples: Remove the core and peel the apples, then cut into 1-inch chunks.
  4. Mix dry ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, and salt.
A collage of images showing how to mix the batter to make this apple cake recipe.
  1. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together eggs and sugar until thoroughly mixed and glossy. Then, whisk in the rum and vanilla.
  2. Make apple batter: Add half of the flour mixture into the wet ingredients, followed by half of the melted butter. Alternate once more with the rest of the flour and remaining butter and stir until just combined. Fold in the apple chunks, making sure each one is coated with the batter.
  3. Bake: Transfer the batter to the prepared pan and smooth the top with a rubber spatula. Bake for 50 minutes, or until golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the center of the cake comes out clean.
Fresh apple cake in a spring form cake pan before baked and after baked.
  1. Cool: Allow to cool for 5-10 minutes, then run a knife around the edges to gently loosen the cake from the pan. Remove the sides of the springform pan or gently remove from the cake pan. Transfer to a cake platter or large plate. Cool for at least 1 hour.  Sprinkle it with powdered sugar (if preferred), before serving.

How to Store This Apple Cake?

This easy French apple cake recipe is a great make-ahead cake that you can enjoy throughout the week. While it is best on the day it is made, it keeps fresh if stored properly. Here is how I do it:

  • Storage: The apple rum cake will keep fresh for up to 3 days at room temperature, covered on the kitchen counter. Since the cake itself is very moist, it’s best to store it covered with a cake dome, overturned bowl, or with a few toothpicks inserted throughout the top of the cake and then tented with plastic wrap.
  • Freezing: Due to the high ratio of liquid coming from the apples, I do not recommend freezing this cake.

How to Serve?

Whether you want to enjoy this apple cake as the French do or give it more of an American spin, some of my favorite ways to serve include:

A slice of rum apple cake on a plate with a fork on the side.
  • Ice Cream: Serve it slightly warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream, such as Honey Vanilla Ice Cream or more decadent caramel ice cream.
  • Cream / Sugar: Finish it with a dollop of creme fraiche, mascarpone cheese, Maple Whipped Cream, or a simple sprinkle of confectioner’s sugar.
  • Sauce: Drizzle it with storebaught caramel sauce, date caramel sauce, or fruit preserves.
  • Coffee / Tea: The sweet apple cake goes particularly well with bitter espresso or a mild cup of tea, such as Earl Grey.
  • Wine: Serve it as the French would, with a chilled glass of Sauternes (a sweet dessert wine) or an after-dinner beverage, like Calvados or Brandy.

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for this homemade apple cake recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d like to share to ensure the best results. Below are a few lessons I learned while testing the recipe:

  • Use room temperature ingredients: When all the ingredients are roughly the same temperature, it makes for a more cohesive batter. In this case, make sure to allow time for the butter to cool down and allow the eggs to come to room temperature.
  • Prevent the apples from oxidizing: For some added insurance, you can toss the diced apples with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to prevent browning. The fresh citrus juice adds a nice little tang, too.
  • Cubed Apples: As you can see in the pictures, this cake is a bit different than your usual fluffy apple cake recipe. Rather, it is cubed apples covered with cake batter. Due to the high moisture content of the cubed apples, it doesn’t rise as much as you would expect.
  • Use the right pan: I used an 8-inch springform cake pan for easy removal. You can also use a 9-inch springform pan, just note that the cake will be thinner. If you do not own a springform pan, a regular 8 or 9-inch cake pan will do, just make sure to thoroughly grease the bottom and sides, and line the bottom of the pan with a circle of parchment paper.
  • Pay attention to baking time: Bake times will vary based on your oven. Start checking the cake at the 50-minute mark, and continue to bake in 5-minute increments until golden brown and springy.
  • Browning: If you use coconut or brown sugar as your sweetener, the top of the cake will brown more compared to using granulated sugar.
  • Cool completely: For best results, cool in the pan for 5 minutes, loosen the sides, and then transfer to a cake plate. It is best if you let it cool for at least an hour. 

FAQs

What country did apple cake originate from?

There are many different variations of apple cake throughout the world thanks to regional and religious influences. The first version of French apple cake, tarte tatin, which is technically more like an upside-down version of apple pie, was invented by the Tatin sisters at their hotel Lamotte Beuvron in the 19th century.

What is a substitute for dark rum in apple cake?

Simply replace the dark rum with more vanilla extract. Feel free to use up to one full tablespoon of vanilla extract.

What’s the difference between apple pie and apple cake?

Apple pie is an apple dessert where apples are the filling between two crusts made from shortcrust pastry. Apple cake, on the other hand, is diced apples surrounded by a batter made primarily of butter, flour, and sugar.

Other Baked Goods with Apples You Might Also Like:

Wondering what you can make with fresh apples? Well, you have come to the right place. Here are a few other apple recipes you might also like:

If you try this French Apple Cake, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cake sliced on a plate from the top view.
Print

French Apple Cake Recipe

This French Apple Cake is a simple yet classic fall cake featuring cubed apples folded in batter that is flavored with dark rum. Made with just a few everyday ingredients, it is a French apple dessert that you can make with only 15 minutes of hands-on time.
Course Cake
Cuisine French
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Cooling time 1 hour
Total Time 2 hours
Servings 8 slices
Calories 266kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more for greasing the pan (110gr.)
  • 4 large apples ~2 pounds, I used a mix of Honey Crisp and Granny Smith Apples
  • ¾ cup all-purpose flour 110 gr.
  • ¾ teaspoon baking powder
  • teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • ¾ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar*
  • 2 tablespoons dark rum
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon powdered sugar optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Generously butter an 8-inch** round springform pan. Line it with parchment paper, place it on a sheet pan, and set it aside.
  • Place butter in a small saucepan and heat until fully melted. Let it cool off the heat while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Core and peel apples, then cut them into 1-inch chunks. Set them aside.
  • Whisk together flour, baking powder, and salt in a small bowl. Set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together eggs and sugar until thoroughly mixed. Whisk in the rum and vanilla.
  • Whisk half of the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients, followed by half of the now-cooled melted butter.
  • Stir in the rest of the flour mixture and butter. Whisk until fully combined.
  • Fold in the apple chunks and make sure that they are fully coated with the batter.
  • Transfer the batter to the prepared cake pan and smooth the top with a spatula. Place the cake pan on a sheet pan (we do this to catch any bubbling juices.)
  • Bake for 50 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then run a knife through the edges to loosen the cake from the pan.
  • Transfer to a cake platter (or a wire rack) and let it cool for at least an hour before serving. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with a small amount of powdered sugar before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes an 8-inch cake (8 slices). The nutritional values below are per slice.
  • Sugar: You can substitute coconut sugar with an equal amount of brown sugar or granulated sugar. If you use granulated sugar, the surface of the cake will not brown as much.
  • Cake pan: A 9-inch springform pan would also work, but the cake will be thinner. If you do not own a springform, you can make this in a cake pan, but make sure to grease it well so that it will come out easily.
  • No alcohol version: If you prefer to use no alcohol or just want to skip the rum altogether, use a full tablespoon of vanilla extract in its place.
  • Storage: This cake will keep fresh for up to 3 days at room temperature, covered on the kitchen counter. Since the cake itself is very moist, it’s best to store it covered with a cake dome, overturned bowl, or with a few toothpicks inserted throughout the top of the cake and then tented with plastic wrap. Alternatively, you can cut it into slices and store in an airtight container.
  • Serving suggestions: A dollop of crème fraîche is possibly the most French way of serving it, but you can also top it off with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
  • Cubed Apples: As you can see in the pictures, this cake is a bit different than your usual batter-heavy apple cake recipe. Rather, it is cubed apples covered with cake batter. Please be aware that due to the high moisture content of the cubed apples, it doesn’t rise as much as you would expect.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 71mg | Sodium: 124mg | Potassium: 129mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 1mg

The post French Apple Cake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/french-apple-cake/feed/ 23
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/#comments Mon, 25 Sep 2023 16:31:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20686 I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier. If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond...

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier.

If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Apple Roses, and Dairy-Free Apple Crisp recipes.

Apple and cinnamon oatmeal garnished with toppings from the top view.

Whether you are a morning person like me or someone who prefers to sleep until the last minute, I am pretty sure the unmistakably autumn aroma of this homemade apple oatmeal cooking on the stovetop will lure even the sleepiest member of your family out of bed.

It’s an easy way to set the mood for the fall season, and similar to my other breakfast bowl recipes, it’s ready in only 15 minutes. Bonus – it’s also vegan, dairy-free, paleo-friendly, and gluten-free!

Ingredients for Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal:

You probably already have a handful of ingredients you need to make this Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal in your pantry. Below is everything you need:

Ingredients for homemade apple cinnamon oatmeal from the top view.
  • Oil: We use oil to sautee apples and cinnamon before adding in the oats and milk. We use coconut oil, but avocado oil, butter, or clarified butter (also known as ghee) would also work in this apple oatmeal breakfast recipe.
  • Fresh Apples: We use Honeycrisp apples, but any other variety of apples, like Fuji, Pink Lady, Gala, and Granny Smith Apples, would also work. Peeling them is optional, but we recommend cutting them into 1-inch cubes. You can also use two different kinds of apples if you want to take your apple pie oatmeal recipe to the next level.
  • Spices: You’ll need ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg.
  • Nuts: We are using unsalted walnuts, but pecans or almonds would also work well in this recipe. If you have the time, we recommend toasting your nuts for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.
  • Rolled Oats: Of all the different kinds of oats, rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) are probably the easiest to find, and therefore, it is what we are using in this apple oatmeal breakfast. Use gluten-free oats if you are following a gluten-free diet. If you are new to the world of oats and want to know more about them, be sure to check out our detailed articles on Rolled Oats vs. Steel-Cut Oats and Quick Oats vs. Rolled Oats.
  • Milk: We used unsweetened almond milk, but any dairy or non-dairy milk (such as coconut milk, oat milk, or regular milk) would work in this recipe. You can also make Almond Milk from Almond Butter in a pinch. Either way, we recommend using sugar-free milk to keep it healthy.
  • Superfoods: To boost protein and to keep you full for longer, we used a tablespoon of chia seeds. However, you can also add ground flax seeds, hemp seeds, and even your favorite protein powder to up the nutrition of this apple oats recipe.
  • Sweetener: We wanted this homemade apple oatmeal recipe to be sugar-free, so instead of adding sugar to the mixture, we opted for a drizzle of maple syrup in the end. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can use brown sugar, coconut sugar, honey, or regular granulated sugar and add it to the oatmeal mixture as you are cooking it.
  • Optional Toppings: We sprinkled our apple and cinnamon oatmeal with diced apples, walnuts, and pomegranate arils for a pop of color. However, when it comes to toppings, the sky is the limit. Feel free to add a tablespoon of almond or peanut butter (a great way to add some protein to the recipe), raisins (or cranberries), and even a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Vanilla Extract: A splash of vanilla extract is an easy way to enhance the sweet flavors of the apples.
  • Apple Juice: For a richer apple taste, consider replacing some of the milk with apple juice. A good place to start is 1/4 cup unsweetened apple juice with 1 1/2 cups of milk.
  • Applesauce: While we prefer this recipe with diced and sauteed apples, you can still make this apple cinnamon breakfast with applesauce instead. Simply skip the sauteing of the apples and add 1/2 cup unsweetened applesauce into the oat mixture.
  • Cranberry Sauce: Making this easy oatmeal recipe during the holiday season? A dollop of leftover maple cranberry sauce is a delicious way to sweeten it.
  • Spices: While we opted for the basic cinnamon and nutmeg, you can experiment with adding other spices, such as ground cardamom and apple spice.
  • Salt: It is optional, but as it is with any sweet recipe, adding a pinch of salt to the oatmeal mixture will help enhance and balance the sweet flavor of apples.
  • Cooking liquid: Alternatively, you can make this apple cinnamon oats recipe using water instead of milk. If you decide to do so, please keep in mind that it will be less creamy.

How To Make Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal on Stove Top?

The steps to making this easy apple cinnamon oatmeal recipe are twofold, and it only takes 15 minutes from start to finish. Below are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cinnamon apple oatmeal step by step.
  1. Saute apples and spices: Start by heating coconut oil in a small saucepan over medium-high heat. Add apples and sauté, stirring frequently, for 2-3 minutes. Add the ground cinnamon and nutmeg and cook for 10 more seconds.
  2. Make oatmeal: Add the nuts, rolled oats, milk, and chia seeds (if using). Stir to combine and cook, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally until thickened for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Serve with toppings: Ladle into bowls, and garnish with fresh diced apples (or other fruits like pomegranate seeds), more nuts, and a drizzle of maple syrup. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with more ground cinnamon and an extra splash of milk.

On a side note, we based the recipe for this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal on my Oatmeal with Almond Milk and Chia Seeds recipe, which happens to be one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living. It is a great recipe to show you how to make oatmeal on the stovetop if you are new to making oatmeal for breakfast or in need of a works-every-time recipe.

How To Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

One of the reasons why we love making this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal is that it is a great meal prep-friendly breakfast recipe that you can make over the weekend and enjoy in the next few days. Perfect for busy mornings! Here is how we do it:

  • Meal Prep: Make the apple oatmeal recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, be sure to top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftover cinnamon apple oatmeal in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, we like to reheat it in the microwave if we are serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal being drizzled with maple syrup.

How to make this Oatmeal recipe in the microwave?

If you’d rather make this homemade cinnamon apple oatmeal in the microwave, simply:

  • Start with cooking the apples: Sprinkle cubed apples with cinnamon and place in a large microwave-safe bowl (it should be large enough to make the whole oatmeal)
  • Add the liquid and nuts: Add in the almond milk (or water) and nuts and cook on high for 3-5 minutes, stopping and stirring every minute or so until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Assemble: Drizzle with maple syrup and add the toppings. Give it a taste and add more if you like.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

While the recipe below, as written, is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to make flavors shine through when making this easy breakfast bowl:

  • Cooking apples for oatmeal: Do not skip the sauteeing of the apples, as it is key to bringing out their sweetness and making this a sugar-free apple cinnamon oatmeal. Additionally, cooking them ensures they soften, resulting in a more delightful texture in your oatmeal.
  • Experiment with different types of apples: While we do not think that there is such a thing as “the best apple for oatmeal,” we recommend experimenting with two (or more) different kinds of apples when making this recipe. Each type offers its unique flavor and texture, enriching the overall flavor and texture of your oatmeal.
  • Enhance and toast your spices: Consider experimenting with other spices such as cloves, star anise, ginger, apple pie spice, and allspice. However, we recommend using a very small amount to start with and then adjusting it according to your tastebuds. Furthermore, we recommend taking the time to toast your spices with the apples for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.

FAQs

How to cook apples for oatmeal?

To soften apples, use a teaspoon of coconut oil and saute them in the warm melted oil for a few minutes while stirring them often. As they cook, they release some of their juices and become sweeter and softer, making it a perfect pairing for this cinnamon oatmeal.

How to boost the nutrition of apple oatmeal?

To make this apple cinnamon porridge recipe even more nutritious, you can add a scoop of ground flaxseeds for additional fiber, a scoop of collagen for additional protein, and use less (or no sugar) in the recipe.

Is apple cinnamon oatmeal healthy?

Yes, it is, especially when made without using additional sugars. According to Healthline, when consumed on a regular basis, apples lower your chance of developing cancer, diabetes, and heart disease. Additionally, ground cinnamon is packed with antioxidants and anti-inflammatory properties, which help lower the risk of disease.

How much cinnamon to add to oatmeal?

You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this healthy apple breakfast porridge, then you will love our collection of oatmeal and apple recipes. Below are a few that we hand-picked for you:

Other Oatmeal Recipes:

Other Autumn-Inspired Apple Recipes:

If you try this Homemade Apple Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon oatmeal in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe

This Homemade Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is an autumn-inspired twist on plain oatmeal. Rolled oats, apples, and cinnamon simmered in almond milk with a touch of maple syrup make a delicious and healthy breakfast ready in less than 15 minutes.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 454kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil avocado oil or ghee would also work
  • 1 large apple or 2 small apples, cut into small chunks
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Pinch of ground nutmeg
  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or walnuts, plus more as topping
  • 1 cup rolled oats – Not quick cooking {I used Trader Joe's gluten free brand oats}
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk
  • 1 teaspoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup plus more to finish
  • ¼ cup pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Heat coconut oil in a medium sized saucepan over medium heat.
  • Add in the apples and saute for 2-3 minutes. Stir in the cinnamon and nutmeg.
  • Add in the pecans, oats, almond milk, and chia seeds (if using). Give it a stir and let it cook until thickened for about 7-10 minutes, stirring constantly during the cooking process.
  • Ladle into bowls and top them off with pomegranate seeds (or other fruit), nuts, more apples, and a slight sprinkle of ground cinnamon. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of apple oatmeal, which is ideal for serving two people. You can multiply the recipe if you are serving a crowd. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the listed toppings.
  • Optional Add-ins: You can easily customize this cinnamon apple recipe according to your taste buds. A few of our favorite ways to do it are as follows:
    • Use two different types of apples
    • Add a splash of vanilla extract
    • Up the nutrition by adding other superfoods such as ground flaxseeds and hempseeds
    • Top it off with a dollop of creamy peanut butter or yogurt for additional protein
  • Meal Prep: Make the recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, I like to reheat it in the microwave if I am serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 330mg | Potassium: 403mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 368mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/feed/ 34
Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes.  Ingredients We’re keeping the...

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
  • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
  • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
  • Extra-virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
  • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

Substitutions 

Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

  • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
  • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

  1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
  1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
  2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
  3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
  4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
  • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
  • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

  • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
A close up of the dish from the top view.

What to Serve It With?

Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

Expert Tips

When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
  • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

FAQs

Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
  • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
  • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
  • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
  • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
    • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 13
Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/#comments Wed, 13 Sep 2023 12:50:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8520 This oatmeal apple bake checks all the boxes for a delectably nutritious breakfast. Still, there are so many other healthy apple breakfast recipes to try! My Farro Breakfast Bowl with Apple Cinnamon will fill your bowl with sweet cranberries and nutty quinoa crunch, while my Healthy Vegan Apple Crisp is a gluten-free recipe packed with tender, warm baked apples. Or, if you’re looking for a moist, grab-and-go option, my paleo...

The post Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This oatmeal apple bake checks all the boxes for a delectably nutritious breakfast. Still, there are so many other healthy apple breakfast recipes to try! My Farro Breakfast Bowl with Apple Cinnamon will fill your bowl with sweet cranberries and nutty quinoa crunch, while my Healthy Vegan Apple Crisp is a gluten-free recipe packed with tender, warm baked apples. Or, if you’re looking for a moist, grab-and-go option, my paleo Apple Almond Muffins will make every morning a piece of cake.

Baked apple oatmeal sliced in a square baking dish with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients to Make This Baked Apple Oatmeal

Made with only the tastiest natural ingredients, this apple cinnamon baked oatmeal recipe is perfect for anyone looking to transform their home pantry into a gourmet breakfast.

  • Coconut oil: Melted coconut oil is a must when greasing your baking dish, ensuring that your apple oat bake doesn’t stick to the edges of the pan. However, you may also use butter or cooking spray, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Rolled oats: It’s essential that you use rolled oats (also known as old-fashioned oats) in your baked oatmeal recipes. When considering the difference between Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats, remember that instant oats (quick-cooking oats) will melt under high oven temperatures, and steel cut oats will come out thick and gummy.
  • Chia seeds: Though chia seeds are optional, they add deliciously nutty undertones while loading your breakfast with protein, fiber, and antioxidants. You can also incorporate other superfoods, like hemp seeds, to add nutrition to your breakfast bake.
  • Warm spices: The best way to season this healthy baked apple oatmeal recipe is with everyone’s favorite fall classics—ground cinnamon and ground nutmeg. You can also add a pinch of apple pie spice for extra warm, woody overtones.
  • Baking powder and kosher salt: These two ingredients are perfect for bringing out this sweet breakfast recipe’s nuanced flavors and giving it a light, pastry-like rise.
  • Large eggs: We use two large eggs to thicken and bind this hearty breakfast recipe. However, if you prefer a vegan apple cinnamon bake, you can substitute these eggs with a flax egg. To make flax eggs, stir together two tablespoons of ground flax seed and five tablespoons of water in a small bowl. Once combined, let the mixture rest for ten minutes to thicken it. It’s ready to add to your batter when it reaches the desired consistency.
  • Milk: I used almond milk in my cinnamon apple oatmeal bake, but any of your favorite types of milk—from dairy-free options (i.e. oat milk, soy milk, coconut milk, etc.) to traditional cow’s milk—would work.
  • Unsweetened applesauce: The key to making apple-baked oats as sweet, moist, and tender as possible is preparing your baked oatmeal with applesauce. I prefer using homemade Unsweetened Applesauce because it’s vegan, smooth, and only uses a few simple ingredients.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Maple syrup: I only use ⅓ cup of maple syrup to sweeten my baked apple oats, but if you like your oatmeal sweeter, you can increase it to ½ cup.
  • Apple: Any of your favorite fresh apples would work in this apple and oatmeal bake, including Honeycrisp, Pink Lady, Granny Smith, Fuji, Braeburn, and even Gala. Depending on your preference, you may also choose whether to use peeled or unpeeled apples for this recipe. However, you must cut them into even-sized cubes before adding them to your mix to ensure maximum tenderness and uniform baking.
  • Nuts: I recommend crunchy pecans, walnuts, or almonds to give your baked oatmeal a touch of earthy, buttery notes. Just be sure to give them a rough chop before adding them to your batter to ensure a balanced flavor distribution and delicious texture.
  • Dates: I love adding dates to my oatmeal recipe due to their rich flavor and chewy texture. However, other dried fruit—including raisins, cranberries, and figs—would also work.
  • Coconut or brown sugar: If you love the deep, toffee-like taste of baked sugar, you may choose to add a sprinkle of coconut sugar or light brown sugar to the top of your baked apple oatmeal.

How to Make Baked Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

You don’t have to work at a diner to make this healthy baked oatmeal with apples easily. This tasty breakfast will come out with irresistibly sweet, hearty, and warm flavors in eight easy steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baked apple cinnamon oatmeal.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. While the oven heats, coat an 8×8 baking dish with coconut oil and set it aside.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, stir the oats, chia seeds (if using), cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and Kosher salt. Ensure the ingredients mix evenly throughout the blend.
  3. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, applesauce, vanilla extract, and maple syrup until thoroughly mixed.
  4. Combine the wet and dry ingredients: Pour the wet ingredients into the bowl of dry ingredients and mix until combined.
A collage of images showing how to make apple baked oatmeal.
  1. Incorporate the add-ins: Gently fold the chopped apples, walnuts, and dates into the oat mixture.
  2. Transfer the oatmeal blend: Pour the apple oatmeal batter into the prepared baking dish and spread it into a single even layer.
  3. Bake: Bake the dish for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  4. Serve: Remove the breakfast apple bake from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes. Then, drizzle it lightly with maple syrup and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

This apple cinnamon oatmeal bake is one of my cookbook’s most meal prep-friendly breakfast recipes. Take the stress out of your early mornings with this must-have make-ahead breakfast.

  • Make ahead: To make baked apple cinnamon oats in advance, bake the recipe and let it come to room temperature. Then, store the mixture, covered, in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Store: When storing your baked oats, let them come to room temperature first. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days. You may also keep your oatmeal in individual portions for a convenient grab-and-go breakfast.
  • Reheat: You can reheat this recipe in the oven at 325 degrees F. for 15 minutes or in the microwave in 30-45-second intervals until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Though you can freeze this baked oatmeal recipe, it will likely come out a bit dry once thawed. However, if you freeze your baked oats, let them come to room temperature first, transfer them to an airtight container, and place them in the freezer. It’s essential, too, to cover the oats tightly to avoid freezer burn.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen apple oatmeal, place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it in the morning.
Sliced baked oatmeal with applesauce on a plate with a spoon on the side.

What to Serve it With?

A warm cup of coffee or tea is all you need to turn this cinnamon apple baked oatmeal recipe into a five-star breakfast. However, these easy additions will add all the creamy, sweet, and moist flavors you could want from your morning meal.

  • A drizzle of maple syrup or honey: If you’re a fan of caramelly, floral flavors, I recommend topping your apple breakfast bake with maple syrup or honey. This simple addition will infuse every slice with a rich, complex taste.
  • A dollop of Greek yogurt or vanilla yogurt: Add a spoonful of yogurt to this delicious breakfast, and your baked apple oatmeal recipe will come alive with cool, creamy flavors.
  • Breakfast fruit salad: What pairs better with juicy apples than a brilliant blend of your favorite fruits? Made with a customizable mix of bananas, blueberries, strawberries, and pineapple, this healthy breakfast option will delight your tastebuds with just fifteen minutes of prep.
  • Maple whipped cream: Transform this wholesome breakfast into a sweet treat the whole family will love with a small dollop of light, fluffy whipped cream.
  • A dollop of almond butter or peanut butter: If you love the nutty, tart combination of apples and peanut butter, you’ll love adding this creamy addition to your apple oatmeal breakfast bake.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making an oatmeal apple breakfast bake packed with warm, caramelized flavors. This expert guide has everything you need, from what oats to use to tasty serving suggestions.

  • Oats: To achieve the best texture in this easy breakfast recipe, using the correct type of oats is essential. This delicious apple cinnamon bake requires rolled (AKA old-fashioned) oats for its moist, tender consistency. Instant, quick-cook, and steel-cut oats will result in a burnt, soupy, or gummy bake.
  • Size of your casserole dish: I tested this recipe in both an 8×8 and 9×9 pan, and either size will work when following my recipe instructions. However, if you prefer to make your apple cinnamon baked oats in a larger dish, such as a 9×13 baking dish, double the recipe.
  • Baking it in a muffin tin: You can also prepare this tasty breakfast in muffin tins for perfectly portioned oatmeal cups. Simply divide the batter among the cups of a 12-cup muffin pan and bake for 20-25 minutes.
  • Adjusting the sweetness: I designed this healthy breakfast dish with mild sweetness, a moist texture, and maximum nutrition. However, if you prefer a sweeter version, feel free to add more maple syrup, coconut or brown sugar, or other sweet add-ins for a dessert-level recipe.
  • Can be served warm or cold: You can serve this delicious morning recipe warm, room temperature, or cold, depending on your preference.

Other Baked Apple Recipes

This easy apple-baked oatmeal has all the sweet, tart, and warm flavors you love in your favorite baked apple recipes. Below, you’ll find even more tasty apple recipes to satisfy all your fall cravings.

If you try this Baked Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon baked oatmeal in a square dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal Recipe

Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal offers a healthy and wholesome start to your day. Made with tender apples, warm cinnamon, and a touch of maple syrup, this healthy breakfast bake is the ultimate fall/winter oatmeal recipe.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon coconut oil
  • 2 ½ cups old-fashioned rolled oats
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs* or flax eggs for vegan option (recipe below in the notes)
  • 1 ½ cups unsweetened almond milk or any other non-dairy milk of your choice
  • 1 cup unsweetened applesauce
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • cup maple syrup plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 apple* peeled (or unpeeled) and diced into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 cup chopped walnuts or pecans optional
  • ½ cup chopped dates optional (5-6 Medjool dates)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat an 8×8- inch* baking dish with the coconut oil and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir the oats, chia seeds (if using), cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and Kosher salt until combined.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, applesauce, vanilla extract, and maple syrup until fully combined.
  • Pour the egg mixture into the oat mixture and stir to combine.
  • Gently fold in the diced apples, walnuts, and dates.
  • Pour the mixture into the baking dish and gently spread it evenly.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  • Cool for 10 minutes and serve with a drizzle of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields 9 slices of baked apple oatmeal. The nutritional values below are per slice. 
  • Size of your baking dish: You can use both an 8×8 or a 9×9 square dish to make this recipe. If you prefer to use a 9×13, we recommend doubling the recipe and baking it for 45 minutes.
  • Use flax eggs to make it vegan*: This is a gluten-free and dairy-free recipe. If you prefer to make this dish vegan, you can substitute the eggs with “flax eggs.” To make flax eggs, mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds with 5 tablespoons of water, stirring to combine. Set aside for 10 minutes, then use it in place of the eggs. 
  • Apple: I used Honeycrisp apples but any type of apple you have on hand would work.
  • Make Ahead: You can bake apple oatmeal bake in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container. You can reheat it in the oven at 325 degrees F for 15 minutes or microwave it (in 30-second increments) until warmed through.
  • Store: Be sure to bring the leftovers to room temperature. Then,  transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days. You may also keep your oatmeal in individual servings for a convenient grab-and-go breakfast.

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 248mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 80IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 130mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/feed/ 26
Blackberry Oatmeal Bake https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/#comments Sun, 10 Sep 2023 18:06:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3455 Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal in a square baking dish from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

When you make blackberry breakfast recipes like this, there’s no need to spend hundreds at the grocery store. This simple oatmeal bake only uses natural, pantry-ready ingredients to start your morning.

  • Coconut oil: I use coconut oil to coat my oatmeal baking dish, though oil spray would also work. If you feel luxurious and want to give your oatmeal rich, sumptuous undertones, you may also prepare this recipe with melted butter.
  • Old-fashioned oats: Old-fashioned oats (also known as rolled oats) are my go-to for this blackberry-baked oatmeal, as their flat, round flakes are perfect for absorbing excess liquid and withstand the baking process. However, if you’re unsure about the difference between Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats or Steel-Cut Oats vs. Rolled Oats, these simple guides explain everything you need to know. Furthermore, you may also make this dish with gluten-free oats to accommodate a gluten-free diet.
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Unsweetened shredded coconut: I prefer my coconut-baked oatmeal to get a mild sweetness from natural ingredients, such as maple syrup and fresh berries. However, you can also use sweetened shredded coconut to add sweetness to your breakfast.
  • Nuts: I used sliced almonds, but you can also use chopped almonds or other nuts like walnuts or pecans.
  • Chia seeds
  • Baking powder
  • Salt: You only need a pinch of salt to bring out the other nuanced flavors of this recipe.
  • Large eggs
  • Milk: Though I usually use unsweetened almond milk in this dish, any kind of milk will work, from oat milk to soy milk, cow milk, coconut milk, and beyond. If you prefer making your own milk, my Homemade Almond Milk recipe is the one I recommend.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Maple syrup
  • Lemon zest
  • Frozen or fresh blackberries: I love making this blackberry breakfast with the luscious, tart flavor of fresh blackberries. However, you may also use frozen blackberries as long as you reduce the almond milk to 1⅔ cups. This reduction will help balance the added moisture in frozen berries, keeping your oatmeal from becoming watery.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Spices: This original recipe calls for ground cinnamon to give it its signature woody warmth. However, feel free to experiment with other spices, like nutmeg for a nuttier profile or cardamom for a slightly peppery dish.
  • Fruit: Any berry would work in this easy-baked oatmeal recipe, so you can mix and match according to your personal preference. If desired, you can even take this dish to the next level by transforming it into a triple-berry oatmeal bake using a mixture of juicy blackberries, raspberries, strawberries, and/or blueberries.
  • Other superfoods: Want to pack this simple recipe with even more nutrients? Add a tablespoon of healthy superfoods, like hemp seeds, ground flaxseeds, and oat bran, and your breakfast will contain countless vitamins and minerals, like magnesium, protein, and omega-3 fatty acids. Not only do these simple ingredients promote digestive and heart health, but they also add deliciously nutty undertones to this easy breakfast.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Protein powders: If you want your oatmeal to boost your metabolism while promoting muscle gain and reducing late-morning cravings, add 2-3 tablespoons of your favorite protein powder.
  • Make it vegan: To make this dish vegan, simply substitute the eggs with flax eggs. You can make flax eggs at home by mixing two tablespoons of ground flaxseed with five tablespoons of water until combined. Set the mixture aside for 10 minutes before adding it to your oatmeal recipe.

How to Make It

This baked oatmeal with berries recipe is a cinch to make and makes waking up a delight. In just nine steps and ten minutes of prep time, a delectable dish will be ready on your table.

A collage of images showing how to make blackberry oatmeal bake.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F., and coat an 8×8-inch baking dish with coconut oil. Set the coated dish aside.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients: Stir the oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt in a large mixing bowl until thoroughly combined.
  3. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest until fully integrated.
  4. Combine wet and dry ingredients: Pour the milk mixture into the large bowl of dry ingredients and stir until combined.
  5. Add the blackberries: Gently fold the blackberries into the oat mixture.
A couple of images showing the process of mixing and baking oatmeal with blackberries.
  1. Transfer the oatmeal: Pour the oatmeal recipe into the oiled oven-safe pan and spread it evenly with a spatula.
  2. Bake: Cook for 35-40 minutes or until the oatmeal turns golden brown.
  3. Cool: Remove the baking dish from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  4. Serve: Once cooled, divide the berry oatmeal bake among several bowls, garnish them with extra berries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Out of all the blackberry recipes for breakfast, this is one of the most meal prep-friendly. These simple tips will show you how to make baked oatmeal to enjoy throughout the week or freeze it for future use.

  • Storage: To store your baked blackberry oatmeal, first let it reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. If preferred, you can also slice it and store it in single-serving portions for extra easy morning meal prep.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a 325-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or in the microwave in 30-second increments.
  • Freeze: When freezing this recipe, let it reach room temperature first. Then, cover it tightly with several layers of plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn and store it in the freezer for up to 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen blackberry oatmeal bake, place it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in the oven for 15 minutes at 325 degrees F.

How to Serve?

Making blackberry recipes for breakfast is a great way to add creativity to the kitchen. Serve it any way you want, from a grab-and-go morning meal to a healthy dessert guaranteed to make your mouth water.

  • A cup of coffee or juice: If you’re used to busy mornings, nothing is as satisfying as serving up a piece of this oatmeal bake alongside a hot cup of coffee or fresh juice.
  • Greek Yogurt: One of my favorite ways to serve this dish is with a sweet dollop of Honey Vanilla Yogurt. If you prefer a plant-based yogurt, you may also add a spoonful of coconut yogurt or almond milk yogurt for an equally creamy addition.
  • Milk: Do you prefer your oatmeal bake to be a little creamier? Adding a splash of milk to your baked dish will add a rich taste and an extra helping of calcium to your breakfast.
  • Nut butters: An easy way to make this simple recipe more filling and add protein is to spread a spoonful of peanut, almond, or cashew butter over your oatmeal bake slice.
  • Sweeteners: When prepared as-is, this blackberry baked oatmeal has a mildly sweet flavor—perfect for those who don’t like their breakfasts to taste too sugary. However, if you prefer more sweetness in your morning meal, add a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or more blackberries. 
  • Sauce: If you’re like me, you know that a dash of sauce is all that’s needed to bring a recipe to life. Add a dollop of Date Caramel, Applesauce, or Homemade Blueberry Sauce to give this oatmeal bake extra rich, gooey flavor.
  • Ice cream: If you want to transform this tasty breakfast recipe into an irresistible dessert, try serving it with a scoop of your favorite ice cream! Honey Vanilla Ice Cream exquisitely balances the warm, woody undertones of oatmeal, while Chocolate Honey Ice Cream is a great addition for those who love the rich taste of cocoa powder.
Baked blackberry oatmeal cut into slices and served on small plates.

Expert Tips

Want to prepare a healthy breakfast worthy of a five-star dinner? These pro tips will ensure you have zero hassle making this blackberry oatmeal breakfast loaded with tart, hearty, and sweet flavors.

  • Baking dish: I prefer to bake this dish in an 8×8-inch baking dish to get the best post-baking consistency, though you may also use the same cooking instructions for a 9×9-inch dish. To make baked oatmeal in ramekins, reduce the cooking time by 10-15 minutes. Or, if you’re serving a crowd, you may double the recipe and bake it in a 9×13-inch baking dish at 350 degrees F. for 40 minutes.
  • Serving: The beauty of this oatmeal bake recipe is that you can serve it at whatever temperature you prefer—warm, room temperature, or cold.
  • Play with the add-ins: Endlessly customizable, this oatmeal recipe allows you to experiment with whatever add-ins you like. By extension, don’t worry if you’re missing one or two of the listed add-ons or want to add more or less. This dish is perfect for accommodating personal preferences when designing the oat mixture.

FAQs

Are blackberries good in oatmeal?

Blackberries are easily my favorite baked oatmeal berry. Baked blackberries have a delectably sweet yet tart flavor, perfectly balancing the mild notes of oatmeal. Even better, these low-calorie berries are also packed with nutrients, including Vitamin C, Vitamin K, and fiber, while also preventing heart disease.

Why are my baked oats soggy?

There are a few reasons your baked oatmeal might come out soggy. First off, you might have too much liquid in your mixture, either from how much milk you added or if you used frozen blackberries instead of fresh. It’s also possible you didn’t bake the recipe for enough time or that the size of your baking dish is too small. It’s also important to let your baked oats rest after baking to allow them to reabsorb their liquids. Finally, you should also consider the type of oats you use in your recipe. Instant oats and quick-cooking oats don’t have as hearty of a texture as old-fashioned oats, so they might be unable to soak up as much liquid during baking.

Other Oatmeal Recipes You Might Like

There are few better ways to start your morning with a filling, heart-healthy taste than with a bowl of warm oatmeal. These tasty recipes will ensure you never endure another bland breakfast again.

If you try this Blackberry Oatmeal Bake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal sliced in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Blackberry Oatmeal Bake Recipe

This Blackberry Oatmeal Bake is an easy-to-make, healthy baked oatmeal recipe packed with juicy blackberries and superfoods and sweetened with maple syrup. It is a delicious morning treat that is also breakfast meal-prep friendly.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 215kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons coconut oil avocado oil, or oil spray would also work
  • 2 cups old-fashioned oats aka rolled oats*
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ cup unsweetened toasted shredded coconut optional
  • ½ cup sliced almonds optional
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs or flax eggs for a vegan option
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any milk you prefer
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • cup maple syrup plus more for drizzle
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest optional
  • 2 cups fresh blackberries divided (reserving ½ cup for garnish)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat an 8×8 inch square baking dish with the coconut oil and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir the rolled oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt until combined.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest, ensuring that everything is fully combined.
  • Pour the wet ingredients into the oat mixture and stir to combine.
  • Gently fold in the blackberries.
  • Pour the mixture into the baking dish and spread it evenly using a spatula.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  • When ready to serve, divide it amongst several bowls, garnish with blackberries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields 9 slices of baked oatmeal. The nutritional values below are per slice. 
  • Gluten-free rolled oats: If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free oats. 
  • Size of your casserole dish: You can use both an 8×8 or a 9×9 baking dish to make this recipe. If you prefer to use a 9×13, we recommend doubling the recipe and baking it for 40 minutes.
  • Sweetness: This recipe is mildly sweet. You may add an additional ¼ cup of maple syrup to the mixture if you prefer it to be sweeter.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Fresh vs. Frozen Berries: We tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen berries. We found that frozen blackberries can be used in place of fresh. However, if you decide to do so, please reduce the almond milk to 1 ⅔ cup due to the extra moisture in the frozen berries.
  • Make it vegan*: This is a gluten-free and dairy-free recipe. However, if you also want it to be vegan, you can substitute the eggs with “flax eggs.” To make flax eggs, mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds with 5 tablespoons of water, stirring to combine. Set aside for 10 minutes, then use it in place of the eggs.
  • Make Ahead: You can bake this baked oatmeal in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container. You can reheat it in the oven at 325 degrees F for 15 minutes or microwave it (in 30-second increments) until warmed through.
  • Storage: It is best to bring leftovers to room temperature before storing them in an airtight container. We recommend storing them in individual portions so you can easily reheat (if preferred) and grab and go. If stored properly in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 230mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away. Hummus Ingredients A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the...

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, grilled lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is hummus?

Hummus originated in the Middle East, but many countries have welcomed and adapted it to their own. Such variations include Israeli, Lebanese, Palestine, Egyptian, and Greek hummus.

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 13
Baharat Spice Mix https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/ https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/#respond Mon, 04 Sep 2023 12:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70184 What is Baharat? Baharat is an aromatic blend of spices originating in Arabic regions and is now widespread across the Middle East and North Africa. While the word baharat directly translates to “spice” in Arabic, it has come to refer to a unique mix of seven ingredients.  This smoky, warm mixture typically includes a basic mix of 7 spices; Coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cloves, cardamom, and paprika, which is...

The post Baharat Spice Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baharat?

Baharat is an aromatic blend of spices originating in Arabic regions and is now widespread across the Middle East and North Africa. While the word baharat directly translates to “spice” in Arabic, it has come to refer to a unique mix of seven ingredients. 

Baharat spice mix in a jar with a spoon in it.

This smoky, warm mixture typically includes a basic mix of 7 spices; Coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cloves, cardamom, and paprika, which is why it is also referred to as “Middle Eastern 7 Spice.” With that being said, depending on the region, this spice blend may contain a few extra spices. 

A quintessential ingredient for Middle Eastern cuisine, cooks use this versatile blend in many different ways, including a dry rub for meat dishes, a seasoning for rice recipes, an addition to soups, and a topping for roasted vegetables.

Middle Eastern 7 spice blend, baharat, spices on a plate.

What Spices are in Baharat?

For this full-bodied baharat spice recipe, I include a typical blend of aromatic spices. However, I decided to use ground spices to simplify the process for those who don’t have a spice grinder or are simply looking for easier meal prep. 

Though ground spices will work wonderfully, you may also use whole spices to give your blend a heartier, more robust flavor profile.

  • Ground coriander 
  • Ground cumin
  • Ground black pepper
  • Ground nutmeg
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Ground cloves
  • Ground cardamom
Ground spices for baharat spice mix on a plate with text on each spice.

Optional Add-Ins

Though the basic ingredients of this Arabic spice mix rarely change, additional (often lesser-known) components may vary from region to region. Below, you’ll find iconic add-ins from across African and Middle Eastern cooking that will give your baharat spice blend recipe herbaceous, piquant, and sweet undertones.

  • In Turkey: For a lighter, earthier Middle Eastern spice mix, I recommend adding herbs like dried mint and oregano. This authentic Turkish blend adds delectably herbal notes that will balance the warmer taste of the other seven spices. And if you are a fan of spicy flavors, you can also add a pinch of Aleppo pepper into the mix.
  • In Palestine: Palestinian bharat spice is a spicier take on the original mix, adding paprika or dried chili peppers. You may also use smoked paprika for a touch of heat should you prefer a richer, smokier profile.
  • North Africa: One of the sweetest variations of the classic recipe, North African cuisine and Egyptian spice blends often include dried rosebuds for a floral, fragrant finish.

How to Make Baharat Spice at Home?

Few spice mixes are as simple and flavorful as this baharat seasoning recipe. You only need five minutes and two steps to prepare a mouthwatering blend that’s perfect for all your meals.

Baharat spice blend mixed in a plate with a spoon on the side.

If you are using ground spices, simply mix them in a jar and use it right away.

If you prefer to take this basic ground spice recipe to the next level by using whole, toasted coriander and cumin, then follow the steps below:

To Toast Whole Seeds:

Steps showing how to make baharat spice using a spice grinder.
  1. Heat the pan: Heat a dry skillet over medium heat.
  2. Toast the seeds: Add one teaspoon of whole coriander seeds and one teaspoon of whole cumin seeds to the skillet. Shake or stir the seeds for 2-3 minutes until they release their aroma. 
  3. Remove from heat: Once toasted, remove the seeds and let them cool for five minutes. 
  4. Grind the spices: Grind the now-cool seeds in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle until ground to a fine powder.

To Assemble the Baharat Mix: 

  1. Mix the ingredients: In a small bowl, add the ground coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, cloves, and cardamom. Whisk the spices until thoroughly combined.
  2. Store: Place the baharat spice mix in an airtight container and store it in a cool, dry place until ready to use.

Uses for Baharat Spice Blend

It’s no wonder why baharat spice is one of the most prominent mixes in Turkish cuisine. This versatile, fragrant blend is workable in nearly any savory Turkish recipe, and you can use it as both a cooking spice and a finishing spice—perfect for the Middle Eastern multi-tasker. 

  • Meat rub and kabobs: Effortlessly elevate all your lamb, chicken, seafood, and beef dishes by adding this aromatic Arabic seasoning to your meat, either before or after cooking. This simple seven-spice mix transforms iconic Middle Eastern dishes—like Turkish Kofte, Shish Taouk, and Baked Chicken Kabobs—into five-star meals, and it also works as a delectable finishing spice for other simple weeknight meals, like Chicken Pita Wraps.
  • Soups and stews: If you are looking for the perfect soup seasoning, you have found it. This Middle Eastern seasoning adds immediate depth and complexity to dozens of tasty recipes. Add a tablespoon to iconic dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Slow Cooker Chicken Stew, and Red Lentil Soup, and your mouth will be watering before your first spoonful.
  • Roasted vegetables: There’s no reason why veggies have to be bland. Sprinkle a bit of this baharat spice over your favorite roasted vegetable recipes—like my Whole Roasted Carrots, Roasted Portobello Mushrooms, and Roasted Eggplants—and every bite will burst with smoky, warm flavors.
  • Sauces and marinades: Want to add a touch of savory-sweet flavor to your favorite sauces? Add this Arabic 7 spice to Garlic Butter Sauce for an all-purpose pasta, bread, fish, and steak blend. Or, if you want to prep protein-packed, savory dishes, you can also mix baharat seasoning into delectable marinade recipes like Yogurt Chicken Marinade and Shrimp Marinade. If you want an even simpler way to use it, make a quick marinade by mixing 1 teaspoon of this mixture with ¼ cup olive oil and 2 tablespoons of lemon juice.
  • Eggs: Top your eggs with this seasoning for a quick, easy, and super flavorful breakfast you can make in minutes.

Storage Tips

The key to ensuring your baharat seasoning remains as robust and flavorful as possible is to store it in an airtight container (such as a glass jar) in a dark place, like a closed pantry. When stored properly, your mixture should remain fresh for up to one year.

Expert Tips

If you want to make a Middle Eastern spice blend that rivals that of Middle Eastern chefs, this master guide is just what you need. Get maximum, balanced flavor from your spices with these pro tips.

  • Start with whole spices if you can: If you’re serious about making your own spice blend, I highly recommend beginning with whole spices and grinding them at home. This process will ensure your spices are as fresh and fragrant as possible, resulting in a rich mix of delicious ingredients. To enhance your spice game, I also suggest investing in a spice grinder (affiliate link) with a removable bowl, as it’s easy to wash and even easier to use.
  • Get fresh, good-quality spices: You must use fresh, high-quality spices to make this seven-spice blend. Fresh spices have a more potent flavor, resulting in a robust, fully flavored mix that will last longer.
  • Take your time to toast spices: If you have time, I suggest toasting your spices before adding them to your mix. The toasting process helps the spices release their oils, producing a more fragrant, robust flavor.
  • Adjust the recipe as needed: Feel free to adjust the spices in your baharat recipe according to your tastebuds and your unique recipe. If you make changes, I recommend writing them down so that making your own version of this baharat blend is easier in the future.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally, you’ll only need between one teaspoon and one tablespoon of baharat spice per recipe. However, if you need a larger amount of this spice blend to accommodate a bigger crowd, you may multiply the recipe as needed.
  • Shake the container before using: To help distribute the spices in the mix, shake your storage container before adding the blend to your recipes. This movement will help redistribute spices that have settled in the mixture, giving you a balanced flavor in every teaspoon.

FAQs

Want to be an expert on this gourmet seasoning mixture? This FAQ will answer all your questions, from baharat vs. garam masala to tasty recipe substitutes.

What is a good substitute for baharat?

Mediterranean Seasoning makes an excellent baharat substitute with a similar profile of warm, earthy undertones. To make a comparable spice recipe with pantry-ready ingredients, mix one-part ground cumin with one-part ground coriander, one-part ground black peppercorns, and one-part cinnamon.

What is the difference between Bharat and garam masala?

Garam masala and baharat both offer a warm, savory-sweet flavor profile. However, garam masala primarily appears as a finishing seasoning in Indian dishes with a more intense spiciness and aromatic flavor. Meanwhile, baharat is milder, with slightly sweet, savory overtones and only a bit of heat. Baharat is also more commonly used throughout cooking, such as when rubbing meat dishes before roasting.

What is the difference between ras el hanout vs. baharat?

Though both use similar spice blends, ras el hanout is a Moroccan mixture that creates a warm flavor profile with additional ingredients, including allspice berries, turmeric, cardamom pods, and ground ginger. Traditionally, ras el hanout appears in couscous, soups, and braises. By contrast, baharat uses fewer spices and is often used to season meats, stews, and roasted vegetables to add flavor like other cooking spices.

Other Seasoning Blends You Might Also Like

Is your spice cabinet full of spices? Try these other spice blends to add flavor to your food in a quick, easy, and inexpensive way:

If you try this Baharat Spice Mix recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baharat spices mixed in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Baharat Spice Mix Recipe

Put your spice cabinet to good use and make your own baharat spice mix with this quick and easy recipe. A staple in Middle Eastern cooking, this is the perfect blend of smoky, sweet, and tangy spice mixture that will help you enhance your savory dishes with the authentic flavors of the region.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoons
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground cumin
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground coriander
  • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper
  • 2 teaspoons ground nutmeg
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon ground cloves
  • 1 teaspoon ground cardamom

Optional add-in:

  • 2 teaspoons ground smoked paprika

Instructions

  • In a bowl or a jar, add the ground cumin, coriander, black pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, cloves, and cardamom. Whisk to combine.
  • Place in an airtight container and store in a cool, dry area.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 tablespoons of baharat. If you need more, you can multiply the recipe.
  • Storage: Keep it in a jar with a tight-fitted lid and store it in the pantry. When stored properly, it should last for up to 1 year.
  • Toasting & grinding whole spices: To get a full aromatic taste, try using whole coriander and cumin that has been toasted and ground. 
    • Toast: Use 1 teaspoon of whole coriander seeds and 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds (each spice will yield 1 ¼ teaspoon of ground.) Heat a dry skillet over medium heat. Add the whole coriander and cumin to the pan, shaking or stirring for approximately 2-3 minutes until their aroma is released. Remove from the heat and cool for 5 minutes. 
    • Grind and mix: Once cooled, grind in a spice grinder or in a mortar and pestle until fine. Mix with the rest of the spices.
  • Shake the container before using it to help distribute spices in the mix.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 512IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baharat Spice Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/feed/ 0
1905 Salad https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/#comments Thu, 31 Aug 2023 19:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70366 Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm. What is 1905 Salad? The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in...

The post 1905 Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm.

Columbia restaurant salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

What is 1905 Salad?

The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in the heart of the Ybor City neighborhood of the Tampa Bay area in Florida. He was working late at the restaurant one night and used some leftovers in the fridge to create what the restaurant now serves tableside (with some minor adjustments made to the original).

Contrary to its name, it was actually created in the 1940s and was later adapted by Columbia and added to the menu in the 1970s as an answer to the salad bar. The name of the salad, ‘1905’, was created to celebrate the year the restaurant was founded as Florida’s oldest restaurant.

Since then, the unique flavors of the 1905 salad have been considered a culinary representation of the Cuban and Spanish heritage of Ybor City and the Tampa Bay area. Because of its Cuban/Spanish origin, the salad goes by many names, including the 1905 Columbia Salad, Cuban 1905 Salad, Florida Salad, Tampa Salad, or Tony Salad.

Ingredients

The beauty of the 1905 Columbia salad recipe is that it relies on simple, yet delicious, ingredients. Yet there are details in both the dressing and salad that are important to point out. I highly recommend sticking to the below ingredients to make the original 1905 Columbia salad recipe, but I also offer plenty of substitutions to give it your own unique flavor.

Columbia Restaurant Salad Dressing

This Columbia 1905 salad dressing has become so popular over the years, that it is now sold as a salad dressing in grocery stores like Publix and even online stores like Amazon. While you can always buy a bottle, making it at home is so easy. Here’s what you will need:

1905 salad dressing recipe ingredients with text on the image.
  • Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves will provide the best flavor. In this case, I would not substitute it with garlic powder.
  • Dried Oregano: I used dried oregano, but you can use 1 sprig of fresh oregano for a stronger, floral flavor.
  • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret ingredient that gives the salad dressing that special umami flavor. Pick up a bottle of the popular Lea and Perrins Worcestershire Sauce (affiliate link) for authentic flavor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: The original recipe calls for extra-virgin Spanish olive oil, but you can use whichever olive oil you have on hand.
  • White Wine Vinegar: White wine vinegar provides a nice bit of acidity.
  • Fresh Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice, which would be the juice of about 1 lemon.
  • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper

Salad Ingredients

  • Iceberg Lettuce: We need 7-8 cups of crisp lettuce, which you can get from about one large head of iceberg lettuce. The key is to slice, rinse, and then dry it really well. If you have a salad spinner, this is the time to use it.
  • Tomatoes: Ripe, juicy tomatoes are key, but any kind will do. My favorites are heirloom, beefsteak, tomatoes on the vine, cherry, or Roma tomatoes.
  • Ham Slices: We need about 4-5 slices of deli ham. Slice them into thin, julienne slices (matchstick strips) when you get home.
  • Swiss Cheese: The same goes for the Swiss cheese. We need about 5 slices, also sliced into julienne.
  • Green Olives: Use pitted green olives, roughly chopped, or even pimento-stuffed green Spanish olives if you want to take it up a notch.
  • Pecorino Romano: The original recipe uses Romano cheese, which is Pecorino Romano sold here in the United States. Pick up a box of finely grated cheese or grate a whole block at home.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

While I highly recommend sticking to the original 1905 salad recipe, I wanted to make sure I provided you with a few substitutions and optional additions. 

  • Salad Greens: A good substitute for iceberg lettuce would be romaine lettuce. Just be sure to slice it as thinly as you can.
  • Celery Stalks: Add some thinly sliced celery stalks for extra crunch.
  • Black Olives: Swap out the green olives for milder black olives instead.
  • Ham Substitutions: If you are not a fan of ham, you can use thinly sliced, deli-style chicken, turkey breast, salami, or pepperoni, or try some Grilled Shrimp instead.
  • Cheese: If you don’t have Pecorino Romano, finely grated Parmesan cheese will also work.
  • Croutons: Whether store-bought or Homemade Croutons, add a handful to the top for some extra crunch.
  • Hard-Boiled Eggs: Slice or dice some hard-boiled eggs for extra protein.
  • Onion: Toss in some thinly sliced red onion or green onions for an extra savory bite.
  • Make it Vegetarian: Omit the ham and use some Baked Tofu instead, or simply add more Swiss and green olives to compensate for the lack of meaty flavor.

How to Make 1905 Salad Recipe?

The recipe for the 1905 salad follows the same basic steps as any other salad: First, whip up the salad dressing, prepare the salad ingredients, and then toss them all together. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make Columbia restaurant salad recipe.
  1. Make the 1905 Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce. Slowly add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper, while still whisking until smooth.
  2. Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine lettuce, tomatoes, ham, Swiss cheese, and green olives.
  3. Toss: Toss salad ingredients with the dressing. Sprinkle with Romano cheese, taste for seasoning, and add more, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

The Columbia Salad can be made ahead and even stored for later if done properly. Here are my best storage tips:

  • Make Ahead: Columbia restaurant actually recommends making the dressing 1-2 days in advance, but I find it lasts up to 3 days if stored in an airtight container or mason jar in the refrigerator.
  • Storage: The dressed salad will only keep fresh for 1 day. Please be aware that as it sits, it releases all of its juices. If you plan to store the salad for longer or know you will have leftovers, refrain from tossing the salad with the dressing until the day you are going to serve. Store the prepared salad ingredients in a large airtight container with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture for 2-3 days.

What to Serve With the 1905 Salad?

This is a hearty salad all on its own, so it can be served simply with bread and butter. The Columbia Restaurant serves it with a Cuban sandwich from the menu. Here at home, I love to serve it as a side salad with any of the following:

1905 Columbia salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips

  • Authentic flavors: The reason this salad became so famous is because it is so well-balanced. I highly recommend sticking to the original recipe to bring out all those Spanish flavors. This may mean a quick trip to the store, but I promise it is worth it.
  • Take your time when making the dressing: It’s interesting to note, that The Columbia restaurant actually adds the Worcestershire sauce and lemon juice at the end so that you can taste more of the savory, bright components. But I find the ingredients marry together well when mixed into one. The key is to emulsify the dressing so that the olive oil is mixed well with the Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and lemon juice. To do so, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and give it one more good whisk just before tossing.
  • Assembly: The salad at the Columbia restaurant is prepared tableside for all guests who order it. If you really want to stick to history, serve this salad tableside for all your family members and friends, and for extra flair.
  • Salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss, salty green olives, and grated cheese. Be sure to taste test once you mix the dressing with the salad. The exact measurements will be based on your personal preference.
  • Mix at the last minute: Drizzle with the dressing just before serving to keep the iceberg lettuce crisp and crunchy and the rest of the ingredients fresh.
  • Presentation: Each ingredient brings its own color, taste, and texture, so have fun with the presentation, especially if serving this salad to a crowd. For extra bonus points, serve in a chilled salad bowl to keep it super cold.

FAQs

Why is it called 1905 salad?

Although the 1905 salad was technically invented in the 1940s, it is named after the year the Columbia restaurant was founded.

Who invented the 1905 salad?

The 1905 salad was invented by waiter Tony Noriega, who pulled leftovers from the fridge one night after work to create this famous salad.

How many calories are in a 1905 Columbia Salad?

One serving of the 1905 Columbia Salad is 306 calories. This will vary based on the amount of Romano cheese you add at the end.

Other Meal-Worthy Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this 1905 Salad recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

1905 Salad from Columbia restaurant in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

1905 Salad Recipe

Be a part of the viral sensation and make the famous 1905 salad right at home! Made with the iconic Columbia Restaurant’s garlic salad dressing, sweet ham, and creamy cheese, it is an easy salad you can make in 15 minutes.
Course Salad
Cuisine Cuban
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire Sauce
  • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 1 head iceberg lettuce sliced and rinsed (~7-8 cups)
  • 1 large ripe tomato sliced
  • ½ cup ham slices* julienned – about ¼ lb or 5 slices of ham
  • ½ cup Swiss cheese julienned – 5-6 slices
  • ½ cup green olives pitted and chopped
  • ¼ cup Pecorino Romano grated or grated Parmesan cheese

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, whisk garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce in a bowl. Gradually add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble the Columbia restaurant salad, place iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, julienned ham and Swiss cheese, and green olives in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Give it a toss until combined. Sprinkle it with Romano cheese.
  • Taste for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields a large bowl of salad (about 7-8 cups), which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish.
  • Ham: The original recipe uses baked ham. If you have some on hand, go ahead and use it. Otherwise, deli-style ham slices are a good substitution. You can also use deli-style chicken/turkey breast or even shrimp.
  • A word on salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss cheese, salty green olives, and Romano cheese. Be sure to give it a taste right after mixing it and adjust it according to your taste buds.
  • Store: This salad is best on the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for one day. Please be aware that it gets watery as it sits, so it is best to give it a good mix before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 857IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 1mg

The post 1905 Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/feed/ 2
Labor Day Food Ideas https://foolproofliving.com/labor-day-food-ideas/ https://foolproofliving.com/labor-day-food-ideas/#respond Mon, 28 Aug 2023 22:56:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70245 Other Recipe Round-Ups You Might Also Like:

The post Labor Day Food Ideas appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
A collage of Labor day food recipes with text on the image.

Labor Day Cookout Ideas (BBQ Recipes)

The sky’s the limit when it comes to delicious Labor Day cookout ideas. This mouthwatering collection will fill your grill with incomparably savory, juicy Labor Day mals, from succulent chicken kebabs to juicy avocado burgers. You can bring your tastiest Labor Day BBQ ideas to life with just a few minutes on the grates.

Labor Day Dinner Ideas (No Grill Needed)

No grill, no problem! We have got you covered with Labor Day dinners that are not only filling and flavorful but also easily adaptable to your cooking method of choice. From oven-baked meals to air fryer favorites and stove-top dishes, you are sure to impress with the ultimate Labor Day menu with these easy mains.

Labor Day Picnic Food and Cookout Side Dishes

Here is a list of Labor Day picnic ideas that can also be served as side dishes for all your main dishes. We have all your favorites, from spiced deviled eggs to creamy, summer-ready dips. While any of my summer salads would also work, here are some hand-picked recipes to fill your menu, whether you’re looking for a hearty pasta salad or a light snack. 

Drinks For Your Labor Day Menu

No end-of-summer cookout is complete without the refreshing drinks that come with it! These fan-favorite recipes include everything from zesty lemonades to sweet pina coladas, and you can make them all with just a handful of fresh ingredients. No traditional Labor Day meal is complete without these light, cool beverages.

Labor Day Desserts

If you want to put the cherry on top of your Labor Day Weekend menu, you’ll need a tasty treat to round off your menu. These sweet dishes will satisfy everyone’s sweet tooth, whether they’re craving juicy, ripe blueberries or rich chocolate.

Other Recipe Round-Ups You Might Also Like:

A collage of photos with Labor Day weekend food ideas with text on the image.
Print

Labor Day Food Ideas – Mexican Corn Macaroni Salad

If you are trying to figure out what to make for your Labor Day Cookout party, you have come to the right place! This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is one of the many. Be sure to check out our list of over 50 grilling recipes, picnic and potluck meals, side dishes, dinners, drinks, and desserts all in one place!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears of corn kernels cut from cubs – Approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. of dry pasta I used cellentani, but fusilli and farfalle (bow tie) would also work.

For The Mexican Corn Dressing:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed (from 1 ½ to 2 limes)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Mexican Corn Salad:

  • 2 medium-size jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

For The Grilled/Roasted Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe:

  • To prep the corn: Fold the husk of each corn back leaf by leaf and tie them with kitchen twine. Lightly brush corn on the cub with oil.
  • Heat a grill pan or an outdoor grill. Grill corn, turning occasionally until it is charred in spots. Keep an eye on it as this happens rather quickly.
  • Cut the corn off the cob and place the corn in a large bowl. Set aside to cool.
  • While the corn is cooling, cook the pasta following the instructions on the package. Once cooked, drain and transfer to a bowl. Add in the roasted corn.
  • To make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): Mix together mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • To assemble the Roasted Corn Pasta Salad: Pour the chili lime corn dressing over the corn. Add in jalapeno, onion, and cilantro. Give it a gentle toss. Make sure that the dressing is distributed equally throughout the salad. 
  • Transfer the pasta salad to a salad plate and top it off with cotija cheese and garnish with cilantro.

For The Skillet-Roasted Mexican Street Corn Salad Recipe:

  • To prep the corn: Cut the corn off the cob. I used 6 ears to get about 4 ½ to 5 cups. Alternatively, you can also use canned corn or frozen corn. If using frozen, you do not need to thaw it out.
  • Heat oil in a skillet over medium-high heat. Stir in the corn, and stirring frequently, sauté for 5-7 minutes until it starts to get (lightly) charred. If you are using frozen corn, you might need to cook a few minutes longer. Transfer to a bowl and set aside.
  • While the corn is cooling, cook the pasta following the instructions on the package. Once cooked, drain and transfer it to the bowl with the sauteed corn.
  • To make the Chili Lime Dressing: Mix together mayonnaise, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl.
  • To assemble the Mexican Corn Pasta Salad: Pour the chili-lime dressing over the corn. Add in jalapeno, onion, and cilantro. Give it a gentle toss. Make sure that the dressing is distributed equally throughout the salad.
  • Transfer the pasta salad to a salad plate and top it off with cotija cheese and garnish with cilantro.

Video

Notes

  • This pasta salad can be served warm or cold. 
  • Make Ahead: This pasta salad can be made a day in advance. Store it in the fridge after it comes to room temperature in an airtight container. 
  • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Labor Day Food Ideas appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/labor-day-food-ideas/feed/ 0
20+ Easy Eggplant Recipes https://foolproofliving.com/easy-eggplant-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-eggplant-recipes/#comments Wed, 23 Aug 2023 14:59:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70047 If you love quick, simple recipes that pack irresistible flavor in every bite, this list of eggplant dishes will fill your cookbook with effortless menu ideas. Plus, if you’re new to cooking eggplant, I’ve also included guides to help you every step of the way, whether you’re learning How to Cut Eggplant or How to Salt Eggplant. You can even find out how to choose the perfect eggplant for your...

The post 20+ Easy Eggplant Recipes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you love quick, simple recipes that pack irresistible flavor in every bite, this list of eggplant dishes will fill your cookbook with effortless menu ideas. Plus, if you’re new to cooking eggplant, I’ve also included guides to help you every step of the way, whether you’re learning How to Cut Eggplant or How to Salt Eggplant. You can even find out how to choose the perfect eggplant for your recipe with my expert manual on different Types of Eggplants.

A photo of variety of eggplants with text on the image.

Simple Eggplant Recipes

It’s no secret why eggplant is one of my favorite vegetables. Simple, quick, and utterly delicious, these simple recipes for eggplant will show you different ways to cook eggplant that will astound you with their rich taste and hassle-free prep. You’ll find several of the most delectable cooking methods below, from sautéed eggplant to roasted, air-fried, and more.

Eggplant Dinner Recipes

Filling, flavorful, and endlessly versatile, these fresh eggplant main dish recipes take the stress out of weeknight meal prep. This simple list includes all my five-star favorites, from Mediterranean eggplant recipes to rich pasta entrees and hearty stews. You’ll never run out of things to make with eggplant with these top-notch menu ideas—even on your busiest weekdays.

Vegetarian Eggplant Recipes

It doesn’t matter whether you have a dietary restriction or want to pack more nutrition into your everyday meals. These vegetarian eggplant dishes use healthy, natural ingredients to load your table with luscious mains, first-rate sides, and iconic appetizers. Have a picky eater at home? Don’t worry! My foolproof collection has eggplant recipes for kids, adults, eggplant connoisseurs, and everyone in between.

FAQs

Making recipes with eggplant is an easy way to ensure tasty, wholesome eats no matter your cooking level. If you have more questions about cooking eggplant, this easy FAQ will make meal prep a snap.

What to do with overripe eggplant?

If you have overripe eggplants in your pantry, keep in mind that there’s a possibility that they may be bitter, as eggplants tend to develop more phenolic compounds the longer they sit. To avoid unwanted bitterness, it’s best to use fresh eggplants as soon as possible. However, you may try roasting overripe eggplant for dip recipes since the roasting and caramelization process will eliminate some of the undesirable flavors.

Why do you soak the eggplant in water before cooking?

Soaking eggplants helps reduce their bitterness and prevent browning. Though not strictly necessary, this step is important when purchasing eggplants out of season or if you plan to salt your eggplants.

How to make eggplant taste good?

Because eggplants taste very mild, adding a good amount of salt will help bring out their natural flavors and reduce bitterness. Therefore, it’s a good rule of thumb to be generous with your seasoning, depending on your recipe. You may also try roasting your eggplant to give it delectably caramelized undertones.

Baked Eggplant Slices on a plate from top view
Print

20+ Easy Eggplant Recipes

This Roasted Eggplant recipe is one of the most popular of our easy eggplant recipes. Using this simple method you can create countless eggplant meals, most of which are included in this round up.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 1 eggplant
Calories 486kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 medium-sized eggplant* (~ 1 lb) – I used globe eggplants
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt + more if you are brining
  • 1/4 teaspoon Black pepper
  • 2 teaspoon fresh parsley chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Start by rinsing eggplants under cold water. Using a kitchen towel or paper towels, dry each eggplant thoroughly. Cut off the stem and if preferred peel them. Though it is optional as eggplant skin is edible and it would be perfectly fine if you didn’t peel it.
  • Depending on the recipe you are using, you can cut it in rounds (also called discs) or lengthwise (also known as steaks). Either way, slice eggplants ½ inch thick.
  • Arrange slices on the prepared baking sheet in a single layer.
  • Brush them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Turn each slice and repeat the same process to make sure both sides are coated with olive oil and seasoned with salt and pepper.
  • Roast in the preheated oven for 15 minutes and then flip and roast for another 10-15 minutes or until they turn lightly golden and softened.
  • Sprinkle with fresh herbs, if using. Serve immediately or use in your favorite eggplant recipes.

Notes

  • The calorie information listed below is for the whole eggplant brushed with 3 tablespoons of olive oil. A large eggplant (~ 1 pound) yields 8-10 slices of eggplant rounds depending on the size of the eggplant.
  • A quick note on salting eggplant prior to roasting: If you are buying your eggplants from a major supermarket, salting eggplant slices prior to baking is not necessary. Thanks to the advancements made in eggplant farming, farmers have bred out much of eggplants’ signature bitterness. However, if you prefer purging your eggplant slices before roasting, you can read more about it in this How To Salt Eggplant post.
  • Store: Once cooked, let your roasted eggplant reach room temperature. Then, place the eggplant in an airtight container for up to 3 days. However, be aware that as it sits in the fridge it will get watery, so it is best to drain the liquid before serving.
  • To freeze: It is best to store the leftovers either in a freezer bag or an airtight container for freezing. Simply, separate each layer of eggplant with wax paper to keep them from fusing. They will stay good in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • To thaw: A day before you are getting ready to serve, thaw in the fridge overnight. Gently remove the wax paper in between the slices and warm the slices in a low-heat (300 F degree) oven for 5-8 minutes or until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 486kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 31g | Sodium: 1173mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

The post 20+ Easy Eggplant Recipes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-eggplant-recipes/feed/ 4
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste. If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally...

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/#comments Sun, 20 Aug 2023 20:28:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=408 As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies. Ingredients While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:...

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted eggplant red pepper spread in a bowl.

Ingredients

While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:

  • Eggplant: Eggplant Types vary, but I used the easy-to-find globe eggplants for this recipe. If you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, you can use them as well. Since we are roasting the eggplant in the oven pre salting the eggplant is not necessary here. However, it is important to cut eggplant into equal-sized cubes to ensure even roasting.
  • Bell Pepper: I like the sweeter red bell peppers, but you can use any color, such as yellow or orange.
  • Red Onion: All you have to do is peel and cut the onion into big chunks.
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Olive Oil
  • Seasoning: This includes Kosher salt, black pepper, and a touch of (optional) cayenne pepper for some kick.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice for the best flavor.
  • Tahini: Go for a high-quality, runny tahini, such as Soom (affiliate link.) The flavor makes all the difference.
  • Herbs: I love fresh chopped parsley here, but you can also add fresh mint to enhance those Mediterranean flavors. Fresh basil leaves as a garnish are a nice addition, too.
  • Pita Bread: Whether you prefer to toast fresh pita bread triangles or enjoy it with store-bought pita chips, this red pepper eggplant dip will be delicious either way.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Tomato Paste: The original recipe from the Barefoot Contessa cookbook contains tomato paste. While I did not include it here, you can add 1 Tablespoon of tomato paste for a richer flavor.
  • Extra Seasoning: Give it a smoky eggplant dip flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or an herbal kick with 1 teaspoon dried oregano.

How to Make Eggplant Spread

This Ina Garten eggplant spread recipe is a cinch to make, with most of the work done by the oven and the food processor. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare the vegetables: Spread the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic onto the baking sheet. 
  3. Season the veggies: Toss with olive oil, salt, pepper, and cayenne, if using.
  4. Roast vegetables: Bake for 35-40 minutes, tossing halfway through. Allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  5. Make spread: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade, add the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons parsley. Pulse 4-5 times until the mixture resembles a coarse puree. 
  6. Taste: Taste for seasoning and add more salt and lemon juice, if necessary. 
  7. Serve: Transfer to a serving bowl. Top with the remaining parsley. Serve immediately with pita bread, crackers, or veggies on the side.

Serving Suggestions

This recipe for roasted eggplant dip is so versatile and can be served in a number of creative ways. Think outside the box and try:

  • Appetizer / Snack: Serve it as a fun and pleasing appetizer or snack with fresh pita triangles, pita chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables.
  • Mezze Plate: Make it a part of a full-on mezze plate, alongside Muhammara and Mediterranean Hummus.
  • Sandwich Spread: Eggplant dip for bread will be your new favorite sandwich addition. Spread it on crusty No Knead Olive Bread or Artisan Bread.
  • Side Dish: Serve it as a delicious side dish to grilled seafood, like Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Grilled Mahi Mahi, grilled lamb, or classic Mediterranean Lemon Chicken.
  • Pizza / Pasta: Think of it more as an eggplant paste recipe to spread on pizza dough or stir into pasta.

How to Store

This Barefoot Contessa roasted eggplant dip recipe actually gets better the longer it sits, as the flavors have a chance to marry together. You can either:

  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this eggplant red pepper dip is an easy one, here are a few tips to help you achieve perfect results on your first try: 

  • Cut the vegetables into the same size pieces: This ensures the vegetables will be done at the same time.
  • Single layer: Be sure to spread the veggies on a single layer to ensure even baking. If they don’t fit in one baking sheet, you can spread them on two separate sheets.
  • Pay attention to the cooking time: We want the vegetables to be tender and slightly caramelized. Overcooking can lead to a bitter flavor.
  • Do not over-process: We want a chunky spread, not a puree. Pulse just a few times in the food processor.
  • Make a double batch: Use two sheet pans and double the recipe. It’s a wonderful dip to have on hand when hosting a party.

FAQs

Should eggplant be peeled before roasting?

Although eggplant skin can impart a bitter flavor, it is not necessary to peel eggplant before roasting.

How do you prepare eggplant before cooking?

Eggplant preparation depends on the dish you are making it for. In this roasted eggplant dip, all we have to do is cut it into 1-inch cubes and let the oven do the rest of the work for us.

More Delicious Dips and Spreads You Might Like:

If you are like us, a fan of serving dips and spreads while entertaining, you might also enjoy the recipes below:

If you try Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Barefoot Contessa's Eggplant spread in a bowl
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread Recipe

Barefoot Contessa’s roasted eggplant spread is an easy appetizer that you can serve with pita bread, crackers, or raw vegetables.
Course Appetizer, Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized eggplants with skin on and cut into small cubes (~1 pound each)
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and cut into smaller pieces
  • 1 red onion peeled and chopped into big chunks
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled – no need to mince
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional
  • 5 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita bread for serving

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic on the baking sheet.
  • Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and cayenne. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Roast vegetables for 35-40 minutes, making sure to give it a toss halfway through the baking. Let them cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons of parsley in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 4-5 times to blend. Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
  • Transfer to a bowl. Garnish with the rest of the Italian parsley. Serve immediately with pita wedges.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 cups of eggplant spread, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 6servings | Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 884mg | Potassium: 687mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1341IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/feed/ 16
Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts https://foolproofliving.com/mini-lemon-tarts/ https://foolproofliving.com/mini-lemon-tarts/#comments Thu, 17 Aug 2023 22:20:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19958 If you know me well, you know I love any ricotta or lemon recipe, like Almond Ricotta Cake or Almond Flour Lemon Cake. But today’s recipe, Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts, is one of those, ‘my friend is coming over, I have to whip something together quick’ sort of recipes. If you are looking for a large tart recipe including the tart crust and filling, be sure to check out Summer...

The post Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you know me well, you know I love any ricotta or lemon recipe, like Almond Ricotta Cake or Almond Flour Lemon Cake. But today’s recipe, Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts, is one of those, ‘my friend is coming over, I have to whip something together quick’ sort of recipes.

If you are looking for a large tart recipe including the tart crust and filling, be sure to check out Summer Berry Tart for all your warm weather gatherings.

Mini blueberry lemon tarts on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for these lemon blueberry tartlets is so short and sweet. The key is to have those little tartlets made from store-bought philo cups, but we will get to that in a bit. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:

  • Ricotta cheese: I use my Homemade Ricotta Cheese recipe, but any store-bought ricotta cheese will do.
  • Large eggs
  • Honey: Honey is a natural sweetener that really compliments the ricotta, lemon and blueberries. However, an equal amount of maple syrup would also work.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Lemon zest: Zest one large lemon or two small ones before slicing and juicing.
  • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide the best flavor.
  • Mini fillo cups: Look for mini phyllo cups (sometimes labeled mini phyllo shells) in major grocery stores or online. If you have a local Greek store nearby, they will be readily available there, too.
  • Blueberries: Fresh sweet blueberries are your best bet; just make sure to rinse and pat dry before adding to the tarts. For a jammy sort-of blueberry layer finish, you could also finish the lemon tarts with Blueberry Sauce.
  • Pomegranate seeds: Optional, but I find the pomegranate seeds add such a lovely color and tangy bite.

Optional Add-Ins / Variations

  • Fresh berries: Change up the blueberries to any of your favorite berries, like fresh raspberries, blackberries, or diced strawberries.
  • Almond extract: Compliment the delicate lemon flavor with ½ teaspoon almond extract added to the ricotta mix.
  • Whipped cream: Dollop each individual lemon tart with Maple Whipped Cream just before serving.
  • Garnish: If serving immediately, you can garnish with a sprig of fresh mint for extra elegance.

How to Make Blueberry Tarts

This is the sweeter side of ricotta, with a little honey and fresh blueberries to get us there. To make these lemon and blueberry mini tarts, follow these steps:

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Make ricotta filling: In a medium bowl, whisk together ricotta, eggs, honey, vanilla extract, lemon zest, lemon juice, and salt.
  3. Fill phyllo cups: Place the filo cups on the prepared pan, spacing them out about 1” apart. Fill each shell with about 1 Tablespoon ricotta mixture.
  4. Bake: Bake for 14-15 minutes, or until the filling is warm and the shells are a lightly golden brown.
  5. Garnish: Allow the tartlets to cool slightly. Finish with fresh blueberries and pomegranate seeds, if using.

How to Store

While these mini berry tarts are best enjoyed the day they are made, they can be stored and enjoyed later in the week.

For best results, store leftover mini blueberry tarts in an airtight container in the fridge for 2 days. Remove from the fridge 5 to 10 minutes before enjoying to take some of the chill off.

FAQs:

Why is my lemon tart runny?

Lemon tarts can be runny if the filling is too wet. To ensure the filling is not runny, thoroughly mix the ricotta before mixing with the rest of the ingredients and bake until the filling is puffed and set in the middle.

Should lemon tarts be refrigerated?

Individual lemon tarts can be made in advance and stored in an airtight container in the fridge. When ready to enjoy, remove from the refrigerator 5-10 minutes before enjoying to bring up to room temperature.

Can you freeze lemon tarts?

We do not recommend freezing the lemon tartlets as the phyllo cups become too soggy once frozen and thawed.

Other Blueberry Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Lemon blueberry mini tarts from the top view.
Print

Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts

Looking for an easy bite-sized dessert for a crowd? I’ve got you covered. These Mini Lemon Tarts are filled with ricotta-lemon filling and topped off with blueberries. They are so easy to make with only 8 ingredients and 10 minutes hands on time.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 24 mini tarts
Calories 43kcal

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup whole milk ricotta cheese
  • 3 large eggs
  • 2 tablespoons honey or maple syrup
  • ¾ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest from 1 large or 2 small lemons, freshly grated
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • Pinch of salt
  • 24 mini phyllo shells
  • 1 cup blueberries
  • A handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 F Degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set aside.
  • Whisk together ricotta cheese with eggs, honey, vanilla extract, lemon zest, lemon juice, and salt in a medium bowl.
  • Place the phylo cups on the prepared pan and fill each cup with 1 tablespoon filling.
  • Bake them until the filling is warm and the shells turn lightly golden brown, about 14-15 minutes.
  • Allow them to cool for a few minutes. Garnish with blueberries and pomegranate seeds (if using) and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 24 mini tarts. I usually serve 4 per person as a “finger dessert”, which makes it ideal for 6 servings. You can, however, multiply the recipe if you are serving a larger crowd.
  • Storage: Since it is so easy to put together, I highly recommend serving this recipe on the day that it is made. However, if you have leftovers you can store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 43kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 22mg | Potassium: 22mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 68IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post Mini Lemon Blueberry Tarts appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mini-lemon-tarts/feed/ 15
Curried Brown Rice https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/#comments Mon, 14 Aug 2023 21:47:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=673 Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe. Ingredients The ingredients for this curried rice...

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe.

Curried brown rice garnished with sunflower seeds and raisins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this curried rice with raisins are so simple and full of ingredients you probably already have hanging about in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Onion: You can use both yellow and white onion in this recipe. Be sure to chop it finely.
  • Bell pepper: Use more savory green bell pepper or sweeter yellow or red bell pepper.
  • Curry powder: My favorite store-bought curry powder is Simply Organic Curry Powder (affiliate link), which is what I use for many Indian rice recipes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Brown Basmati rice: Brown basmati rice is a long grain aromatic rice easy to find in the rice or global section of major grocery stores. My favorite brand is Pride of India (affiliate link.) If brown basmati rice is unavailable, brown jasmine rice is a great substitute.
  • Vegetable stock: Use Homemade Vegetable Stock, low sodium store-bought vegetable broth, or opt for Chicken Stock if not concerned about keeping it vegetarian.
  • Kosher salt
  • Raisins: Raisins provide a nice pop of sweetness, but the trick is to soak them beforehand (more on this below). If you can get your hands on sultanas or dried currants, either one would be a great substitute.
  • Sunflower seeds: Be sure to purchase unsalted sunflower seeds.
  • Citrus juice: This recipe can use fresh lemon juice or lime juice interchangeably.
  • Fresh herbs: Go for fresh parsley, fresh cilantro, or a mix of both to suit your taste.

Optional Add-Ins / Variations

  • Jalapenos: One small seeded and diced jalapeno can be added along with the bell pepper to add a nice spicy bite.
  • Homemade curry powder: If you don’t have curry powder on hand, make your own by mixing together 2 Tablespoons each ground coriander and ground cumin, 1.5 Tbsp ground turmeric, 2 teaspoons ginger, 1 tsp ground cinnamon, and ½ teaspoon each ground black pepper, ground cardamom, ground nutmeg, and cayenne pepper. Use 1 teaspoon for this recipe and store the rest in your spice cabinet.
  • Extra spices: Up the curry flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds.
  • Coconut milk: If you want to turn this dish into a coconut curried brown rice, replace 1 ¾ cups of the vegetable stock with one (13.5 ounces) can of coconut milk, and use 1 ¼ cups of vegetable stock to total 3 cups of liquid.
  • Craisins: Swap out the raisins for dried cranberries instead.
  • Nuts: Toasted slivered almonds or cashews are a great substitute for sunflower seeds.
  • Green peas: Add 1/2 cup frozen green peas while the rice is resting for some color and extra protein.

How to Make Curried Brown Rice?

If you have ever wondered how to spice up brown rice, this easy curry rice recipe will get you there. Here’s how to make it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make curry rice.
  1. Rinse rice: Place brown basmati rice in a colander and thoroughly rinse under cold water.
  2. Saute aromatics and curry powder: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a medium saucepan for about 1 minute. Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until vegetables have softened. Add garlic and saute for 1 minute.
  3. Toast rice: Pour in the rinsed basmati rice and fry rice gently, stirring constantly, for 7-8 minutes.
  4. Add the stock: Pour in the vegetable stock, cover, and bring to a boil. Once the rice has come to a boil, reduce the heat to low. 
A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Cook rice: Simmer for 45-55 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Turn off the heat and allow it to rest, with the lid on, for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Soak raisins: While the rice is cooking, place the raisins in a heat-proof small bowl and cover with hot boiling water. The raisins will plump up as the rice is cooking.
  3. Add mix-ins: After the rice has rested, fluff it with a fork. Drain the raisins and fold them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  4. Finish and serve: Drizzle with lemon or lime juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired. Finish with fresh parsley or cilantro and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat Leftovers?

Brown rice with curry powder is a wonderful make-ahead side dish and one that I make regularly in my kitchen. To meal prep and store for later, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prep on a Sunday or Monday evening to enjoy dinner throughout the week. Simply place it in meal prep containers with your choice of cooked meat and/or vegetables in individual portions.
  • Store: Place leftover rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. We do not recommend freezing.
  • Reheat: Place the rice on a microwave-safe plate, add a splash of water or broth, place a damp paper towel on top, and reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice curry is a delicious and hearty side dish that can be paired and enjoyed with a number of different meals. You could try serving it with:

Brown rice curry in a Dutch oven from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Rinse rice: Rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cold running water for about 1-2 minutes or until the water runs clear. This removes excess starch and ensures the rice does not become too sticky.
  • No need to soak: While it is customary to soak brown basmati rice for 30 minutes prior to cooking, we found the rice texture to be just as tender and pleasing without soaking beforehand.
  • Fry in oil: Toasting or ‘frying’ the rice in olive oil and curry spices helps to prevent the rice grains from clumping or sticking. It also evenly distributes the flavors onto the rice grains, making each bite as delicious as the next.
  • Use the right ratio of liquid to rice: We found the best ratio of liquid to brown basmati rice to be 2:1. If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments to the cooking time until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Increase curry spices: You can adjust the curry to your desired taste. Adding more may also change the color of the rice.
  • Do not stir: As soon as you add the vegetable stock to the pot, refrain from stirring, as this can cause the rice grains to break, resulting in a stickier product.
  • Allow the rice to rest: The key to fluffy rice is to allow the rice to rest once it is done cooking. Leave the lid on and steam the rice for 10-15 minutes to allow the moisture to distribute evenly.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more salt if needed.

FAQs

Can you add butter to brown rice?

Yes, butter can replace olive oil in just about all brown rice recipes. Heat and melt butter in the pan just as you would the olive oil.

What can I add to brown rice for taste?

A few aromatics, like onions, peppers, and garlic, along with warming spices, in this case, curry powder, add flavor, spice, and plenty of taste to brown rice.

Should I soak my brown rice before cooking?

Although it is usually recommended to soak brown rice before cooking, we simply rinsed the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cool running water for 1-2 minutes, and the rice came out perfectly.

Other Whole Grain Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Curried Brown Rice recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Freshly cooked Curried brown rice recipe on a plate.
Print

Curried Brown Rice Recipe

This Curried Brown Rice is an easy-to-make side dish that can be served along with any of your favorite meat, poultry, or vegetarian dishes. Packed with sweet, salty, and crunchy flavors, this brown rice recipe is sure to be a crowd-pleaser.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 medium yellow red or green bell pepper, seeded and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 ½ cups Brown Basmati Rice thoroughly rinsed
  • 3 cups vegetable stock or water
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ½ cup raisins
  • ½ cup raw sunflower seeds unsalted
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juce, add more to taste
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or cilantro, chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium size saucepan or Dutch oven, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat.
  • Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until softened.
  • Add the garlic and saute for one more minute.
  • Stir in the basmati rice and cook, stirring constantly, for 5-6 minutes.
  • Pour the vegetable stock in, put the lid on, and bring to a boil. As soon as it is boiled, turn the heat down to low, and let it simmer for 45-55 minutes* or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, place the raisin in a ramekin and pour some hot boiling water over it. Let it plump up while the rice is cooking.
  • When ready to serve, fluff the rice with a fork. Drain the raisins and stir them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  • Drizzle it with the lemon juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 to 5 cups of brown rice. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Rinsing the rice is important as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Any leftovers can be refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 881IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/feed/ 9
Grilled Turkey Tenderloin https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/#respond Thu, 10 Aug 2023 18:29:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69586 This grilled turkey tenderloin recipe isn’t the only irresistible turkey dish in my cookbook. My seven-ingredient Roasted Turkey Legs are a picture-perfect recipe for holidays and weeknight meals alike, while Ground Turkey Meatloaf gives classic beef meatloaf a lean yet rich edge. With these easy meal ideas, you’ll never wonder what to do with turkey again. Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilling Turkey Loins You only need two simple sets of...

The post Grilled Turkey Tenderloin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This grilled turkey tenderloin recipe isn’t the only irresistible turkey dish in my cookbook. My seven-ingredient Roasted Turkey Legs are a picture-perfect recipe for holidays and weeknight meals alike, while Ground Turkey Meatloaf gives classic beef meatloaf a lean yet rich edge. With these easy meal ideas, you’ll never wonder what to do with turkey again.

Grilled Turkey Tenderloin served with grilled corn and red onions on a platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilling Turkey Loins

You only need two simple sets of ingredients to grill the perfect turkey breast fillets: the meat and my easy turkey tenderloin marinade.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Marinade ingredients: 

  • Olive oil
  • Soy sauce
  • Lemon juice
  • Dijon mustard
  • Coconut sugar (or brown sugar): Adding coconut sugar to your turkey loin marinade is an easy way to give your meat a luscious caramelized flavor using natural sweetness. However, you may also use brown sugar depending on what you have in your pantry.
  • Onion powder
  • Paprika: Paprika does wonders for giving this recipe its mouthwateringly complex, peppery taste, but you may also use smoked paprika for a more robust smoky flavor.
  • Dried herbs: I recommend adding a light mix of dried thyme and dried sage (or dried oregano if preferred) to your marinade mixture. If you’d like your turkey tips to have extra earthy undertones, you may also use fresh versions of these ingredients. Just be sure to chop them finely before adding them in the marinade.
  • Black pepper
  • Fresh Garlic cloves: While we prefer fresh garlic, you can use garlic powder (2 teaspoons) if you prefer.

Turkey tenderloins: 

  • Turkey loins: I designed this recipe to accommodate two 9-ounce turkey tenderloins, though this cut of meat often comes in many different sizes. If your cuts are larger, you may multiply the recipe to accommodate their size. 

Seasoning Options

  • Sauce: My favorite way to make a sauce for turkey tenderloin is to reserve three tablespoons of the marinade before marinating the meat in it. Then once turkey tenderloins are grilled, all you have to do is to brush them with the reserved marinade for an appetizingly savory and saucy finish.
  • Rub: If you prefer to skip the marination process, dry your turkey with paper towels, brush it with olive oil, and season it with a turkey tenderloin rub before grilling. I recommend using my  Turkey Rub Recipe for an herbaceous and bold mixture that you can make in just five minutes.
  • Salt and pepper: While the saltiness in the recipe comes from soy sauce, you are more than welcome to finish it off with a pinch of kosher salt and black pepper before serving. 

How to Grill Turkey Tenderloin

Learning to cook turkey tenderloin on a gas grill is a breeze when you use my simple cooking method. These step-by-step instructions will have even beginner chefs cooking this rich, juicy turkey recipe in no time.

A collage of images showing how to marinade turkey tenderloins for grilling.
  1. Mix the marinade: In a measuring cup, whisk together the olive oil, soy sauce, lemon juice, Dijon mustard, sugar, onion powder, paprika, thyme, sage, black pepper, and garlic. Reserve three tablespoons of the mixture and set it aside.
  2. Prep the tenderloin for marination: Place tenderloins into a large resealable plastic bag or a bowl big enough to allow them to submerge fully in the marinade.
  3. Marinate turkey tenderloin: Pour the whisked marinade over the turkey breast fillets. Then, either seal bag or cover the bowl with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible. Transfer the covered container to the refrigerator and marinate the meat for at least one hour or up to eight hours.
  4. Transfer the tenderloins: Remove the marinated turkey tenderloin from the fridge 30 minutes before grilling.
A collage of images showing how to cook a turkey tenderloin on the grill.
  1. Heat grill: Preheat the gas grill to 400 degrees F. (medium-high heat), and scrape the grates to remove any remaining food residue. Then, dip a wad of paper towels into olive oil and use a pair of tongs to coat the grill grates generously. Remove the tenderloins from the marinade and shake off any excess liquid.
  2. Grill the turkey breast tenderloin: Place turkey tenderloins on the grill and cook, covered, for eight minutes. Then, flip the fillets and cook them for another 6-7 minutes, covered, until their internal temperature reaches 155 degrees F. in the thickest part of the meat. If the turkey begins to burn, move it to the cooler side of the grill, cover it, and cook until done.
  3. Let the meat rest: Transfer the grilled turkey breast fillets from the grill to a plate and cover them with a loose tent of aluminum foil. Let them rest for 10 minutes.
  4. Serve: After resting, slice the turkey tenderloin to your preferred thickness, brush or drizzle it with the reserved marinade, and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, and Reheat?

Whether you want to grill turkey breast fillets for dinner or make it a part of protein-packed meal prep, below is everything you need to know to get the most out of this easy recipe.

  • Make ahead: To prep this dish ahead of time, I recommend making the marinade for the turkey breast tenderloin up to two days in advance. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to use.
  • Store: After cooking, let your grilled turkey tenderloins reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. Then, store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: After storage, you have two easy options to reheat your grilled turkey loin. If you prefer an oven method, reheat your meat in a low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for five minutes or until warm. For a stovetop method, you may also reheat your turkey on the stove with a teaspoon of olive oil.

What to Serve With Grilled Turkey Breast Tenderloin?

One of my go-to ways to serve this easy recipe (as pictured here) is with sweet, buttery Grilled Corn and tangy Pickled Red Onions. Below, you’ll find a few of my other favorite side dishes to transform your protein into a delicious meal.

Grilled turkey breast fillets on a plate from the front view.

Expert Tips

Grilling a turkey tenderloin doesn’t have to be reserved for master chefs. These simple tips will ensure every bite of your turkey explodes with rich, succulent flavors, no matter your skill level.

  • Size of the tenderloins and grilling time: When making this recipe, remember that the size of your turkey loins will affect how long the cooking process takes. Larger tenderloins will need more time on the grill, and vice versa. If you’re unsure how long to grill your turkey breast tenderloins, use a meat thermometer to check their internal temperature.
  • Shake off the excess marinade: Before grilling turkey breast tenderloin, shake off any excess marinade to avoid grill flare-ups that may char your meat. However, be sure to discard the marinade that touched the raw meat, as it may contain harmful bacteria.
  • Indirect heat: Since there’s sugar in my tenderloin marinade recipe, it’s essential to keep a close eye on your tenderloins as they are cooking on the grill. If you notice their edges beginning to char, it is best to move them to the cooler part of the grill until they cook through.
  • Make sure to let it rest: The key to getting perfectly juicy turkey tenderloin is to slightly undercook it on the grill—only to 155 degrees F.—before letting it rest under a tent of aluminum foil. The meat will continue to cook while resting (thanks to residual heat), allowing it to reabsorb and redistribute its juices as it reaches the ideal temperature of 165 degrees F.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to check your turkey’s doneness is by inserting an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) into the thickest part of the meat. When your loins reach 155 degrees F., remove them from the grates and let them rest under tin foil until they reach the desired 165 degrees F. (about 10 minutes).

FAQs

Have more questions about how long to grill turkey tips or different turkey cuts? This hassle-free FAQ section will teach you everything you need about this easy grilled turkey tenderloin recipe.

What’s the difference between turkey breast and turkey tenderloin?

Though both are cuts of lean meat, turkey breast is a larger piece of white meat that comes directly from the bird’s chest. Furthermore, turkey breast may have skin or no skin, bones or no bones, depending on its preparation. By contrast, turkey tenderloin is a smaller cut of meat that comes from just below the breast and is always boneless and skinless.

What is the ideal turkey tenderloin grill temperature?

The temperature of your grill should reach 400 degrees F. before adding your turkey tenderloin to the grates.

How long to grill turkey tenderloin?

When cooked at 400 degrees F., your turkey tenderloin grill time should be about 14-15 minutes for loins that are between 9-12 ounces. However, the timing might change depending on the size of your meat.

At what temperature is turkey fully cooked?

Turkey is safe to eat when it reaches an internal temp. of 165 degrees F. However, we find that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to terribly dry if it is overcooked. Therefore, we recommend removing it from the grill when it reaches 155 degrees F. and let it rest under an aluminum foil tent to continue cooking while it reabsorbs its juices. It should reach the ideal 165 degrees F as it sits, thanks to residual heat.

Other Turkey Recipes You Might Also Like

Here are a few other easy turkey recipes you won’t be able to resist:

If you try this Grilled Turkey Tenderloin recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled turkey tenderloins from the top view.
Print

Grilled Turkey Tenderloin Recipe

Grilled Turkey Tenderloins marinated in an easy and quick to make soy sauce, brown sugar, and mustard marinate and then grilled or perfection. This is an easy yet elegant barbecue dinner you can enjoy for a delightful culinary experience.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 16 minutes
Marinading time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 26 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus additional oil to coat the grill grates
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon coconut sugar or brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika for a more smokey flavor
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried sage or oregano if you prefer ~ 9 ounces each
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 turkey tenderloins – 9 ounces each

Instructions

  • Make the turkey loin marinade: Whisk together the olive oil, soy sauce, lemon juice, Dijon mustard, brown sugar, onion powder, paprika, thyme, sage, black pepper, and garlic in a measuring cup. Reserve 3 tablespoons of the marinade and set it aside.
  • Place the tenderloins into a sealable plastic bag or a bowl that will allow them to be fully submerged.
  • Pour the marinade over the tenderloins and seal the bag or cover the bowl, trying to remove as much air as possible. Marinate for at least an hour or for up to 8 hours in the refrigerator.
  • Remove the turkey tenderloins from the refrigerator 30 minutes before grilling.
  • To start grilling, preheat the grill to 400 degrees (or medium-high heat.) Scrape the grates of any possible food residue, then generously coat the grates with a wad of paper towel that has been dipped in olive oil.
  • Remove the tenderloins from the marinade and make sure to shake off any excess marinade.
  • Place the turkey tenderloins on the grate and grill, covered, for 8 minutes. Flip and cook for an additional 6-7 minutes with the grill covered or until the internal temperature reaches 155 degrees F. in the thickest part of the tenderloin. (There will be carry-over cooking when removed from the grill so that the internal temperature will reach 165 degrees F.) If the tenderloin appears to be burning, move it to the cooler side of the grill, cover the grill, and continue to cook until done.
  • Remove from the grill, and tent with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes.
  • Slice your grilled turkey tenderloin to your desired thickness, brush it or drizzle with the remaining marinade, and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes two 9 ounces of grilled turkey tenderloins, which I think is an ideal size for serving 4 people.
  • Size and time: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your loins and grilling time. If they are on the larger size, you might have to double the marinade and extend the cooking time. 
  • Ideal temperature: USDA recommends cooking turkey to 165 degrees F. In this recipe, we intentionally grill it until it reaches to 155 degrees F. We find that turkey meat can dry if it is overcooked. So, in order to prevent that we slightly undercook it and then immediately cover the meat with aluminum foil. The residual heat cooks it to 165 degrees while reserving and redistributing its juices during the 10 minutes resting time.
  • You should discard any marinade after removing the turkey tenderloins.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the marinade for up to 2 days in advance and marinade the meat the night before you are planning to grill them.
  • Storage: Bring the meat to room temperature and store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F.) for five minutes or until warm. You may also reheat your turkey on the stove with a teaspoon of olive oil.

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 38mg | Sodium: 888mg | Potassium: 71mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 260IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Grilled Turkey Tenderloin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/feed/ 0
Grilled Cornish Hens https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/#comments Thu, 10 Aug 2023 16:35:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69588 It’s no secret that barbecue cornish hens contain irresistibly tender, juicy flavor—a fan favorite for summer parties and easy backyard cooking. If you want to fill your table with the same luscious chicken flavor all year round, you can also whip up effortless Air-Fried Cornish Hens in just eight simple steps. No matter how you cook them, these easy cornish hen recipes will satisfy all your chicken cravings. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Grilled Cornish Hens appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that barbecue cornish hens contain irresistibly tender, juicy flavor—a fan favorite for summer parties and easy backyard cooking. If you want to fill your table with the same luscious chicken flavor all year round, you can also whip up effortless Air-Fried Cornish Hens in just eight simple steps. No matter how you cook them, these easy cornish hen recipes will satisfy all your chicken cravings.

Grilled Cornish hens garnished with lemon and fresh herbs on a serving platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need for BBQ Cornish Hen Recipe?

This grilled cornish game hen recipe only needs a handful of simple ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Cornish hens: Most grocery stores usually store their cornish game hens in the freezer section, so be sure to let them thaw in the fridge for 24 to 48 hours before grilling. It is imperative that the hens are fully thawed before marinating and grilling.
  • Olive oil
  • Lemon: You’ll need fresh lemon to ensure your marinade is as bright and zesty as possible. You may also garnish your grilled hens with a side of sliced lemon for added presentation (as we did in the photos) if desired.
  • Fresh thyme leaves
  • Spices: To give your cornish hen marinade for grilling its signature bold, well-seasoned flavors, we’ll add paprika, Kosher salt, and black pepper into the seasoning.

Substitutions

  • Fresh herbs: If you don’t have any thyme leaves on hand, you can use other fresh herbs to give your grilled cornish game hens deliciously bright overtones. Instead, you can prepare lemon rosemary cornish hens for a delectable balance of woody and citrusy flavors. Or, you can substitute your thyme for oregano or parsley, as they both have a similarly earthy, garden-fresh taste.
  • Marinade: I love the bright, garden-fresh taste of my grilled cornish hen marinade. However, you can switch up your flavor profile by using my Cuban-style Cornish Hen Marinade (made with lime juice, ground cumin, garlic, and oregano) to give your game hens more robust, piquant overtones. For a tangier, more luscious option, you can also mix up my Yogurt Chicken Marinade in just 10 minutes.

How to Spatchcock a Cornish Hen?

Spatchcocking—also known as butterflying or splitting—refers to the process of removing a chicken’s backbone and flattening the bird’s body. Taking the time to split a cornish hen for grilling helps quicken the roasting process and ensures even cooking across your meat.

  1. Dry the hens: Pat hens dry on all sides with paper towels. When as dry as possible, your birds will be easier to grip while spatchcocking.
A collage of images showing how to spatchcock a Cornish hen before grilling.
  1. Spatchcock the cornish game hens: Place one hen on a cutting board, breast-side down. Locate the backbone, which runs down the center of the bird. Then, use kitchen scissors (affiliate link) to remove the backbone, beginning at the tail and cutting along one side of the backbone. Cut along the other side of the spine and remove the bone, discarding it or saving it to make chicken stock.
Person showing how to spatchcock a cornish game hen.
  1. Flatten the hen: Flip the bird so its breast side faces up. Find the breastbone running down the middle of the hen, then firmly press down on it with the heel of your hand until the bird lies flat. Set the flattened hen aside and repeat the same spatchcocking process with the second game bird.

How to Grill Cornish Hens?

You don’t have to be a master at the grill to make tasty grilled hens. These step-by-step instructions will teach even beginners how to make mouthwatering chicken in no time.

A collage of images showing how to make grilled cornish hen marinade.
  1. Mix the marinade ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, thyme, paprika, salt, and pepper. Ensure your bowl is big enough to accommodate both little birds or prepare a large Ziploc bag for the marination process.
  2. Set aside marinade: Pour two tablespoons of the marinade into an airtight jar and transfer it to the refrigerator until ready to use. We will use this marinade to brush the birds after they are grilled.
  3. Marinate the hens: Place the spatchcocked cornish hens in the marinade, covering each of the chickens with the liquid. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, transfer it to the fridge, and marinate the cornish hens for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of eight hours.
  4. Remove the hens: Remove the marinated cornish hens from the refrigerator when ready to cook. 
  5. Prep the grill:
    1. To cook cornish hens on a gas grill: Preheat the grill to 350 degrees F. 
    2. To cook cornish hens on a charcoal grill: Fill a chimney starter three-quarters with charcoal and light the coals. Let the grill burn until the coals fully ignite and develop a thin layer of ash (approximately 15-20 minutes). Spread the charcoal into an even layer over the grill’s bottom, and position the cooking grill rack on top. Cover the grill and let the insides heat for about five minutes.
Person showing how to cook Cornish hens on a grill in a collage of images.
  1. Clean the grates: Use a grill brush to eliminate any remaining residue from the grill racks. Then, dip a wad of paper towel into the oil and use a pair of tongs to wipe the towels over the grill racks generously.
  2. Place hens on the grill: Shake off excess marinade before placing each cornish game hen on the grill, skin-side up. Cover the grill (if using a charcoal grill, be sure the vents are open) and cook the birds for 10 minutes.
  3. Flip the birds: Flip the chickens to their opposite side, cover the grill, and cook for 7-10 minutes or until the skin turns crispy and golden brown. Keep a close eye on the hens to avoid overcooking, and check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer into the thickest parts of the thigh. You can remove your cornish hens when they reach 165 degrees F.
  4. Let the hens rest: When finished grilling, transfer the barbeque cornish game hens onto a plate and cover it with a loose tent of aluminum foil. Let the birds rest for 10 minutes.
  5. Brush and serve: Brush the skin of both hens with the reserved marinade, and sprinkle them with chopped fresh thyme. Serve with a side of lemon wedges.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

Learning how to cook cornish hens on the grill is a simple way to ensure effortless meal prep throughout the week. There’s no need to sacrifice a single bite of your chicken with these easy storage tips.

  • Make ahead: If you want a headstart on your BBQ cornish game hens, prepare the marinade and transfer it into a Ziploc bag. Then, add the chicken, seal tightly, and let the meat marinate in the refrigerator for up to eight hours.
  • Store: You can store your grilled game hens in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your cornish hens, place them in the microwave for 30-second increments until heated through. If you’d prefer to reheat your meat in the oven, bake it at 300 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes until warm.

What to Serve With Grilled Cornish Hens?

If you’re looking for a gourmet menu designed to stun your dinner guests, you’ll love my master collection of Cornish Hen Meal Sides. Below are just a few of my tastiest summer side dishes.

  • Rice and grains: If you love the light yet flavorful taste of tender rice, Cooked Wild Rice (or Instant Pot Wild Rice, for a quicker cooking option!) makes for a tender, smoky side when grilling cornish game hen. For a more earthy and seasoned option, Lemon Quinoa is light and zesty, while Bulgur Pilaf is a robust Turkish classic.
  • Salads: Nutritious yet flavorful, salads make an incomparable side for your grilled whole cornish hens. Wild Rice Salad contains an irresistible balance of sweet and savory ingredients, including dried cranberries, mild pecans, and tart grapes. My Mexican Corn Salad and Yogurt Coleslaw have a tangy mix of ultra-fresh veggies and refreshing salad dressing for a creamier option. However, any of my Summer Salads will fill your menu with light, crisp flavors.
  • Vegetable dishes: Just because you want to serve a veggie side doesn’t mean you have to sacrifice taste. My Zucchini Lasagna and Eggplant Parmesan are packed with rich Italian flavors, while Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a fluffy, buttery, and flavorful dish that takes half an hour to prepare.
  • Pasta: No one can say no to pasta’s hearty, creamy taste when grilling cornish game hens. For bold, sumptuous flavors, you can prepare simple Garlic Butter Noodles or Vodka Pasta in just 30 minutes. Or, whip up my Caprese Pasta Salad to lend your menu a classic, fresh edge.
Grilled Cornish game hens on a bed of wild rice.

Expert Tips

Whether it’s your first time at the grill or you’re an expert doesn’t matter. This master guide will help you grill your cornish game hen so it comes out with tantalizing flavors and rich tenderness.

  • Ensure the hens are fully thawed: To ensure even grilling, you must fully thaw your cornish hens before adding them to the grill. If your hens are frozen, take them out of the freezer at least 48 hours in advance.
  • Don’t skip the spatchcocking: Though it takes extra time, spatchcocking your chicken is necessary to grill your meat evenly and in less time. Grilling cornish hens whole (i.e., non-spatchcocked) takes a much longer cooking time and may result in under or over-cooked portions of meat.
  • Preheat your grill: Preheating your grill—whether you’re using a gas or charcoal grill—will ensure that your meat cooks through and develops a smoky, crispy exterior.
  • Oil the grill grates: You must thoroughly oil your grill racks before grilling a cornish hen. Otherwise, the meat may stick to them, making it difficult to flip and serve your chicken.
  • Let the excess marinade drip: Be sure to let any extra marinade drip off your hens before placing them on the grill. Because you’re cooking with an open flame, marinade may drip into the fire, resulting in flare-ups that char the exterior of your chickens.
  • Start with the skin-side up: The best way to give your game hens succulent insides and crisp skin is by beginning the grilling process with your birds arranged skin side up. Starting this way will cause the chickens’ juices and steam to rise into the skin once flipped, turning it soggy.
  • The size of the bird and its cooking time are related: Not all cornish hens are the same size. Therefore, if your birds are larger or smaller, you may need to adjust their grilling time and test frequently with a thermometer to ensure they don’t come out under or over-cooked.
  • Use a digital thermometer: When you grill cornish hens, the best way to check doneness is to insert an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the thigh. Your meat should reach an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. before removing it from the grates. However, remember to keep a close eye on your hens during the grilling process, as it cooks quickly at such high temperatures.
  • Let it rest: After cooking a cornish hen on the grill, let the meat rest on a plate covered with aluminum foil for 10 minutes. This resting time will allow the meat to reabsorb and evenly distribute its juices, resulting in succulent, flavorful meat.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally, one pound of chicken serves one person, while 1½-2 pounds serves two.  Should you need to serve a larger party, feel free to multiply the recipe, and don’t be afraid to grill your hens in batches. 

FAQs

If you have more questions about this easy recipe, don’t worry! This simple collection of FAQs will answer any question, from proper cook time to how to give your hens as much flavor as possible.

How long to marinate cornish hens?

To marinate cornish hens, let them sit fully covered in the marinade mixture for at least 30 minutes and up to eight hours.

Should cornish hens be at room temperature before cooking?

It’s best if your game hens are as close to room temperature as possible before adding them to your grill. Grilling cold or frozen hens will result in uneven cooking, with an undercooked center and a burnt exterior. To thaw frozen birds, transfer them to the fridge and let them sit for 24 to 48 hours before beginning the cooking process. If your birds are already in the fridge, I recommend letting them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes first.

How long to grill cornish hens?

To grill spatchcock cornish hens, you’ll need to cook them at 350 degrees F. for a total of 15-20 minutes (10 minutes skin-side up and an additional 7-10 minutes skin-side down). Your birds should register an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. in the thickest part of the thigh before removing them from the grill. However, keep a close eye on the birds while grilling, as cornish hens tend to cook quickly, and over-cooking will strip your chicken of its juices, resulting in dry, tasteless meat.

What temperature to grill cornish hens?

If using a gas grill, I recommend letting it reach 350 degrees F. before placing your marinated cornish hens on the grill.

How many people does one Cornish game hen feed?

Depending on the size of your bird, one cornish game hen may feed between 1-2 people. A good rule of thumb is that each person will need about one pound of meat per serving. Therefore, if your birds are closer to two pounds, one hen may feed two people. However, you may need one hen per person if yours are smaller.

Other Grilled Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Grilled Cornish Hens recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled Cornish game hens on a bed of wild rice garnished with fresh herbs.
Print

Grilled Cornish Hens Recipe

These Grilled Cornish game hens are showstoppers, great for an easy but impressive summer meal. Spatchcocked for even grilling, they are marinated in a quick homemade marinade that infuses each bite with rich and zesty flavors.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 584kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1½ pounds cornish hens fully thawed if using frozen
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice from one lemon
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves chopped or 2 teaspoons dried – plus more as garnish
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 lemon thinly sliced – as garnish

Instructions

  • Using paper towels, dry the birds on all sides as much as you can. Doing so will help you get a strong grip on the chicken when spatchcocking.
  • Next, spatchcock the cornish hens. Place the hen breast-side down on a cutting board. Find the backbone that runs down the center of the hen. Using poultry shears, remove the backbone starting from the tail and cutting along one side of the backbone. Repeat the same process by cutting on the other side of the bone. Remove it and discard (or save it for making chicken stock later.)
  • Turn the bird around so that the breast side is up. Locate the breastbone that runs down the middle of the bird. Firmly press down with the palms of your hands until the hen lies flat. Repeat the same process with the second cornish hen. Set them aside.
  • To make the marinade, whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, thyme, paprika, salt, and pepper in a large mixing bowl. I recommend using a bowl large enough that can accommodate both birds. You can use a Ziploc bag to marinade the birds, as well.
  • Transfer 2 tablespoons of the marinade into a small jar and keep it in the fridge until ready to use. We will use this to brush cornish hens after they are finished cooking on the grill.
  • Place the birds into the marinade (ensure that they are fully covered with it), cover with plastic wrap, and marinate for at least 30 minutes or for up to 8 hours in the fridge.
  • When ready to cook, remove the chicken from the fridge while you are preparing the grill. Preheat a gas grill to 350 degrees F.
  • Clean grill grates. Dip a wad of paper towel into olive oil and then generously wipe the grates.
  • Remove the cornish hens from the marinade (be sure to shake the excess marinade), and place them skin-side up on the grill. Cover and grill for 10 minutes.
  • Flip the hens, cover, and grill for 7-10 more minutes or until the skin is crispy and turns golden brown. Keep a close eye on them as they are grilling to avoid burning. Check doneness by inserting an instant read thermometer into the thickest part of the thigh. If it registers 165 degrees F, your cornish hens are cooked.
  • Transfer onto a plate and cover with aluminum foil. Let them rest for 10 minutes.
  • Brush the skin of each hen with the reserved marinade. Sprinkle with chopped fresh thyme and serve on a serving platter with lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes two hens, with each of them being 1 ½ pounds. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally speaking, one pound of chicken serves one person, while 1½-2 pounds serves two.  If you are serving a larger crowd, feel free to multiply the recipe.
  • The size of the bird and its cooking time are related: If your birds are larger or smaller, you may need to adjust their grilling time and check doneness using a digital thermometer.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare the marinade and transfer it into a plastic sealable bag. Then, add the chicken, seal tightly, and let the meat marinate in the refrigerator for up to eight hours.
  • Store: You can store your grilled game hens in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your cornish hens, place them in the microwave for 30-second increments until heated through. If you’d prefer to reheat your meat in the oven, bake it at 300 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes or until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 584kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 286mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 744mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 462IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Grilled Cornish Hens appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/feed/ 2
Corn Stock https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/#respond Wed, 02 Aug 2023 13:46:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69428 This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals. Ingredients You’ll Need This delicious...

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals.

Corn cobs, celery, parsley, and whole black peppercorns in a pot.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This delicious corn cob stock recipe uses only six simple ingredients to produce an all-purpose stock perfect for countless kinds of dishes.

Ingredients for making corn broth from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Corn cobs: The best way to get deliciously sweet, nutritious, and robust corn stock is to use fresh corn on the cob with no blemishes. Needless to say, corn husks, silks, and kernels should be removed. If you can get your hands on it, I recommend buying Non-GMO corn.
  • Celery stalks
  • Yellow onion: I love using yellow onion in this recipe because of its mild, balanced taste. However, you may also use white onions if you’d like your stock to have a slightly more potent, intense flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh parsley leaves
  • Whole black peppercorns

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

Because of this recipe’s incredible versatility, the sky is the limit when making your unique corn broth. Feel free to adjust the below optional add-ins to match the recipe you’re preparing, and keep in mind that practically any veggie will work in your stock—as long as they don’t overpower the delicate sweetness of corn’s natural flavor.

  • Carrot: You only need one small carrot stalk to add sweet, earthy notes to your corn broth. Be careful not to add too many carrots, though, as this ingredient may take over your recipe’s more nuanced, delicate flavors.
  • Fresh herbs: To give your stock recipe a hint of bright, herbaceous flavor, I recommend adding a few sprigs of fresh thyme, rosemary, or a bay leaf.
  • Spices: A few extra spices are all this corn broth recipe needs to lend its sweet overtones a touch of bold, fresh taste. Cumin seeds will add rich, warm tones to your stock, while coriander seeds are perfect for giving your mix a spicy, slightly citrusy edge. You may add a few bay leaves, too, for a somewhat more herby flavor.
  • Salt: I didn’t add salt to my corn broth to ensure I had more control over my prepared recipes’ seasoning balance. However, you may add salt to your mixture according to personal preference.
  • Parmesan rind: This nutty, bold ingredient is a perfect addition to homemade corn stock, especially if you are using your stock to make creamy risotto or corn chowder.

How to Make Corn Stock?

Learning how to make corn broth is an easy way to give your favorite recipes tantalizingly sweet, fresh undertones. These hassle-free instructions will have your stock ready to use in just five steps.

A collage of images showing how to make corn cob stock.
  1. Add the ingredients: Take out a large pot or a large Dutch oven, and add the bare corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley, and peppercorns.
  2. Add the water: Pour water into the pot, and bring it to a boil over high heat. Once the pot of water comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. 
  3. Simmer: Let the mixture simmer for at least one hour or a maximum of two hours.
  4. Strain the stock: When cool enough to handle, place a fine-mesh strainer in a large bowl, and strain the corn stock into the bowl. Be sure to press down on the vegetables as they catch in the sieve to extract any trapped liquid.
  5. Cool: Pour the corn cob broth into individual jars and let them cool, for about 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  6. Store: Once cool, cover each jar with an airtight lid before labeling and dating them. Then, transfer the jars to the refrigerator or freezer for later use.

How to Store and Freeze Corn Cob Stock?

Homemade corn broth is one of the most storage-friendly recipes in my recipe book. Store your stock in airtight containers, such as Mason jars or weck jars, to ensure it remains as fresh and flavorful as possible.

  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock by letting it cool in airtight jars (such as Weck jars (affiliate link), closing the containers, and placing it in the freezer for up to three months.

How to Use Corn Stock in Recipes?

Versatile and oh-so-easy to make, this corn stock recipe comes in handy for dozens of mouthwatering dishes. Below, you’ll find just a few of my go-to stock-based recipes.

  • Soups, stews, and chili bases: Infuse your soup recipes with next-level flavors by transforming them into corn cob soup. I love adding the sweet notes of corn stock to my creamy and piquant Mexican Corn Soup—my favorite alternative to corn chowder. Or, for a heartier meal, use corn broth as a base for protein-packed chili recipes, like my Quinoa Chili or White Chicken Chili.
  • For cooking whole grains: You’ll never have to worry about bland grains again when you prepare them in this corn broth recipe. If you’re a quinoa fanatic like I am, you’ll love using corn stock in place of water to make basic cooked quinoa or to liven it up with a Mexican Quinoa version. You can also make show-stopping sides out of simple ingredients with dishes like Bulgur Wheat, Wild Rice, and Corn Risotto.
  • Cornbread and corn cakes: What’s cornbread without golden-sweet corn flavor in each bite? This corn broth makes an excellent addition to classic side dishes like Cornbread Muffins and Corn Cakes.
  • Polenta and grits: Mild, creamy, and endlessly customizable, polenta and grits taste out of this world when prepared with corn stock. If you want a vegetarian recipe that will stun your dinner guests with a five-star taste, this Creamy Polenta combines roasted mushrooms, toasted walnuts, and creamy blue cheese for an out-of-this-world flavor.
  • Poaching liquid: Corn stock makes an incomparably flavorful poaching liquid when preparing meats such as fish (especially salmon!) or chicken.
  • Sip on it: Drinking pure corn stock is a delicious and easy way to pack nutrients into every sip.
Corn cob soup stock in a jar dated and labeled.

Expert Tips

There’s no reason to stress over this beginner-friendly stock recipe. With this pro guide, you’ll never have to worry about making irresistibly fresh corn stock again.

  • More corn, no problem: The recipe below only requires six empty corn cobs. However, if you have more ears of corn, feel free to add them to your mixture with enough water to cover them by an inch.
  • Let it simmer: After coming to a boil, let your corn cob soup stock simmer for at least an hour (and no longer than two hours!). This time allows the veggies to release their natural flavors into the liquid without boiling away any nutrients or diminishing their taste.
  • Strain: Because of all the vegetable juices released into corn stock, this recipe might produce a cloudy liquid. If you prefer a clear stock, layer a cheesecloth at the bottom of your fine-mesh strainer before draining your broth.
  • Label and date: The key to ensuring that your corn cob stock remains as bright and flavorful as possible is using it while it’s fresh. I recommend labeling and dating your stored broth so that you know when to use it. Remember, broth stored in the fridge should be used within five days, while frozen corn broth should be used within three months.

FAQs

What is corn stock?

Corn stock is a liquid made from slow-cooking bare corn cobs and other veggies in water. The resultant broth has a mildly sweet, complex flavor that you can use to cook many dishes, from grains to cornbread.

Can you use corn cobs in vegetable stock?

Most definitely! Corn cobs add delightfully sweet undertones to vegetable stock and help eliminate waste in the kitchen.

Is corn stock good for you?

Yes! Corn contains many nutritious vitamins and minerals, including a hearty helping of Vitamin C, Vitamin B, and potassium.

Other Corn Recipes You Might Also Like

Few recipes match a stock of corn’s subtle sweetness and complex flavor. If you’re craving more soft, buttery corn recipes, these dishes will fill your table for days.

If you try this Corn Stock recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Corn cobs and vegetables in a pot from the top view.
Print

Corn Stock Recipe

Making corn stock is a great way to use up leftover corn cobs and getting a second life out of them. Make a batch and use it to infuse the sweet flavors of corn to your soup, risotto, chowder, and polenta recipes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American, American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 10 cups
Calories 6kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 corn cobs husked and kernels removed
  • 2 celery stalks cut in quarters
  • 1 medium onion peeled and quartered
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled and crushed
  • 4 sprigs fresh parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon whole black peppercorns about 10 peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Instructions

  • Place the corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley and peppercorns in a stock pot or large Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water into the pot. Bring it to a boil over high heat. As soon as it comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. Let it simmer for at least one hour or for up to 2 hours. Off the heat, let it cool for an hour or so.
  • Meanwhile, place a fine mesh strainer in a large bowl. When cool enough to handle, carefully strain corn stock and gently press down on the vegetables to extract any remaining liquid.
  • Pour into jars and let it cool (uncovered) on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  • When cooled, cover tightly with the lid, label and date before placing the jars in the refrigerator or freezing them for later use.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 9 1/2 cups to 10 cups of corn stock. The nutritional information below is per cup.
  • Adding salt: We intentionally didn’t use salt in this recipe so that you can adjust it according to the recipe you plan to use it in. However, you can season it with salt if you prefer.
  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock in airtight freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.02g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 13mg | Potassium: 24mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/feed/ 0
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#respond Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that...

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 0
Salmon Coconut Soup https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/ https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/#comments Thu, 27 Jul 2023 23:52:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11826 I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon soup keeps me on my healthy eating journey. If you are a serious salmon lover, make sure to check out my Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon and Grilled Sockeye Salmon, too. Ingredients The ingredients for this Thai salmon soup are broken down into two parts for ease – Thai coconut broth...

The post Salmon Coconut Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon soup keeps me on my healthy eating journey. If you are a serious salmon lover, make sure to check out my Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon and Grilled Sockeye Salmon, too.

Salmon coconut soup garnished with cilantro in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Thai salmon soup are broken down into two parts for ease – Thai coconut broth and salmon soup. Here’s a look at what we need for each one:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Thai Coconut Broth

  • Vegetable Broth: One quart of either low sodium store bought or homemade vegetable stock (or Vegetable Scrap Stock) will work. Chicken Stock is another option, but I find the vegetable stock to work better with the salmon.
  • Coconut Milk: Use one full-fat can of unsweetened coconut milk, shaken or blended until smooth.
  • Aromatics: These include fresh ginger, shallots and garlic, all minced to the finest texture.
  • Lime Zest: Lime zest offers that extra bit of zing and adds a sour note to the overall flavor.
  • Lemon grass: If using fresh lemongrass stalks, remove the tough outer layers, smash it gently to release its oils and slice the bottom white portion (the dark green portion can be discarded). If you can’t find fresh lemongrass, 1 Tablespoon storebought Lemongrass paste is a great substitute.

Salmon Soup

  • Wild Salmon Fillet: Wild Alaskan salmon or wild sockeye salmon are both delicious here. Feel free to leave the skin on or remove the skin depending on your preference. Also make sure to check parts of the salmon for pin bones before slicing them into 1-inch pieces. If using frozen salmon, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Coconut Oil: Coconut oil rounds out the coconut flavor, but olive oil, sesame oil, or avocado oil can also be used.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Pepper: Red peppers, yellow or orange bell pepper all work here.
  • Fresh Ginger
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Coconut Milk: Use another can of coconut milk, blended or shaken until smooth.
  • Broccoli: For best results, make sure to cut the broccoli head into small florets, or bite size pieces.
  • Lime: A final squeeze of fresh lime juice at the end brightens the richness of the coconut broth and gives it a tangy finish.
  • Maple Syrup: Maple syrup balances the heat from the ginger. Brown sugar or coconut sugar will also work.
  • Garnish: Garnish each bowl of soup with freshly sliced green onion, fresh cilantro and jalapeno slices or serrano chiles just before serving.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Umami: For an extra dose of umami, you can add 1 teaspoon of fish sauce, soy sauce, or coconut aminos near the end of cooking.
  • Mushrooms: Toss in a handful of thinly sliced shiitake, button, or oyster mushrooms along with the broccoli for even more fiber, vegetables, and flavor.
  • Curry Paste: To make this more of a coconut curry salmon soup, add 1 Tablespoon red or yellow curry paste while sauteing the garlic and ginger.
  • Chilli Paste: Another common ingredient in Thai cuisine, feel free to add 1 tsp – 1 tbsp of your favorite chili paste depending on your desired spice level. If you can get your hands on Thai chiles, a little goes a long way.
  • Noodles: You can cook some vermicelli noodles on the side, divide it in bowls and pour the soup over for more of a filling meal.

How to Make It?

Whether you call it salmon belly soup or salmon chowder, this delicious and nutritious meal comes together in under 1 hour. Here’s how I like to do it from start to finish:

A collage of images showing how to make salmon coconut soup recipe.
  1. Make the Thai coconut broth: In a medium-sized saucepan, add the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt. Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce the heat to medium-low and allow to simmer for 30 minutes.
  2. Discard solids: Strain the broth through a fine mesh strainer, either into a medium bowl or a large container. Set aside until ready to use.
  3. Prep salmon: While the stock is simmering, pat the salmon dry with a paper towel. Sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Saute aromatics: In a large stock pot or large Dutch oven set over medium heat, add the oil and heat for 1 minute. Then, add the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
A collage of images showing how to poach salmon in coconut broth.
  1. Add liquids: Once the aromatics are softened and fragrant, add the reserved broth and extra can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil, then reduce to medium-low heat and let simmer for 15 minutes.
  2. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets during the last 5 minutes of simmering time.
  3. Add salmon: At the last minute, add the pieces of salmon and let it cook for 1 minute, then turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook as the soup settles.
  4. Finish: Add the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and adjust to your liking.
  5. Garnish: Ladle into soup bowls and top with scallions, a handful of cilantro leaves, and sliced jalapenos. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat Leftovers?

Since poached salmon soup is technically made in two parts, you can prepare the coconut lemongrass broth ahead of time and keep it in the fridge until the day you are ready to serve. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stock 1-2 days in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. With the stock already prepared, the recipe should only take about 20 – 30 minutes from start to finish.
  • Store: Leftover salmon soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.

What to Serve it With?

This fish coconut soup is a gorgeous meal that can be served any night of the week. While it is a complete meal all on its own, you can serve it with:

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this Salmon Coconut Soup is pretty straightforward there are a few things that we recommend paying attention to for the best results. Here are a few things to pay attention to:

  • Cut the broccoli into small pieces. Smaller pieces make for a faster cooking time, which means your broccoli will be tender, not crunchy.
  • Do not overcook the salmon. For best results, add the salmon at the very last minute of simmering and immediately turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook in the residual heat from the soup. 
  • Taste test as you go. The key to Thai cuisine is its use of salty, sweet, spicy, sour, and umami flavors. Taste and adjust the seasonings as you go for a delicious and well-balanced meal.
Salmon coconut soup in bowls with bread on the side.

FAQs

What is creamy salmon soup made of?

This coconut salmon soup recipe starts with a coconut lemongrass broth as the base. The addition of onions, peppers, garlic, ginger, more coconut milk, salmon, and broccoli make it a complete dish.

How to cook salmon in coconut milk?

Salmon is a delicate, flaky fish that only needs 1 minute in simmering broth, especially if you are cutting it into small cubes. Immediately remove it from the heat as the residual heat from the coconut milk broth will continue to cook the salmon.

What does coconut soup taste like?

Salmon coconut soup is a Thai-inspired meal that strikes the right balance of salty, sweet, spicy, sour and umami. As always, taste test and adjust the seasonings to your liking.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Salmon Coconut Soup recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Salmon and coconut soup in a bowl garnished with cilantro.
Print

Salmon Coconut Soup Recipe

This Salmon Coconut Soup recipe is a comforting soup made with a Thai style coconut broth that is flavored with ginger, lime and lemongrass. Easy to make, this coconut fish soup is bright, aromatic and packed with a combination of sweet, spicy, sour and salty flavors.
Course Soup
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 402kcal

Ingredients

For the Thai Coconut Broth:

  • 4 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 can full-fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
  • 1 shallot minced
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest 1 lime
  • 1 stalk lemongrass thinly sliced or storebought Lemongrass paste
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For the Soup:

  • 1 ½ pounds salmon filets any residual bones removed, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil or olive oil if you prefer
  • 1 medium yellow onion diced
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper diced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 can full fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 cup broccoli florets rinsed and cut into small pieces
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup
  • 2 limes quartered

Garnishes:

  • 2 scallions thinly sliced
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno thinly sliced

Instructions

  • To make the Thai Coconut Broth: Place the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan. Bring it to a boil on high heat, then turn it down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30 minutes.
  • Strain the broth into a bowl and discard the solids. Set the broth aside.
  • Meanwhile, start working on the chowder ingredients. Pat the salmon dry using paper towels. Season with salt and pepper.
  • Heat the oil in a stock pot over medium heat. Add in the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add in the grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
  • Add in the broth that was set aside along with the second can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil and let it simmer for 15 minutes.
  • Add in the broccoli florets in the last 5 minutes of the simmering time.
  • At the last minute, add in the cubed salmon and let it cook for a minute, and turn the heat off. It should continue to cook with the help of the residual heat.
  • Stir in the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Garnish with chopped scallions, sliced jalapenos, and torn fresh cilantro leaves. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Clean Soups: Simple, Nourishing Recipes for Health and Vitality cookbook.
  • Store: Leftover soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the broth a day or 2 in advance and refrigerate it in an airtight container.
  • This recipe was tested with the salmon skin on and removed – there was no difference in taste or the salmon staying intact.
  • Make sure that the broccoli florets are cut small so that they can cook quickly.
  • Add the salmon at the very last minute. If you let it simmer too long, it will be overcooked and lose most of its flavor.
  • Be sure to taste the soup and adjust the seasoning accordingly. You may even have to add a bit more maple syrup and lime juice if you are a fan of those spicy, sweet, and sour flavors.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1249mg | Potassium: 1149mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 837IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Salmon Coconut Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/feed/ 10
Virgin Pina Colada https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/ https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/#comments Mon, 24 Jul 2023 00:57:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6290 If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist. And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure...

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist.

And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure to check out our Strawberry Basil Limeade, Rosemary Mint Lemonade, Kale Pineapple Smoothie, and Ginger Iced Tea.

Person holding a virgin pina colada in her hand with a cherry on top.

Virgin Pina Colada Ingredients

A frozen virgin pina colada recipe only requires a handful of key ingredients. It’s a short list of  tropical flavors, including the following ingredients:

Ingredients for virgin colada from the top view.
  • Frozen Pineapple: Look for frozen pineapple chunks in the frozen fruit section of your local grocery store. If you cannot find frozen pineapple, flash freeze fresh pineapple. To do so, simply remove the outer skin and core, then cut the pineapple into bite-size pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 30 minutes – 1 hour. You can also add more ice if frozen pineapple is unavailable.
  • Coconut Milk: We used full-fat coconut milk to create a healthier (and mildly sweet) version. For a sweeter take, make a virgin pina colada with 3-ingredients by using 1 cup sweetened Coco Lopez Cream of Coconut (affiliate link) and omitting the coconut sugar – add more pineapple juice (or try coconut water) if you find the mixture to be a little too thick.
  • Pineapple Juice: We think that unsweetened pineapple juice, usually found in a can, gives this Piña Colada mocktail an even more tropical flavor. Add more juice after blending based on your desired consistency. Swap it out for mango juice or orange juice for a different flavor.
  • Ice Cubes: Ice adds a creamy, slushy, icy texture. You can also use about ½ cup crushed ice, which will blend more evenly.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps it naturally sweetened with no refined sugar. Add more after blending if you would like it on the sweeter side.
  • Garnish: Stick to the classic fresh pineapple wedge or pineapple slices and maraschino cherry. Or, give it a real warm beach vibe with fresh mint and a mini cocktail umbrella. Maple Whipped Cream or a dollop of Honey Ice Cream takes it that much more over the top.

Optional Add Ins / Variations

  • Rum: Make a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.
  • Extracts: If you would still like to enjoy a pina colada mocktail, but with rum flavor, add 1 – 2 tsp rum extract for extra flavor. A dash of vanilla extract never hurts, either.
  • Lime Juice: Add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and coconut flavor.

How to Make Pina Colada without Alcohol?

Non-alcoholic pina coladas are ready in less than 5 minutes after a quick whiz in the blender. It is so refreshing and creamy, you will never miss the alcohol. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make virgin pina colada.
  1. Add ingredients to blender: In this order, place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  2. Blend: Start off on low power, then increase to high power and blend until smooth, about 30 seconds. Taste for sweetness and add more if desired.
  3. Serve: Pour into a chilled cocktail glass. Garnish with pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

While this homemade non-alcoholic pina colada is best served the moment it is made, there are a few steps you can take to get ahead. You can:

  • Make Ahead: Prep and measure out all the ingredients in advance. Keep stored in the freezer and fridge, respectively.
  • Storage: Leftover virgin pina colada mix can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Coconut milk vs coconut cream: This recipe is best made with canned coconut milk rather than coconut cream (which has a higher fat content). To make sure the can of coconut milk is well blended, vigorously shake before opening or blend in a high-speed blender.
  • Use a hurricane glass: Stick to the curved hurricane glasses for classic pina coladas right at home.
  • Chill cocktail glasses: Chilled cocktail glasses keep the drink super cold without diluting it with extra ice. Place the glasses in the fridge or freezer for at least 1 hour, or until ready to serve.
  • Prep the garnishes: Make sure to have pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries at the ready so that your virgin colada cocktail doesn’t have time to melt. And don’t forget the paper umbrella for authentic Caribbean vibes.
Two glasses of virgin colada garnished with pineapple wedges.

FAQs

What’s in a virgin pina colada?

This healthy and mildly sweet pina colada without alcohol is made with frozen pineapple, coconut milk, pineapple juice, ice, and coconut sugar.

Who invented the pina colada?

Deemed the official drink of Puerto Rico, the first accounts of a pina colada came from bartender Ramon “Monchito” Marrero at the Caribe Hilton in 1954 in San Juan, Puerto Rico.

Why is it called virgin pina colada?

Pina Colada is Spanish for ‘strained pineapple’. Virgin pina colada denotes an alcohol-free version, which means the whole family can enjoy this fun drink on a hot summer’s day.

Are virgin pina coladas healthy?

This virgin colada is quite healthy as it contains no refined sugar, no alcohol, and clean, fresh ingredients you can feel good about. As a bonus, it is also vegan and dairy-free.

Other Non-Alcoholic Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this non-alcoholic pina colada recipe, I am pretty sure you will also like a few of our other mocktails. Below are our favorite summer sips that are worth checking out:

If you try this Pina Colada recipe without alcohol, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade virgin piña colada recipe in glasses.
Print

Virgin Pina Colada Recipe

Here’s a simple Virgin Pina Colada recipe that’s made with healthier ingredients without any refined sugars. With only four simple ingredients, you can make this non- alcoholic and refreshing drink in minutes. It is surely the best mocktail to enjoy on a hot summer day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Caribbean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 serving
Calories 144kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups frozen pineapple chunks (8 ounces)
  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk (13.5 ounces) – Shake well
  • ½ cup unsweetened pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice
  • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar more if necessary

Garnishes

  • 4 wedges pineapple
  • 4 Maraschino cherries Optional

Instructions

  • Place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  • Blend until smooth. Taste for sweetness and add more if necessary.
  • If preferred, pour into a glass and garnish with pineapple wedges and Maraschino cherries (if preferred.)

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields ~ 32 ounces of virgin colada. Each serving is about 8 ounces.
  • Chill your glasses: Place your glasses in the freezer at least 30 minutes before making this drink to ensure that they are super cold.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!
  • Rum: Turn this into a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.

Nutrition

Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 331mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/feed/ 6
Zucchini Lasagna Rolls https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna-rolls/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna-rolls/#respond Mon, 17 Jul 2023 14:35:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69127 Making lasagna rolls with zucchini is an easy way to enjoy fresh, healthy, and tasty Italian cuisine flavors any night of the week. This easy vegetable lasagna rolls dish is also a healthier alternative and a fun take on rolls made with traditional lasagna noodles. The versatility of zucchini is truly impressive! It can be transformed into a variety of healthy dishes: consider our Turkey Zucchini Meatballs for a healthy...

The post Zucchini Lasagna Rolls appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making lasagna rolls with zucchini is an easy way to enjoy fresh, healthy, and tasty Italian cuisine flavors any night of the week. This easy vegetable lasagna rolls dish is also a healthier alternative and a fun take on rolls made with traditional lasagna noodles.

The versatility of zucchini is truly impressive! It can be transformed into a variety of healthy dishes: consider our Turkey Zucchini Meatballs for a healthy weeknight meal, whip up a Cream of Zucchini Soup in just 30 minutes, or bake a batch of Baked Zucchini Fritters for a crisp, tangy appetizer that will disappear in minutes.

Zucchini lasagna roll ups in a casserole dish from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Zucchini Rolls

You’ll only need a small collection of fresh, simple ingredients for this zucchini roll ups recipe.

  • Zucchini: You’ll need three small- or medium-sized zucchini to make your rolls. I recommend avoiding large zucchini, as they’re often more watery and contain a higher concentration of seeds. You also don’t need to peel your zucchini before adding them to your recipe, particularly if you’re using them during summer (AKA zucchini season!).
  • Ricotta: Full-fat ricotta cheese is my go-to for this dish, as the extra creaminess gives rolled zucchini an incomparably rich, gooey flavor. You could also make Homemade Ricotta if you prefer making your cheese from scratch. However, no matter what type you choose, drain any excess liquid before preparing your filling.
  • Olive oil
  • Onion: It’s essential to mince your onion finely to allow for a more even distribution of this ingredient throughout the ricotta filling.
  • Ground turkey: Making zucchini lasagna rolls with meat is a great way to give this dish a savory, protein-packed base. I prefer using ½ pound of ground turkey for a leaner alternative to ground beef, though any ground meat would work. For a slightly spicier take, you could also use Italian sausage or chicken sausage, separated into small chunks.
  • Fresh baby spinach
  • Egg
  • Parmesan cheese
  • Seasoning: To give your zucchini ricotta rolls their iconic Italian flavor, you’ll need garlic powder, Italian seasoning, Kosher salt, and ground pepper. You may also include red pepper flakes for a kick of spice, though this ingredient is optional.
  • Tomato sauce: You can use your favorite marinara sauce (affiliate link) in your lasagna rolls for a quick, store-bought option. If you want to add bold, herby undertones to your dish, you may also use my Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce instead.
  • Shredded mozzarella cheese
  • Fresh herbs: Garnish it with fresh basil or any other herbs you have on hand. Thyme, Italian parsley, or oregano would all work.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Use low-fat or skim cheese: Looking for a way to make these low-carb lasagna roll ups even lighter? To reduce calories, you may use low-fat or skim cheese instead of whole-milk cheese.
  • Frozen spinach: You may use frozen spinach instead of fresh baby spinach in this recipe if you don’t have any fresh leaves on hand. It’s important, however, to let the spinach fully thaw and squeeze out all of its juices before incorporating it into your rolled zucchini lasagna.
  • Cottage cheese: If you want to make your zucchini roll ups without ricotta, substituting the ricotta cheese with cottage cheese is an easy way to add irresistible tanginess (and protein!) to this recipe. You could also purchase dairy-free cottage cheese from brands like Kite Hill for a vegan option. Regardless of what cottage cheese you use, eliminate as much liquid as possible before adding it to your recipe, preferably by straining it in a colander.
  • Vegetarian: It’s easy to transform this meaty dish into vegetarian zucchini roll ups. Simply omit the meat in this recipe and prepare as usual.
  • Vegan: To make your zucchini roll-ups vegan, first omit the egg. Then, substitute the cheese with dairy-free alternatives, such as your favorite vegan ricotta, parmesan, and mozzarella. You could also make vegan tofu ricotta and vegan parmesan at home if you have nutritional yeast on hand.

How to Make Zucchini Lasagna Roll Ups?

There’s no secret to making zucchini roll ups with ricotta and spinach. These expert instructions will give you rich, mouthwatering results without hassle.

Person cutting zucchini thinly to make lasagna roll ups.
  1. Prep the zucchini: We’re going to use my signature method of slicing zucchini noodles for lasagna, which you can read more about in my guide on How to Slice Zucchini Thinly. In a nutshell, you’ll begin by slicing off a small portion of each vegetable from its top and bottom. Then grip the end of one vegetable and use your other hand to slice off thin strips—preferably ⅛-inch thick—using a Y peeler, mandoline, or a sharp knife. Keep in mind that we are cutting the zucchini lengthwise. Once the zucchini becomes too thin to hold, rest it lengthwise on your cutting board and use it to support you as you make the rest of the slices. Make sure, too, that your pieces are whole and as uniform as possible. 
  2. Let the zucchini slices rest: Arrange your strips of zucchini in a single layer on a clean kitchen towel or a few sheets of paper towels. This resting time will allow the zucchini to sweat out excess moisture while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Then, pat dry the top of the strips before assembling your roll-ups.
  3. Saute the meat and spinach: Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once the pan is hot, add the onion and turkey and saute the mixture. Break up any large pieces of meat and cook until crumbled and browned (about two minutes). Then, add the spinach to the skillet and heat until wilted, about 1-2 minutes. Remove the pan from the heat, let it cool, and drain away any excess liquid.
Person making the ricotta filling and rolling zucchini rollups.
  1. Prepare the filling: Add the ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, salt, and black pepper to a large bowl. Mix until thoroughly incorporated.
  2. Add the meat: Transfer the cooled ground turkey to the ricotta mixture and mix until combined.
  3. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  4. Coat the baking dish: Spread ½ cup of tomato sauce at the bottom of a large baking dish (preferably a 9×13-inch casserole dish).
  5. Spread the zucchini: Lay one slice of zucchini flat on its surface. Place one tablespoon of the ricotta filling at one end of the strip and use the back of a spoon to gently spread it across the veggie’s surface, leaving ½ inch uncovered at its end. If any filling spills over the edges of the zucchini, gently push it toward the slice’s center.
Person showing how to assemble zucchini rolls with ricotta mixture.
  1. Roll the zucchini: Beginning at the coated end of a zucchini, gently roll the slice toward the opposite, uncovered end. As you proceed, use your fingers to keep the filling inside.
  2. Arrange the baking dish: Transfer the roll, seam-side-down, into the baking dish. Repeat this process (Steps 8-10) for the remaining rolls, arranging them in the baking dish such that you begin along the short side and work your way across the surface in rows. By the end of the assembly process, you should have approximately 36 roll-ups (granted, you are using a 9X13 baking dish.)
  3. Add the toppings: Spread the remaining tomato sauce in an even layer over the zucchini rolls. Then, sprinkle the top with mozzarella cheese.
  4. Bake: Bake the lasagna roll-ups uncovered for 20 minutes or until bubbly brown.
  5. Serve: Remove the dish from the oven and let them rest for 15 minutes before serving.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

Meal prep is a cinch with this keto zucchini roll ups recipe. This simple guide will help you every step of the way, whether preparing this dish to serve a crowd or saving leftovers to enjoy later.

  • Make ahead: To make this zucchini roll lasagna ahead of time, assemble and bake the dish as instructed. Then, let the rolls cool to room temperature and remove any excess liquid. Cover the dish as tightly as possible with several layers of plastic wrap and store for up to three days in the refrigerator.
  • Store: Once your dinner roll-ups reach room temperature, drain any extra liquid and transfer them to an airtight container. You may then store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your zucchini rollups, let the dish reach room temperature and remove as much excess liquid as possible. Then, transfer them to an airtight container or wrap your dish as tightly as possible with a few layers of stretch film to avoid freezer burn. You can then freeze this recipe for up to a month.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen roll ups, transfer them to the fridge overnight. Then, drain off any excess liquid and reheat them at 350 degrees F. until warm (about 20-30 minutes). 
  • Reheat: When reheating it, first remove as much excess moisture as possible. Then, place them in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated.
Lasagna rolls with zucchini just came out of the oven photographed from the top view.

Serving Suggestions

Ricotta zucchini roll-ups are amazing when it comes to delicious menu ideas. This collection of tasty dishes will fill your table with brilliant color, bright flavors, and finger-licking taste.

  • Serve it on its own: This zucchini lasagna roll recipe—healthy, filling, and delicious—works spectacularly as a main dish. Or, you could use toothpicks to turn this recipe into bite-sized appetizers ready to serve a dinner party crowd.
  • Grains: All you need is a tasty grain to transform your lasagna rolls into a balanced meal. Lemon Quinoa adds a note of bright zest, while Bulgur Pilaf takes less than 30 minutes to give your spread a robustly seasoned Turkish edge.
  • Salads: Spring Mix Salad is a classic if you make zucchini roll ups with ricotta and want to balance your table with something light and crisp. Or, add tangy, herbaceous flavors to your meal with the iconic Friends Salad or my Yogurt Cucumber Salad.
  • Bread: If you love dipping toasty, crisp bread into hearty pasta sauce, you’ll adore serving a loaf of my Crusty No-Knead Bread alongside your zucchini dinner roll-ups. I also love to serve my zucchini rolls with Garlic Bread prepared in the air fryer to cut prep time in half and ensure robust, garlicky flavor in every bite.

Expert Tips

This zucchini roll recipe is a boon for beginner cooks and master Italian chefs alike. Using this pro guide, anyone can prepare rich and tender lasagna rolls any day of the week.

  • Thin slices: You must cut your zucchini into thin pieces, about ⅛-inches thick, to be able to roll them easily. A mandoline or a vegetable peeler is the easiest way to get these delicate, even slices. However, if you don’t have these tools on hand, you can cut your zucchini with a knife, though your pieces might be a little thicker than desired. If you end up with rather thicker slices of zucchini, I recommend precooking them before adding them to your recipe to ensure they’re as dry and pliable as possible. Simply line a baking sheet with parchment paper, arrange your zucchini strips in a single layer, and bake them in a 350-degree F. oven for 5-7 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • Do not skip resting the zucchini slices: This stage is critical for eliminating some of the zucchini’s liquid to avoid ending up with watery lasagna roll ups. In certain renditions of this recipe, one would sprinkle the zucchini slices with salt, an approach we have experimented with, though it did not seem to make a difference in the outcome. 
  • Filling and rolling: Before rolling your lasagna pieces, I highly recommend spreading your ricotta mixture across each zucchini strip, leaving a small, empty space on one end (preferably about ½ inch). This technique for filling and rolling will ensure that the filling is evenly distributed throughout each roll-up and allow for easier assembly. I also suggest only using one tablespoon of filling per roll. Though you may feel the urge to add more, too much of the ricotta mixture will result in it spilling out the edges, and your zucchini slices will likely be too thick to roll properly.
  • Sauce at the bottom: Spreading a thin layer of sauce at the bottom of the casserole dish is a must when cooking in a pan without oil. This layer creates a safe barrier to keep your zucchini lasagna roll-ups from burning and adds more rich tomato flavor to your recipe.
  • Arranging the rolled-up lasagna noodles: Don’t worry about placing your lasagna rolls too close to one another in the baking pan. Because this recipe uses such thinly-sliced zucchini, your strips will be delicate enough to cook in the oven without as much exposed surface area.
  • Excess water: Zucchini naturally contains a lot of water, so many people worry about coming out with watery zucchini lasagna rolls. Though some excess water is inevitable, if you follow my steps for letting the veggie slices rest and removing as much liquid from your ingredients as possible, you should be able to avoid an overly watery zucchini dish. Don’t be afraid, too, to drain excess water from your lasagna rolls before serving and after storage.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress out over this easy zucchini lasagna rolls recipe. This easy FAQ will answer any questions you have, from proper zucchini prep to expert storage tips.

Do you peel zucchini before slicing?

Whether you peel zucchini before cutting it is completely up to personal preference. I prefer to leave the skin on, as it’s extremely mild-tasting and has many antioxidants. However, if you dislike the texture, remove the skin with a vegetable peeler before incorporating it into your zucchini lasagna rollups.

Can you freeze zucchini lasagna rolls?

Yes! To freeze your lasagna rolls, let them cool to room temperature and drain away any excess moisture. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or wrap their dish tightly with several layers of plastic wrap to avoid unwanted freezer burn. After freezing, you can thaw your dish overnight in the fridge and reheat it at 350 degrees F. for 20-30 minutes.

Other Zucchini Recipes You Might Also Like

Tender, sweet, and healthy, zucchini is the ultimate summer ingredient. You’ll love this tasty collection if you’re looking for more veggie recipes as delicious as these stuffed zucchini rolls.

If you try this Zucchini Lasagna Rolls recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Zucchini lasagna rolls fresh out of the oven in a baking dish.
Print

Zucchini Lasagna Rolls Recipe

Try this Zucchini Lasagna Roll-Ups recipe for an easy low-carb, gluten-free and keto-friendly dinner. Made with thinly sliced zucchini, it is a healthier alternative to lasagna rolls made with pasta.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 215kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium zucchini thinly sliced* (36 slices/rolls in total)
  • 8 ounces full-fat ricotta cheese excess liquid drain if there is any (skim cheese would also work)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ small onion finely minced, or a small onion (½ cup)
  • ½ pound ground turkey
  • 6 oz. fresh baby spinach or frozen spinach thawed and drained
  • 1 large egg
  • 3 tablespoons grated parmesan cheese
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder or one minced garlic
  • 2 teaspoons Italian seasoning
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
  • 2/3 cup Tomato Basil Sauce or your favorite Marinara Sauce
  • 1/2 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves as garnish

Instructions

  • Slice zucchini lengthwise using a y-peeler, mandolin slicer or a sharp knife as thinly as you can. We recommend zucchini slices to be ⅛-inch thick if possible.
  • Arrange the zucchini slices in a single layer on a kitchen towel or a few sheets of paper towels. As they rest, you will notice a trace amount of moisture emerging on the surface. Let them sit on the counter while you are working on the rest of the ingredients, and be sure to pat dry before the assembly stage.
  • Meanwhile, make the filling: Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add onion and turkey. Sautee, break up the large chunks of the meat using a wooden spoon and cook until it has crumbled and browned, approximately for 2 minutes. Add the spinach and cook until fully wilted, for 1-2 minutes. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool. Drain off any excess liquid, if there is any, in the skillet.
  • To prepare the filling: In a large bowl, add the ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, salt, and pepper. Mix until fully incorporated.
  • Add the now-cooled turkey spinach mixture to the filling and stir to combine.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  • To assemble, start by spreading the bottom of a 9×13 inch baking dish with half of the tomato sauce.
  • Next, bring a sheet of zucchini, place a tablespoon of the filling mixture towards the bottom, and gently spread it using the back of a spoon, leaving approximately ½ inch of the slice uncovered (this will help avoid the filling from squeezing out when rolling.) If some of the filling spills over the side of the slice, gently push it into the center of the slice.
  • Gently roll the slice toward the uncovered end. As you roll, using your fingers, try to keep the filling in the roll.
  • Place the roll seam side down into the baking dish. Repeat the process until all slices are rolled. In the end, you should have approximately 36 rolls.
  • Spread the remaining tomato sauce on top and sprinkle the mozzarella cheese evenly over.
  • Bake uncovered for 20 minutes or until bubbly brown.
  • Remove from the oven and let it rest for 15 minutes. Garnish with basil and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 36 zucchini rolls, which we think is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make ahead: To make it ahead of time, assemble and bake the dish as instructed. Then, let the rolls cool to room temperature and remove any excess liquid. Cover the dish plastic wrap and store for up to three days in the refrigerator.
  • Store: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, drain any extra liquid and transfer them to an airtight container. You may then store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, let the dish reach room temperature and remove as much excess liquid as possible. Then, transfer them to an airtight container or wrap your dish as tightly as possible with a few layers of stretch film to avoid freezer burn. You can then freeze this recipe for up to a month.
  • Thaw: Thaw it in the fridge overnight. Then, drain off any excess liquid and reheat them at 350 degrees F. until warm (about 20-30 minutes). 
  • Reheat: When reheating your zucchini rolls, first remove as much excess moisture as possible. Then, place them in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 77mg | Sodium: 520mg | Potassium: 701mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 3336IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 215mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Zucchini Lasagna Rolls appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna-rolls/feed/ 0
Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/#comments Mon, 17 Jul 2023 14:18:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3918 Making vegetable lasagna with zucchini is a great way to transform your veggies into a five-star meal. And let me assure you, lasagna with zucchini (instead of noodles) is just as delicious as its version made with pasta. Easy and delicious, zucchini recipes are some of my go-to’s for quick weeknight meals. Zucchini Soup is a light and luscious vegan recipe that comes together in 30 minutes, while Baked Zucchini...

The post Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making vegetable lasagna with zucchini is a great way to transform your veggies into a five-star meal. And let me assure you, lasagna with zucchini (instead of noodles) is just as delicious as its version made with pasta.

Easy and delicious, zucchini recipes are some of my go-to’s for quick weeknight meals. Zucchini Soup is a light and luscious vegan recipe that comes together in 30 minutes, while Baked Zucchini Fritters make the ideal appetizer for anyone looking for yet another creative way of using this summer vegetable.

Vegetable lasagna with zucchini garnished with basil from the top view.

Ingredients

This vegetarian zucchini lasagna recipe only uses simple ingredients to fill your plate and delight your tastebuds with rich Italian flavors.

  • Zucchini: Small- and medium-sized zucchini work best in this recipe, as large zucchini, tend to be more watery and have more seeds. Also, note that there’s no need to peel your zucchini before adding them to your lasagna mixture—especially in summer, during the zucchini season.
  • Olive oil
  • Onion
  • Garlic cloves
  • Fresh baby spinach
  • Ricotta cheese: I recommend using full-fat ricotta cheese to ensure this dish comes out as creamy and rich as possible, being sure to drain away any excess liquid. However, if you don’t have any store-bought ricotta on hand or prefer to make your own, you can also prepare Homemade Ricotta with only four basic ingredients.
  • Egg
  • Parmesan cheese
  • Seasonings: To give your gluten-free lasagna the classic taste of Italian flavors, you’ll need dried oregano, fresh basil, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and ground pepper.
  • Marinara sauce: You can use three cups of your favorite marinara sauce to cut down on prep time, or you can take this recipe to the next level by making your own Tomato Basil Sauce.
Zucchini veggie lasagna ingredients in small portions with text on every ingredient.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Use low-fat or skim cheese: If you want to make your low-carb vegetable lasagna low-fat, too, you may use low-fat or skim cheese instead of whole-milk ricotta.
  • Frozen spinach: Don’t have any fresh spinach on hand? Don’t worry! You can use frozen spinach in this easy zucchini lasagna instead, as long as you fully thaw it and squeeze out all of its juices before adding it to your recipe.
  • Squash: To give your recipe a hint of extra sweetness, try making zucchini squash lasagna instead! Simply mix and match your zucchini with a serving of sliced yellow squash.
  • Cottage cheese: For slightly tangier undertones and an extra helping of protein, you can make your vegetarian lasagna with cottage cheese instead of ricotta cheese. However, be sure to remove as much liquid as possible before adding it to your recipe, preferably by draining the cheese in a colander.
  • Other veggies: Adding more vegetables to your zucchini vegetable lasagna is an easy way to add flavor, color, and extra nutrition to your meal. My favorite add-ins include sautéed mushrooms, carrots, onions, and bell peppers. When adding veggies, it is imperative to sautee and soften them first before adding to the recipe.
  • Vegan: Transforming this dish into a vegan zucchini lasagna recipe is a cinch. First, omit the egg. Then, ensure your vegan lasagna is dairy-free by substituting traditional milk-based cheese with your favorite vegan ricotta, vegan parmesan, and vegan mozzarella. If you prefer to make your own cheese, it only takes five minutes to make tofu ricotta and vegan parmesan with nutritional yeast.
  • Add meat: Satisfying meat eaters is a piece of cake with this versatile zoodle dish. Layer in a half-pound of sauteed ground beef or ground turkey, and prepare your mouth for hearty, savory flavors.

How to Make Zucchini Lasagna

Ever wonder how long to bake zucchini lasagna or how to layer your casserole perfectly? This beginner-friendly guide will show you how to make a veggie lasagna with zucchini that will taste straight out of an Italian restaurant. 

Steps showing how to slice zucchini for lasagna and saute veggies for filling.
  1. Prepare the veggie lasagna noodles: To slice your veggies, I recommend using my go-to method to slice zucchini for lasagna (which I detail more fully in my guide on How to Cut Zucchini for lasagna.) First, cut off a small bit from the top and bottom of each zucchini. Then, hold the end of the zucchini in one hand and use your other hand to shave the veggie lengthwise into thin slices using a veggie peeler, Y peeler, sharp knife, or mandoline slicer. These slices will serve as your vegetable lasagna “noodles.” When the veggie becomes too thin to grasp, lay it on your cutting board and use it as support while you finish slicing.
  2. Let the slices rest: Arrange the zucchini slices in a single layer over a clean kitchen towel or a few paper towels. Let them rest while you prepare the remaining ingredients, as they will naturally release excess moisture during this time. Pat the zucchini dry when ready to assemble the lasagna.
  3. Saute the onions: Heat the olive oil in a medium skillet over medium-high heat. Then, add the onions and sauté, stirring occasionally, until they turn translucent (about five minutes). Lower the heat to medium, add the garlic, and sauté the mixture for one more minute.
  4. Cook the spinach: Add the spinach to the pan and cook until wilted (approximately 2-3 minutes). Then, remove the skillet from the heat, and let it cool for a few minutes. While it rests, begin preparing the ricotta mixture. However, before adding it to the filling, be sure to drain any excess liquid from the pan.
Steps showing how to make the ricotta filling for no pasta lasagna vegetarian.
  1. Make the ricotta filling: In a medium bowl, mix the ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, oregano, basil, lemon zest, salt, and black pepper.
  2. Add the spinach: Add the sauteed spinach and onion to the ricotta mixture. Stir until thoroughly combined.
  3. Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
A collage of steps showing how to layer zucchini noodle lasagna.
  1. Add the tomato sauce: Take out a 9×13-inch baking dish, and spread ¼ cup of the tomato sauce over the bottom.
  2. Start the assembling: Cover the lasagna pan with zucchini noodles in a single thin layer. Arrange the slices on top of the tomato sauce, beginning at the shorter side and working across the pan. Cover empty spaces with extra pieces, using about 12-13 slices per layer.
  3. Add the ricotta filling: Spread ⅔ cup of the ricotta mixture evenly over the layer of zucchini noodles. Then, spoon another ½ cup of the tomato sauce on top, and sprinkle that with ⅓ cup of mozzarella cheese.
A collage of images showing how to bake zucchini lasagna vegetarian recipe.
  1. Finish assembling the vegetable noodle lasagna: Repeat the assembly process (Steps 8-10) four more times, resulting in five layers in total. Top it with the remaining tomato sauce and shredded mozzarella.
  2. Bake: Cover the spinach and zucchini lasagna with aluminum foil. Bake the dish for 30 minutes. Remove the aluminum foil from the top of the baked zucchini lasagna and cook it for 15 minutes or until the top turns a bubbly brown.
  3. Rest, garnish, and serve: Let the dish cool for 15 minutes, and if any excess liquid remains, drain it before serving.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

This easy zucchini lasagna recipe is just what every busy chef needs. This delicious dish is perfect for effortless meal prep, storage, and hands-free reheating.

  • Make ahead: This zucchini meatless lasagna is a great make-ahead dish for busy weeknight dinners. First, assemble and bake the lasagna as instructed. Then, bring the dish to room temperature, drain any excess liquid, and place it in an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to three days. When ready to eat, reheat the lasagna in a 350-degree F. oven for 30 minutes or until it warms through.
  • Storage of leftovers: Let your veggie lasagna come to room temperature before storing. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to three days. Also, drain the lasagna before eating, as it will likely develop extra moisture during storage. 
  • Reheat: After storing your no-meat lasagna in the fridge, drain any excess liquid and reheat it in a 350-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or until warm.
  • Freeze: When freezing lasagna with spinach and zucchini, let it reach room temperature first. Drain all excess liquid, then portion it into an airtight container or cover it tightly with stretch film to avoid freezer burn. Transfer the covered dish to the freezer for upto a month.
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen veggie lasagna overnight in the refrigerator. Be sure to drain any excess liquid before reheating. Then, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated through. 

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be an Italian chef to prepare a gourmet vegetable lasagna recipe with zucchini. These master tips will ensure your healthy no-pasta recipe always comes out rich, tender, and flavorful.

  • Excess liquid/removing moisture: Because zucchini carries so much water, letting your slices rest on a towel before incorporating them into your lasagna assembly is essential. This time allows the zucchini to naturally sweat out its excess liquid, keeping your zucchini lasagna from becoming soggy. Though some recipes ask you to salt your zucchini before cooking, we found this extra step unnecessary.
  • Layering: Do not stress about the zucchini noodles being perfect. As long as each layer is covered with veggie noodles and then properly spread with tomato sauce and ricotta mixture, you should be fine. It is okay if your slices are imperfect. Simply cover as much of your lasagna surface with zucchini as possible, and your bake will come out perfectly.
  • Equipment: It is important that your zucchini is sliced thinly (⅛-inch pieces.) When we were developing this recipe, we initially tried to slice zucchini noodles using a mandoline slicer. While it did the job, we found that a vegetable peeler was easier to use. If you own a Y-peeler, that is even better, but either one would work.
  • For thicker Slices: If you do not own a peeler or a mandoline, then you can use a sharp knife to slice the zucchini. Though keep in mind that cutting thin, equal strips may be more difficult. If your knife-cut slices are thicker in width, then you can pre-bake them before adding them to your lasagna layers to remove excess moisture and reach a tender consistency. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and arrange your zucchini strips in a single layer. Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F. and bake them for 8-10 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • Bake covered then uncovered: Cheese tends to cook more quickly than the other lasagna layers, so it’s important to bake your dish covered for the first thirty minutes and uncovered for an additional fifteen. This way, your lasagna will cook fully without drying out, and your cheese will lightly melt and brown without burning.
  • Rest before serving: Let this grain-free lasagna rest for 10-15 minutes after removing it from the oven. This resting time will help the lasagna solidify its shape, making it easier to cut and serve neatly.
Person cutting squash lasagna from the top view.

What to Serve with this Meatless Zucchini Lasagna?

Vegetarian lasagna with zucchini is the perfect meal for any night of the week. This collection of menu ideas will complete your table with everything from flaky garlic bread to succulent poultry.

  • Bread: No one can resist sopping up gooey lasagna sauce with a hearty piece of bread. A crusty loaf, like ike my No-Knead Bread, is ideal for balancing the tender texture of the zucchini lasagna noodles. For something quick (and super flavorful!), our Air Fryer Garlic Bread also makes an excellent addition to the meal.
  • Salad: Green salads are the way to go if you’re looking for a light, nutritious side to pair with your healthy zucchini lasagna recipe. Creamy Caesar Salad is a classic Italian option, while Quinoa Avocado Salad is a colorful and crisp mix that comes together in just 15 minutes. For other equally healthy, filling sides, you could also whip up any of my other Quinoa Salad Recipes and prepare yourself for a brilliant spread of delicious food.
  • With meat: Want to add some hearty protein to your meat-free lasagna? This cheesy, veggie-packed recipe is great for serving alongside Chicken Parm, Chicken Fricassee, and Grilled Cornish Hens.

FAQs

How do you keep zucchini lasagna from getting watery?

Zucchini tends to carry a lot of juices, so to avoid watery zucchini lasagna, I recommend letting your veggie slices rest on paper towels for a few minutes before adding them to your baking pan. This resting time will help draw out excess moisture before baking. Other ways to reduce wateriness include letting your baked lasagna rest after cooking so water can either evaporate or more evenly permeate its layers. It’s also a good rule of thumb to select fresh, small- or medium-sized zucchini, as they contain less fluid than larger, less fresh veggies. Still, because of the nature of zucchini, your veggie lasagna will inevitably have a little more liquid than classic lasagna, so don’t worry if you have to drain the top of your dish before serving or during storage.

Can zucchini lasagna be frozen?

You can freeze the dish once it reaches room temperature. Just be sure to transfer your lasagna to an airtight container or cover it as tightly as possible with several layers of stretch film to keep it from becoming freezer burnt. You can then thaw your frozen vegetarian zucchini pasta overnight in the fridge and reheat it for about 20 minutes at 350 degrees F.

Other Vegetarian Dishes with Summer Vegetables

Nothing tastes as light yet filling as this summer vegetable lasagna. However, if you want to make the most of your summer garden, these other healthy veggie dishes will satisfy all your cravings.

If you try this Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Print

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna Recipe

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna made with zucchini "noodles" instead of pasta noodles!  Layered with ricotta & tomato sauce, this healthy, gluten-free, grain-free, and keto-friendly meal is the perfect summer meal.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 269kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized zucchini approximately 1 pound in total (60 slices)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or crushed through a garlic press
  • 6 oz. fresh baby spinach roughly chopped
  • 1 ½ cups full-fat ricotta cheese* excess liquid drained
  • 1 large egg
  • 1/2 cup parmesan cheese
  • 2 teaspoons oregano dried (optional)
  • 3 tablespoons basil fresh and chopped plus more for garnish
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
  • 3 cups Tomato Basil Sauce or your favorite storebought Marinara Sauce
  • 2 ⅓ cups mozzarella shredded

Instructions

  • To prepare the zucchini: Cut a small slice off the end of each zucchini. Slice the zucchini thinly lengthwise using either a mandoline, a y peeler or a sharp knife*.
  • Arrange the zucchini slices in a single layer on a kitchen towel or a few sheets of paper towels. As they rest, you will notice a trace amount of moisture emerging on the surface. Let them sit on the counter while you are working on the rest of the ingredients, and be sure to pat dry before the assembly stage.
  • In a medium skillet, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat, then add the onions and saute, stirring occasionally, until translucent, approximately 5 minutes. Lower the heat to medium and add the garlic and saute for an additional 1 minute.
  • Add the spinach and cook until fully wilted, 2-3 minutes. Remove from the heat, and let it cool for a few minutes while you are making the ricotta mixture. If there is any liquid in the pan, drain it prior to adding to the ricotta mixture.
  • To prepare the ricotta filling: Mix together ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, oregano, basil, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a medium bowl.
  • Add in the spinach mixture and stir to combine.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  • To assemble the zucchini lasagna: Spread ¼ cup of tomato sauce at the bottom of a 9×13-inch casserole dish.
  • Arrange the zucchini slices on top of the tomato sauce, placing them across the shorter width and covering the empty spots with more zucchini slices. You should use around 12-13 slices per layer.
  • Spread ⅔ cup of the filling (~7 oz.) over the zucchini layer. Spoon ½ cup of the tomato sauce and sprinkle with ⅓ cup of the mozzarella cheese.
  • Repeat the process four more times (5 layers in total), ending with the remaining tomato sauce and shredded mozzarella.
  • Cover with aluminum foil and bake for 30 minutes.
  • Remove the foil and bake for an additional 15 minutes so that the top will become bubbly brown. Let it cool for 15 minutes on the kitchen counter.
  • Garnish with some torn fresh basil leaves, slice and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe is made in a 9X13 baking dish that yields 9 slices of zucchini lasagna. The calorie and nutrition information below is per slice.
  • Ricotta Cheese: You can make your own ricotta or buy it from the store. However, be sure to drain any excess liquid before adding it to the mixture.
  • Excess liquid: If you have excess liquid in the baking dish after cooking, you can drain it out before serving. Letting the lasagne rest for 15 minutes will help the liquid set up. 
  • Make Ahead: First, assemble and bake the lasagna as instructed. Then, bring it to room temperature, drain any excess liquid, and place it in an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to three days. When ready to eat, reheat the lasagna in a 350-degree F. oven for 30 minutes or until it is thoroughly warmed.
  • Storage of leftovers: Bring the lasagna to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and keep it in the refrigerator for up to three days. It is possible that it will develop extra moisture during storage, so feel free to drain it before reheating.
  • Reheat: Reheat it in a 350-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or until warm.
  • Freeze: If you want to freeze this dish, we recommend baking it first. Simply bring it to room temperature and cover it tightly with stretch film to avoid freezer burn. Transfer the covered dish to the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thaw: Thaw it in the fridge overnight. Be sure to drain any excess liquid before reheating. Then, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 269kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 520mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2645IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 358mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/feed/ 6
How To Cut Zucchini https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/#respond Fri, 14 Jul 2023 17:58:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69044 With this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn 6 easy ways to cut zucchini: trimmed, rounds, spears, diced, matchsticks, and thinly sliced. Follow our easy steps and gain all the confidence you need to use zucchini in all your favorite recipes. How to Trim Zucchini? The key to proper zucchini meal prep is ensuring your veggies are clean, unblemished, and fresh before slicing them. In just two simple steps, you can...

The post How To Cut Zucchini appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
With this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn 6 easy ways to cut zucchini: trimmed, rounds, spears, diced, matchsticks, and thinly sliced. Follow our easy steps and gain all the confidence you need to use zucchini in all your favorite recipes.

How to Trim Zucchini?

The key to proper zucchini meal prep is ensuring your veggies are clean, unblemished, and fresh before slicing them. In just two simple steps, you can transform this summer vegetable into dozens of low-carb meals, from a hearty stew to a savory stir-fry. 

A person showing how to trim zucchini in a collage of images.
  1. Wash and dry: Wash the zucchini under cold water, using your hand to remove dirt and debris. Use a clean kitchen towel to dry the veggie fully.
  2. Trim zucchini: Use a sharp paring knife to remove any remaining blemishes or bruises. Then, trim off the top and bottom of the squash—both the stem end and the base—cutting off about ½ inches on either side. Discard the chopped-off bits.

Do You Peel Zucchini Before Slicing?

It’s completely up to your preference when deciding whether or not to peel your zucchini before cutting. 

I personally like to keep the skin on before chopping. The skin is soft, thin, and perfectly edible—especially when the squash is in season. Plus, the skin often contains the highest concentrations of antioxidants and potassium, which may account for its ability to help bring down blood sugar and insulin levels.

Person shown as she is peeling a zucchini.

However, if you prefer, you can peel the zucchini skin. To do so, hold your trimmed zucchini firmly in one hand and use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin. Be sure to rotate the zucchini as you work your way around its surface until all of the skin is peeled.

How to Cut Round Zucchini?

Zucchini rounds make the perfect cut for many of my favorite preparation methods. Add olive oil to your frying pan and sautee panko-crusted veggie coins for a savory sautéed zucchini side, or fire up the grill and prepare yourself for smoky and tender vegetable kabobs. No matter how you cook it, zucchini makes the perfect summer vegetable to serve on the side of a main dish.

Images showing how to cut round zucchini.

However, remember that the ideal thickness of your rounds will depend on your recipe. For instance, cutting zucchini thickly is best when making kabobs, as the veggies will better withstand the grill’s high heat and the kabob skewer. However, sautéed zucchini works best with thinner slices to ensure thorough cooking.

  • How to Cut Zucchini Rounds? Use a sharp knife to chop the veggie perpendicular to its length. Beginning at one end of the squash, slice round pieces in your desired thickness.
A collage of images showing how to cut zucchini half-moons.
  • How to Cut Zucchini into Half-Moons?
    1. Slice the zucchini down its middle: Halve the zucchini, cutting lengthwise down its body. 
    2. Cut half moons: Lay the zucchini halves on their long edges next to one another. Arrange them perpendicularly to your knife, and chop half-moon cuts in your preferred thickness from one end of the zucchini to the other.

How to Cut Zucchini Spears?

If you’ve ever wondered how to cut zucchini fries or what shape to cut your zucchini for optimal grilling, this guide to slicing spears is just what you need. This shape is sturdy enough to take the heat of grilling and roasting, and it makes an irresistible side when coated in a panko-parmesan mixture and baked or air-fried.

A person cutting zucchini into spears.
  1. Cut the zucchini in half: Slice your zucchini lengthwise into two halves.
  2. Slice the spears: Cut lengthwise along each half, slicing each into three equal pieces.
  3. Trim: If necessary, cut your spears into shorter or thinner pieces to match your recipe.

Again, don’t be afraid to cut your spears to your desired length. For instance, if we are making roasted zucchini spears, we cut each zucchini in half, then cut each half into three equal slices—a great way to get firm, long strips of squash. However, you may prefer to chop the zucchini spears into smaller lengths should you prefer a more snack-friendly recipe such as zucchini fries.

How to Dice Zucchini?

Cubed zucchini—also known as diced zucchini and chopped zucchini—is a must-have for dozens of tasty recipes. 

Because of the bite-size pieces that result from this cutting method, it’s perfect for vegetable soups or stews—my favorite being a creamy, vegan-friendly Zucchini Soup! You can make the ultimate healthy side dish in minutes with just a handful of ingredients.

Two photos showing how to chop zucchini.
  1. Slice the zucchini in half: Cut your zucchini in half lengthwise.
  2. Cut spears: Draw your knife lengthwise along each half of the zucchini. Each half should yield about three equal spears, depending on your desired thickness.
  3. Cube the zucchini: Align your spears perpendicularly to your knife and dice the zucchini into your desired cube size. 

How to Cut Zucchini into Matchsticks?

There’s no need to stress when you want how to cut zucchini for stir fry. This matchstick cutting method—also known as a julienne cut—results in beautiful, thin strips of zucchini that make the ideal addition to dozens of stir-fry recipes.

Person showing how to cut zucchini in to matchsticks idea for stir fries.
  1. Halve the zucchini: Slice the zucchini lengthwise to get two halves. 
  2. Cut it into strips: Cut each piece lengthwise, slicing each half into smaller, thinner strips. If any strip is too large, you may cut it even more finely.

How to Thinly Slice Zucchini

Slicing zucchini thin is a perfect way to get exquisitely fine veggie strips, sheets, or ribbons.

The delicate, tender slices of thinly sliced zucchini are great for baked squash dishes. This cutting method is especially convenient when you need to slice zucchini for lasagna recipes with gooey cheese and a robust pasta sauce like my Zucchini Lasagna and Zucchini Lasagna rolls. They also make a great addition to delectably light salads, like my Zucchini Kale Salad.

I recommend using a sharp vegetable peeler when making these thin slices—ideally, a Y peeler if you have one. However, a sharp knife would also work to make zucchini ribbons, though getting uniform slices might be more difficult.

Person showing how to slice zucchini thinly.
  1. Shave the zucchini: Hold one end of the zucchini firmly in one hand. Use your free hand to grate your vegetable lengthwise with your vegetable peeler.
  2. Transfer to a cutting board: The zucchini will become too thin to hold as you start coming to the end of your peeling. When you can no longer easily grip your veggie, lay it on your cutting board and use the surface as support as you slice the final thin ribbons.

You can also slice your zucchini with a mandoline slicer to produce similarly thin, equal strips of vegetables. However, keep in mind that unless you have a protective glove (affiliate link), it may be difficult to get your veggies to stick to the blades while performing the slicing motion. Still, this easy kitchen tool is incredibly helpful when you have gloves on hand—even without a mandoline guard!

FAQs

Learning how to cut a zucchini is a no-brainer when for beginner-friendly kitchen skills. However, this easy FAQ will answer any remaining questions, from how to store zucchini to ideal cooking methods.

How to cut zucchini for grilling?

 The best way to cut zucchini for grilling is to slice it into spears. This cutting method is sturdy enough to withstand high heat and will result in perfectly tender, cooked pieces when grilling zucchini.

Can zucchini be frozen?

Yes! If you want to cut zucchini ahead of time, I highly recommend blanching your slices before placing them in the freezer. Blanching helps avoid flavor loss, discoloring, or unwanted texture changes—no one likes mushy, watery zucchini! To store your squash in the freezer, cut them into your desired shape, preferably at least ½-inch thick. Then, place the pieces into a large pot of unsalted, boiling water for 1-3 minutes or until they turn bright green, being careful not to overcook them. Immediately use a slotted spoon or colander to transfer the zucchini into an ice bath and stir until the veggies cool. Then, place the slices in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and paper towels. You may also use another sheet of paper towel to pat dry the tops of the veggies gently. Once you eliminate the excess moisture, transfer the baking sheet to the freezer for a few hours or until frozen. Then, portion the veggies into your desired amounts and place them in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store your zucchini in the freezer for up to six months.

How do I store cut zucchini in the fridge?

To keep your sliced zucchini in a refrigerator, cut your vegetable into your preferred shape and size. Then, place your veggie pieces into an airtight container or a Ziploc bag, squeezing out as much air as possible. Your zucchini will stay fresh—preferably in your fridge’s crisper drawer—for 3-4 days. Also, because zucchini tends to release excess water during storage, be sure to drain your pieces before using them in your recipe.

Similar How-To Guides

Need a refresher on sharpening your knife skills when cutting veggies? Here are a few more how-to guides you might also like:

Various cuts of zucchini on a white marble with text on the image.
Print

How To Cut Zucchini (6 Ways!)

Learn how to cut zucchini in 6 different ways:  trimmed, cut into rounds, spears, diced, mathcsticks, and sliced thinly. Follow this easy step-by-step guide to sharpen your knife skills and use zucchini with confidence in your recipes.
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 zucchini

Ingredients

  • 1 zucchini

Instructions

  • Rinse the zucchini under cool water. Use your hand to remove dirt and debris, then dry with a clean kitchen towel.
  • Use a sharp knife and sturdy cutting board to slice off the top and bottom ends of the zucchini. Slice off any blemishes or bruises. Discard the removed pieces.
  • Cut the zucchini according to your preferred method below.

Zucchini Rounds

  • Cut the zucchini in half lengthwise.
  • Beginning at one end, cut the zucchini perpendicularly to its length. Slice round pieces in your desired thickness.

Zucchini Half-Moons

  • Halve the zucchini down the length of its body.
  • Set the two halves next to one another, cut-side down and perpendicular to your knife. Begin at one end to slice down the veggie halves, cutting half-moon pieces in your preferred thickness.

Zucchini Spears

  • Cut the zucchini lengthwise into two halves.
  • Slice each half lengthwise into three equal pieces.
  • If desired, cut the spears into shorter or thinner pieces.

Diced Zucchini

  • Slice the zucchini in half down its length. Cut each half lengthwise into three equal slices.
  • Rotate the slices so they lie perpendicularly to your knife. Begin at one end and dice the zucchini into cubes of your preferred size.

Zucchini Matchsticks

  • Halve the zucchini lengthwise.
  • Cut each half along its length into your desired thickness. If desired, you may cut your slices shorter to match your recipe.

Thinly Sliced Zucchini

  • Firmly grasp one end of the zucchini in hand. With your other hand, draw a vegetable peeler (you can use a regular vegetable peeler or Y peeler) lengthwise along the vegetable.
  • Lay the zucchini on the cutting board when it becomes too thin to hold. Use the surface as a support to finish peeling down its surface.

Notes

  • Peeling zucchini is optional, as zucchini skin is edible. If you decide to peel your zucchini, be sure to trim it first. Then, firmly hold one end of the zucchini in one hand. Use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin, rotating the vegetable as you work your way around its surface.
  • Mandolin Slicer: You can also slice your zucchini with a mandoline slicer to produce similarly thin, equal strips of vegetables. However, keep in mind that unless you have a protective glove, it may be difficult to get your veggies to stick to the blades while performing the slicing motion. For that reason, we prefer a vegetable peeler instead of a mandolin slicer for cutting thinly zucchini slices (to make our Zucchini Lasagna recipe.)

The post How To Cut Zucchini appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Garlic Bread https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/#comments Fri, 14 Jul 2023 13:39:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68957 With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes. How to Make Garlic Bread...

The post Air Fryer Garlic Bread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes.

Air Fryer Garlic Bread on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You can say goodbye to complicated Italian recipes with this super-easy side dish. You only need a handful of ingredients to make air fryer homemade garlic bread.

Ingredients to make garlic bread in air fryer with sliced bread.
  • Bread: During our recipe testing, we found that the best bread for this delicious garlic bread recipe is a French baguette because of its fluffy insides and firm yet crusty exterior. Day-old bread, too, is preferable as it is drier compared to a fresh loaf. However, you can also make garlic bread with white, Italian, or French bread if you don’t have a baguette. If you want to make your own loaf, you could also whip up my favorite crusty bread, aka No-Knead Bread, for an effortless solution. However, remember that the air frying time may need to be modified based on the type of bread you are using. Irrespective of the bread variety, we recommend cutting your bread into ½-inch slices to ensure proper cooking.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter is the best choice for garlic bread because it keeps your side from tasting overly salty when paired with parmesan cheese. However, if you want to make this recipe without cheese, I recommend using salted butter or adding a touch of flaky sea salt or Kosher salt to your butter mixture.
  • Garlic: It’s essential to use finely minced garlic in this recipe to ensure its flavors evenly coat each slice of bread. If you prefer fresh garlic, I recommend using a garlic press (affiliate link) to chop the ingredient into an ultra-fine paste. If you don’t have any fresh garlic in your pantry, you may substitute this ingredient for an equal amount of garlic powder. You could also use Roasted Garlic Cloves instead for a rich, caramelized taste.
  • Parsley: Parsley is essential to giving this dish its herby undertones and a pop of bright color. You can use dried or fresh parsley if you chop it thinly.
  • Shredded parmesan cheese: I usually use shredded parmesan when I make cheesy garlic bread in the air fryer, giving each bite a touch of nutty, rich flavor. However, shaved parmesan or shredded mozzarella cheese would also work.

How to Make Garlic Bread in the Air Fryer?

Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a simple way to enjoy warm, perfectly toasted sides every night of the week—or even a quick snack! Plus, it only takes six steps and no lengthy oven time.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to make garlic bread in the air fryer.
  1. Make the garlic butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese.
  2. Coat the bread slices: Spread about one teaspoon of the butter mixture onto each slice of bread, covering the entire surface.
  3. Transfer the bread: Arrange the buttered bread slices in the air fryer basket. Make sure they lay in a single layer without any overlap. If all your bread doesn’t fit, you may need to cook them in two batches.
  4. Air fry the garlic toast: Toast the garlic bread in the air fryer for approximately five minutes or until golden brown.
  5. Serve: Serve the toasted garlic bread while still warm.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This recipe for garlic bread in the air fryer is an easy way to simplify your meal prep. Prepare this recipe ahead of time for an easy crowd-ready side, or store your leftover garlic bread to enjoy throughout the week.

  • Make-ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, make the garlic butter mixture up to one day beforehand and slice your bread into ½-inch slices. Then, store the butter mixture in an airtight container in the fridge and keep the bread slices separately, spreading the pieces with the softened butter just before air frying. If you’re preparing for a dinner party and won’t have time to spread the slices before cooking, you can also coat the bread slices with the butter mixture one day in advance. Then, arrange them in a single layer on a sheet pan, cover them tightly with stretch film or aluminum foil, and store them in the fridge until ready to cook.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature to make frozen garlic bread for later use. Then, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight freezer-safe container (or Ziploc bag) in the freezer until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices when reheating garlic bread in an air fryer. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

What to Serve with Air Fried Garlic Bread?

Cooking garlic bread in the air fryer is one of the best ways to ensure a five-star meal any day of the week. This simple collection of recipes will satisfy any craving, from creamy pasta to light salads.

Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to toast French bread in the air fryer. With this expert guide, you’ll enjoy deliciously crisp, heartily flavored garlic bread in no time.

  • Evenly sliced bread: When making air fryer garlic bread with sliced bread, slicing your loaf into evenly thick pieces is imperative. The thickness of your slices will directly affect how long they take to cook., so I recommend cutting ½-inch portions to ensure ideal toasting. 
  • Spread butter evenly: An easy way to give each bite of your garlic bread a delectably bold flavor is to spread your butter mixture over your slices evenly. For best results, only about one teaspoon of butter per slice (granted, you are using French baguette slices), as too much will result in soggy bread.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer: Be sure to arrange your garlic bread in the air fryer in a single layer without any overlap to get evenly browned slices. You may have to cook this recipe in multiple batches if you have extra pieces of bread.
  • Different air fryer brands: How long it takes to air fry garlic bread may change depending on the air fryer you own. We tested this recipe both in Ninja Foodie and Instant Pot air fryers. It took slightly shorter to cook Ninja Foodi garlic bread than its Instant Pot air fryer version. Therefore, we recommend using this recipe as a general guide and watching your slices closely to ensure they’re perfectly golden brown before serving.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Because toasting French bread in an air fryer takes so little time, you must watch your bread slices while they cook to keep them from burning—especially when you add parmesan cheese.

FAQs

Making fresh garlic bread in an air fryer is a beginner-ready recipe that comes together with minimal effort. Below, I’ve answered all your questions about this easy dish, taking the stress out of the process.

Can you air-fry garlic bread?

Yes! Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a quick and easy way to ensure robustly flavored, evenly toasted slices any day of the week. And the best part, it is much quicker than making it in the oven.

What is the best time and temperature to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

I recommend air-frying your garlic bread for about five minutes at 350 degrees F. However, this time may change depending on the thickness of your slices and the brand of your air fryer.

How long to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

When making garlic bread in an air fryer that’s not frozen, you’ll need about five minutes at 350 degrees F. to give your slices an ideal warmth and crispiness.

How long to reheat garlic bread in an air fryer?

To warm up garlic bread in an air fryer, preheat your air fryer to 300 degrees F. Then, toast your slices for 2-3 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

How long to toast frozen garlic bread in an air fryer?

To cook frozen garlic bread, set your air fryer to 350 degrees F. and cook the slices for 5-7 minutes or until golden brown.

How to cook store bought garlic bread in an air fryer?

Though instructions may vary between brands, it only takes five minutes at 350 degrees F. to air-fry Texas Toast (prepackaged.) However, keep in mind that the timing might slightly change based on the brand you are using. Therefore, we recommend watching your batches closely when making store-bought air-fried garlic bread.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

No one can resist the hassle-free, tasty eats possible with an air fryer. If you liked this air fryer garlic toast, here are a few other easy air fryer recipes you might also like.

If you try this Air Fryer Garlic Bread recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried garlic bread on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Garlic Bread Recipe (Fresh or Frozen)

Making fresh garlic bread in the air fryer is possibly the easiest and quickest way to treat yourself to a delicious side dish or appetizer. Not to mention, using your air fryer cuts down on the cooking time, allowing you to enjoy your garlic bread in minutes.
Course Bread, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup unsalted butter at room temperature (2 ounces)
  • 5 cloves garlic crushed through a garlic press or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley or chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated (optional*)
  • 1 baguette sliced into ½-inch thick slices

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese (if using) in a bowl.
  • Spread the butter mixture evenly onto each slice of bread, approximately 1 teaspoon per slice.
  • Place the garlic toast slices in the air fryer in a single layer, ensuring that they are not overlapping. Depending on the size of your air fryer, if they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for approximately 5 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Serve immediately while they are still warm.
  • Any leftover browned slices can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. You can reheat in the air fryer at 300 degrees F for 2-3 minutes until warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 slices of French baguette bread. The nutritional information below is per slice.
  • Bread: You can use any other bread you have on hand. Italian bread, sourdough bread, French bread, and even ciabatta would all work. However, keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of bread and air frying time. We recommend slicing in ½-inch slices for the best results. We also recommend day-old bread as it absorbs the garlic-butter mixture better.
  • Parmesan Cheese: If you decide to make this recipe without parmesan cheese, add in 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt into the butter mixture.
  • Garlic: We found that minced fresh garlic was way better than garlic powder. However, the two can be used interchangeably in a pinch. If you do have the time, we recommend trying this recipe with Roasted Garlic or Air Fried Garlic for truly next-level garlic bread.
  • Parsley: If you do not have dried parsley, you can substitute it with fresh, but it should be finely chopped when incorporating it into the butter mixture. Alternatively, you can use other dried or fresh herbs such as thyme, oregano, and rosemary. 
  • Keep in mind that individual air fryer brands may perform differently, so consider this recipe as a starting point and adjust the cook time according to your personal preference.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight Ziploc bag in the freezer until ready to cook.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices before reheating. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 197mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 154IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Garlic Bread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/feed/ 2
Grilled Sockeye Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 17:05:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68750 It’s a fact: Once you make wild salmon on the grill, you’ll crave fresh seafood dinners all year round. The good news is that countless other recipes for wild-caught salmon will effortlessly fill your table with omega-3s and rich, tender flavors. Add a brilliantly sophisticated freshness to your spread with an iconic Salmon Nicoise Salad, or delight your tastebuds with the creamy Thai taste of Salmon Coconut Soup. You can’t...

The post Grilled Sockeye Salmon appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s a fact: Once you make wild salmon on the grill, you’ll crave fresh seafood dinners all year round. The good news is that countless other recipes for wild-caught salmon will effortlessly fill your table with omega-3s and rich, tender flavors. Add a brilliantly sophisticated freshness to your spread with an iconic Salmon Nicoise Salad, or delight your tastebuds with the creamy Thai taste of Salmon Coconut Soup. You can’t go wrong with these easy fish recipes!

Grilled red salmon with fresh vegetables and herbs on the side.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To prepare this smoky recipe for fresh sockeye salmon on the grill, you only need two sets of simple ingredients—fish and seasoning.

For the fish:

  • Wild Alaskan sockeye salmon: I prefer a fresh, whole salmon fillet for this recipe, though you may also use pre-cut fillets if you prefer easier salmon portions. Red salmon tends to be in season from May through July, but if you want to make this dish out-of-season or don’t have access to fresh alternatives, you can also use frozen sockeye salmon fillets. Just be sure to thaw them fully before roasting them.
Ingredients for grilling sockeye salmon on a marble.

For seasoning:

I use a very basic seasoning mixture to prepare my sockeye salmon for grilling.  Because, if you have ever cooked it, you know that Pacific salmon is already delicious by itself and doesn’t need much. 

So, in terms of seasoning, this easy recipe uses a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry, but it will give your grilled salmon an irresistibly light, zesty, and robust flavor profile.

  • Olive oil
  • Lemon juice
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Garlic or garlic powder: Though optional, this pantry-ready addition adds bold, smoky undertones to this BBQ sockeye salmon recipe. Simply add it on top of your fillets or mix it into your seasoning mixture before brushing your fish. However, fresh minced garlic easily burns over high heat, so keep in mind that this addition may result in slightly charred notes in your seasoning for sockeye salmon.
  • Fresh Herbs: I like to sprinkle my grilled salmon with fresh dill, but any fresh herbs you like and have on hand would work for this recipe.
  • Lemon Slices: Serve it with fresh lemon slices or grill them for the dreamy char and grill marks.

How to Grill Sockeye Salmon on a Gas Grill?

This grilled sockeye salmon recipe is a godsend for quick, delicious meals. With this effortless guide, you’ll enjoy tender, flavorful grilled fillets in under ten minutes.

  1. Prepare the grill: Preheat the grill to 350 degrees F.
Person preparing sockeye salmon for grilling in a collage of photos.
  1. Dry the fillet: Use a paper towel to pat dry both sides of the salmon.
  2. Mix the seasoning: In a small mixing bowl, whisk the olive oil, salt, and pepper until fully combined.
  3. Brush the salmon: Brush both sides of the salmon fillet with the olive oil mixture.
  4. Scrape and clean grill: Scrape the grill grates with a wire grill brush until you remove all leftover food residue. Fill a bowl with oil, and dip a wad of paper towel inside. Use this oiled towel to coat the grates generously.
  5. Grill the salmon: Place the sockeye salmon on the grill, skin side down. Cook the fish uncovered for three minutes or until it releases easily from the grates when lifted with a spatula.
Wild caught Alaskan Salmon on the grill showing grill marks.
  1. Flip the fillet: Use two spatulas to flip the salmon carefully. Grill the sockeye salmon for an additional three minutes.
  2. Let the fish rest: Transfer the grilled wild salmon onto a plate and loosely cover it with a tent of aluminum foil for a few minutes.
  3. Serve: If desired, drizzle the top of the salmon with lemon juice and garnish it with fresh dill. Enjoy while still warm.

How to Store and Reheat?

This Pacific salmon recipe makes an excellent option for easy meal prep because you can enjoy it both warm, room temperature, or cold. With these simple storage tips, you won’t have to sacrifice a single bite of this sumptuous dish.

  • Storage: To store your grilled salmon fillet, let it reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to two days.
  • Reheat: The secret to keeping your leftover grilled salmon from drying out is to reheat it in a low-heat oven—preferably 300 degrees F.—for 2-3 minutes or until warmed through.

What to Serve With Grilled Alaskan Salmon?

Grilling sockeye salmon is a great way to get diverse, smoky meals all summer long. This collection of tasty sides—from tender potatoes to tangy salsas—pairs excellently with this heart-healthy meal.

  • Grilled vegetables: Nearly any veggie would work as a side when you grill wild salmon. I particularly love to serve this fish recipe alongside grilled asparagus and grilled zucchini, and Mexican Street Corn is a creamy, flavorful side no one can resist. You can also grill the lemons of this recipe for added presentation and to give your fish an enticing smokiness, though this step is optional.
  • Salsa and sauces: Adding sauce is an easy way to add delectable complexity to this simply grilled salmon recipe. Grilled salmon with Pineapple Salsa is a classic dish for summertime barbecue. But for a more robust, rich flavor, you can also serve your fillets with my five-minute Garlic Butter Sauce.
  • Salads: You can serve this red sockeye salmon recipe with any of my tasty summer salads. However, my favorites include a tangy, crisp Yogurt Cucumber Salad and my crowd-friendly, healthy Mayo-Free Coleslaw.
  • Potatoes: For a classic potato salad dressed to impress, my Red Potato Salad will compliment your fish with a perfect mix of savory, creamy, and fresh flavors. Or, if you want to put a salty, gourmet spin on your dinner menu, Caper Potato Salad will lend a complex mix of briny pickles, robust mustard, and tender potatoes to your table.
Flaked grilled Sockeye salmon garnished with lemon.

Expert Tips

If you want to know the best way to grill sockeye salmon, these pro-level tips are exactly what you need. You’ll get rich, tender fillets every time with this easy guide.

  • Good-quality fish: I learned during my visit with the folks over at Copper River Salmon that the best way to turn a simple sockeye salmon recipe into a gourmet meal is by selecting high-quality fish. If you’re using fresh fish, it’s best to cook it within the first 24-48 hours for the brightest, most mouthwatering flavors. However, if you prefer frozen fillets, fully thaw them before roasting—preferably by storing them in the fridge overnight.
  • Preheat the grill: Ensure your grill preheats to 350 degrees F. before adding your salmon. Because salmon cooks quickly, transferring the fish too early will result in overly cooked, dry fillets.
  • Clean and grease the grill grates well: For best results, it’s essential that you thoroughly clean and oil your grill grates before adding your salmon. If you don’t generously grease your grates, your fish will stick to the grill, making it difficult to flip and remove the fillets.
  • Keep the skin on: The skin on your sockeye salmon fillet provides an excellent fatty barrier that keeps the flesh from overcooking when exposed to high temperatures. Therefore, I highly recommend keeping the skin on while grilling. Plus, it peels off easily after the cooking process.
  • Do not move: The key to perfectly cooked salmon is to leave the fillet on the grill grates, skin-side-down, without touching it during the grilling process. Once the salmon cooks fully, it will release itself from the grates, and your spatula should fit easily under it without tearing its flesh.
  • Use two spatulas: If you are new to grilling a whole fish fillet, we recommend using two large spatulas (fish spatulas (affiliate link) are best if you have them) when flipping it. It is easier to flip them when you have ample support. 
  • Grilled sockeye salmon in foil: We tested this recipe using a sheet of aluminum foil as well. There was no difference in the cooking time but the flavor lacked some of the smokiness. However, if you prefer to grill salmon in foil, be sure to grease the foil pieces with an oil spray first. Then, transfer the salmon to the middle of the foil and grill using the recipe instructions as written.
  • The thickness of the fish: In general, sockeye salmon is thinner than Atlantic salmon, resulting in less time on the grill. However, if your salmon is thicker, you might have to add more cooking time to ensure fully cooked fillets (and vice versa).
  • Check the doneness: The secret to a moist sockeye salmon recipe is not to overcook it. Keep in mind that salmon cooks so quickly. According to the folks over at America’s Test Kitchen, the ideal internal temperature for perfectly grilled sockeye salmon is 120-125 degrees F. 
  • Marinade: Because this wild Alaskan salmon recipe packs so many robust, natural flavors, there’s no need to marinate your fish beforehand. However, if you want a different flavor profile, brush your fillets after grilling with a sweet-and-spicy Honey Mustard Glaze or a flavorful Maple Ginger Glaze for a tangy Asian take on this classic dish.

FAQs

Have more questions about how to cook Alaska salmon? This hassle-free guide will answer all your queries, from salmon preparation to grilling time.

Should you soak salmon before grilling?

Because it has so much natural flavor, there’s no reason to marinade salmon steak before grilling. However, if you prefer to add a more complex flavoring, you are welcome to brush it with your favorite glaze after it is grilled.

How long to grill sockeye salmon?

I recommend grilling red salmon over 350 degrees F. for two and a half to three minutes on each side—no more than six minutes in total. However, keep in mind that you may have to add a few minutes to the grilling time depending on the thickness of your fish.

Can you eat sockeye salmon skin?

Yes! The shiny side of Alaska sockeye salmon (AKA the skin) is perfectly edible, and skin-on fillets often contain more healthy omega-3 fatty acids. However, if you are not a fan, you can easily remove the skin before serving as it will easily come off.

Where does sockeye salmon come from?

Wild sockeye salmon is a type of salmon that comes from the Pacific Northwest, close to the coasts of North America and Asia. Fresh sockeye salmon is in season from late spring through middle summer (i.e., May through July) and are known for their deep red color and rich, firm taste.

Other Grilled Seafood Recipes You Might Like

Tempted to make grilled salmon every night of the week? These other grilled fish dishes will satiate your seafood cravings with their delectably moist, fresh, and bright flavors.

If you try this Grilled Sockeye Salmon recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled Sockeye salmon with asparagus and grilled lemon on the side.
Print

Grilled Sockeye Salmon Recipe

This Grilled Sockeye salmon recipe is the ultimate summertime dinner that is ready in less than 15 minutes. Buttery rich and super flavorful, wild caught Alaskan salmon is perfect for grilling.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Total Time 11 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 189kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 whole wild Sockeye salmon fillet* about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ pounds
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil plus additional to grill grates
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 lemon sliced or quartered
  • Fresh dill for garnish – optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the (gas) grill to 350 degrees F.
  • Pat the fillet dry with paper towels on both sides. Set it aside.
  • Whisk olive oil, salt, and pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • Brush the salmon fillet generously with the olive oil mixture on both sides.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil and then generously coat the grates.
  • Carefully place salmon, skin side down, and cook uncovered for 3 minutes or until it releases easily when you slide a spatula between the salmon fillet and grill grate.
  • Using two spatulas, carefully flip the salmon fillet and cook the other side for 3 minutes. The perfectly grilled salmon should register 125 degrees F when inserted with an instant read thermometer.
  • Transfer it onto a plate and loosely cover it with aluminum foil for a few minutes.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with lemon juice and garnish with fresh dill and plenty of sliced lemon before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole salmon fillet, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutrition informatio below is for one serving.
  • Salmon: We used fresh wild Sockeye salmon but you can use frozen salmon in this recipe. Just make sure that it is fully thawed before grilling. You can use this recipe to cook Coho or King Salmon, but keep in mind that they tend to be thicker so the grilling time might slightly be longer.
  • Grilling Salmon Fillets: You can use this exact recipe to grill cut Sockeye salmon. The timing would mostly be the same. However, if your fillets are all center cut, you may have to grill slightly longer.
  • Marinade or glaze: Since Sockeye Salmon is already very flavorful, we did not think that it is necessary to marinade it. However, if you want, you can reserve some of the olive oil mixture to brush the salmon after it is grilled.
  • Don’t have a grill? Baking Sockeye in the oven is just as easy and delicious!
  • Storage: To store leftovers, bring your grilled fish to room temperature. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. Reheat in a 275-degree oven for 3-4 minutes or until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 189kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 601mg | Potassium: 252mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 26IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Grilled Sockeye Salmon appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/feed/ 0
Sockeye Salmon Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 17:03:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68746 As I learned while on my Alaskan trip with Copper River Sockeye Salmon, once you know how to bake sockeye salmon following this basic recipe, you’ll unlock countless other delectable Pacific salmon recipes the whole family will enjoy. This baked sockeye salmon fillet recipe is a no-brainer for easy, healthy weeknight meals. Sockeye salmon itself boasts dozens of health benefits and this easy fish dish is just one of many...

The post Sockeye Salmon Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As I learned while on my Alaskan trip with Copper River Sockeye Salmon, once you know how to bake sockeye salmon following this basic recipe, you’ll unlock countless other delectable Pacific salmon recipes the whole family will enjoy.

This baked sockeye salmon fillet recipe is a no-brainer for easy, healthy weeknight meals. Sockeye salmon itself boasts dozens of health benefits and this easy fish dish is just one of many ways to incorporate it into your weekly menu. It also serves as a stepping stone to a multitude of other Alaskan sockeye salmon recipes, from elegant Salmon Nicoise to creamy Salmon Coconut Soup.

Baked Sockeye Salmon in foil garnished with lemon slices.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make this salmon sockeye recipe: the fish and its seasoning.

For the fish: 

  • Wild Alaskan Sockeye Salmon (Fresh or Frozen): Using high-quality fish is essential to give this recipe its rich, buttery flavor. We used fresh salmon, which is in season from May through July. I also prefer using a whole salmon filet with the skin on it for easy cooking and a beautiful presentation. However, you can also use pre-cut fillets for a perfectly portioned spread. If you use frozen sockeye salmon fillets, thoroughly thaw them before roasting them.
Ingredients for baked red salmon recipe.

Seasoning:

The best seasoning for sockeye salmon includes a basic mixture of zesty, robust ingredients and fresh herbs. Because this mixture packs so much flavor, you don’t need much to give your fish an incomparably bold taste.

  • Olive oil: Olive oil ensures that this oven-baked sockeye salmon recipe develops a crisp exterior and succulent, tender flesh while cooking. However, avocado oil will also work as a substitute.
  • Lemon: You’ll need fresh lemon juice, zest, and slices to give this dish bright flavors and an immaculate presentation.
  • Seasonings: Only kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are necessary to season this baked salmon recipe. You can also sprinkle it with a pinch of red pepper flakes if you prefer.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Finely minced garlic is the best but you can use garlic powder in a pinch.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh dill and parsley are two signature herbs for red salmon recipes, lending them citrusy notes and grassy undertones. You can add one, the other, or both herbs for an elaborate flavor profile.

How to Cook Sockeye Salmon in the Oven

Cooking sockeye salmon is a cinch with these foolproof instructions. In just fifteen minutes, you’ll have a filling and flavorful spread that will astound foodies and families alike.

  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
Step by step images showing how to bake Copper River salmon in the oven.
  1. Whisk the oil mixture: In a small bowl, whisk the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until thoroughly mixed.
  2. Dry the fish: Use a few sheets of paper towel to pat dry both sides of the salmon fillet.
  3. Season the salmon: Brush both sides of it with the oil-lemon mixture.
  4. Arrange the fish: Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil, ensuring it’s at least four inches larger than your fillet. Transfer the brushed salmon—skin side down—to the middle of the foil, leaving two inches on both sides.
Person preparing Wild caught Alaskan salmon for cooking it in aluminum foil.
  1. Add the fillet: Evenly distribute the garlic and lemon slices on top of the fish fillet.
  2. Wrap the salmon: Gently fold the excess foil on both sides of the fish toward its center and loosely cinch it to help keep the foil’s shape. Fold the end foil pieces over the fish and loosely seal it.
  3. Cook the sockeye salmon: Transfer the wrapped salmon to the oven and roast it for 10 minutes, untouched. After 10 minutes, carefully open the foil covering to check for doneness. Insert a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the fish. Your fish is ready to serve if the thermometer reaches 125 degrees F.
  4. Add the herbs: Remove the Pacific salmon from the oven and carefully open the foil packet. Sprinkle the fillet with chopped parsley or dill.
  5. Serve: If desired, cut the oven-roasted sockeye salmon recipe into slices, and garnish them with lemon slices and chopped fresh herbs. Serve and enjoy!

How to Store Baked Alaskan Salmon?

With so much mouthwatering flavor, you won’t want a single morsel of your fresh wild sockeye salmon to go to waste. These easy storage tips will ensure you can enjoy your leftover salmon for the next few days.

  • Storage: To store your salmon steak, let it come to room temperature first. Then, transfer it to an airtight container (or wrap it tightly in tin foil or stretch film), and place it in the refrigerator. Your fillets will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: Though you can technically freeze cooked sockeye salmon, the fish’s texture and flavor won’t be as good as the freshly roasted version. Therefore, I don’t recommend freezing this recipe once cooked.
  • Reheating: The best part about this dish is that you can enjoy it warm, room temperature, or cold. If you prefer a warm fillet, reheat your fish in a low-heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated. However, cook your salmon sparingly, as it will become dry and flavorless if overheated.

What to Serve With Sockeye Salmon Bake?

Alaskan sockeye salmon fillets make an irresistible pair with countless other delectable recipes. All my favorites are in this delicious collection, from flavorful grains to tender roasted veggies.

Baked Wild Alaskan salmon garnished with yogurt dill sauce from the top view.
  • Sauces and salsas: With its creamy, bright flavors, Yogurt Dill Sauce is one of my favorite sauces to prepare when cooking Alaskan salmon. For a sweeter, more colorful option, you could also top your fillets with Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa—both of which complete this photo-ready spread.
  • Salad: This simple salmon recipe makes a phenomenal combination with any of my bright summertime salads. You can whip up my Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad in under twenty minutes for two of my most colorful, crisp sides.
  • Vegetables: Wild sockeye can pair with nearly any of my tasty vegetable sides because of its extreme versatility. However, some of my favorites include creamy Mexican Street Corn, buttery Roasted Asparagus, and Air-Fried Corn on the Cob.
  • Cooked Grains or Pasta: Nothing makes a more sumptuous pair than baking sockeye salmon in foil alongside a hearty grain dish. I recommend serving up a pot of Cooked Wild Rice or Cooked Quinoa for a well-seasoned, healthy side. You could also compliment your light fish with rich pasta recipes, like Garlic Butter Pasta or Zucchini Lasagna, or add a nutty, herbaceous taste with a bowl of Green Pasta.
  • Potatoes: Tender, flavorful, and filling, potatoes are a great option when preparing this Alaska salmon recipe. Muffin Tin Potatoes only need four ingredients for a creamy, buttery side dressed to impress. I also recommend my Parmesan Crusted Potatoes and Smashed Fingerling Potatoes for more melt-in-your-mouth potato recipes.
  • Wine: The best way to prepare sockeye salmon is alongside a bottle of crisp, dry white wine, such as pinot grigio or sauvignon blanc.

Expert Tips

This wild Alaskan salmon recipe is an easy way for both beginner and master chefs to prepare seafood without a hitch. These simple tips will ensure your fillet always comes out moist and flavorful.

  • Good quality fish: The best way to cook sockeye salmon is by starting with good-quality fish fillets. If you buy fresh fish, cooking it within the first 24-48 hours is ideal for maximum flavor. If you prefer using packaged, pre-cut frozen fillets, thaw them fully before roasting. The best way to thaw frozen fish is by placing it in the fridge overnight.
  • The temperature of your oven: We tested this recipe at various temperatures, including 375, 400, and 425 degrees F. However, we found that a gentle, low-temperature oven—ideally, 375 degrees F. for 10 minutes (until it is medium-rare) —produced the most tender, moist salmon. 
  • The thickness of the fish: Sockeye salmon tends to be thinner than Atlantic salmon, which will affect your ideal cooking time. Therefore, if you’re working with a thicker fillet, I recommend increasing its time in the oven by a few minutes and vice versa.
  • Check doneness: Your sockeye salmon temperature should reach 120-125 degrees F. before removing the fish from the oven. Keep in mind that it will continue to cook after you take it out of the oven because of the residual heat. If you do not have a thermometer to check doneness, you can also tell by looking at its texture and color. Fully cooked salmon should have a flaky texture and an opaque pink color before removing it from the oven. Finally, you can do the fork test. If it flakes easily it should be ready to enjoy.
  • Slightly undercook it: When baking sockeye salmon in the oven, it’s important to slightly undercook your fish and let it rest for a few minutes before serving. The fillets will continue to cook even while resting, giving them time to reabsorb their juices and keep them from becoming dry. In short, undercooking the fish will provide you with a moist sockeye salmon recipe no one can resist.
  • Use the skin as a barrier to avoid overcooking: For best results, I highly recommend keeping the skin on your salmon fillet while baking (even if you are not a fan of eating the skin.) It comes off easily after the roasting process and acts as a protective fatty barrier on the fillets’ bottoms, keeping the fish from overcooking.
  • Aluminum foil vs. parchment paper: I prefer to make baked sockeye salmon in foil due to its ability to trap steam and maintain heat, resulting in moist, succulent fish. However, if you prefer parchment paper, simply increase the cooking time by two minutes to ensure thorough roasting.
  • Presentation: If you want your salmon to pop, add colorful and flavorful additions to your garnish ingredients, such as lemon slices and fresh herbs. You can also ensure a beautiful presentation by serving your fillet on a center plate, drizzled with your chosen sauce.

FAQs

Have more questions about this tasty oven-baked fish? We’ve got you covered, whether you’re wondering where wild salmon fillet comes from or expert seasoning tips.

What is a sockeye salmon fillet?

Sockeye salmon—also referred to as red salmon—is a type of salmon that comes from the Pacific Ocean and has brilliant red meat, a firm texture, and a rich, fresh flavor. A fillet refers to a specific cut from the fish’s backbone, which has no bones and often still has the skin attached.

What is the difference between sockeye salmon and Atlantic salmon?

Though there are many different salmon varieties, Pacific sockeye salmon tends to have a deep red color, while Atlantic salmon is often lighter pink or orange. Furthermore, sockeye varieties are firmer, with a richer flavor profile than other, milder Alaskan types.

Where is sockeye salmon from, and when is it in season?

Sockeye salmon, also called Red Salmon or Blueback Salmon, originate from the Northern Pacific Ocean and the rivers that discharge to it—including the coasts of North America, Eastern Russia, and the Northern Hokkaido Island in Japan—and are in season from May through July.

Where to buy sockeye salmon?

When sockeye salmon is in season, you can likely purchase it at most bigger grocery stores, like Costco and Sam’s Club, or you can often find it in the frozen section of your local grocery store. However, you can also buy it online if unavailable in your area.

How to season sockeye salmon?

There are dozens of ways to season this sockeye salmon fillet recipe. If you prefer a simple, zesty version, you can whisk together an easy sockeye salmon marinade with olive oil, lemon juice, salt, and pepper. You can also create a mixture of soy sauce, garlic, ginger, and maple syrup for a more complex, Asian-inspired variation.

How long to cook sockeye salmon in the oven?

During our recipe testing, we found out that it is best to cook salmon at 375 degrees for 10-12 minutes or until it is medium-rare. Keep in mind that even after you take it out of the oven it will continue cooking with the help of the residual heat.

How to know when sockeye salmon is done?

When sockeye salmon is done, the temp. of its thickest portion should reach 125 degrees F. You can also check the doneness by looking for a flaky texture and the signature sockeye salmon cooked color: when its deep red color turns to opaque pink.

Other Fish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoy this easy sockeye salmon recipe and are a fan of grilled salmon, be sure to try our Grilled Sockeye Salmon recipe as well. And if you are in need of other seafood dinner inspiration, check out these other dishes—from wild Alaskan salmon recipes to mild mahi mahi— to satisfy your seafood fix in a snap.

If you try this Wild Alaskan Sockeye Salmon recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a huge help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Sockeye Salmon in foil garnished with lemon slices and minced garlic.
Print

Sockeye Salmon Recipe

This Baked Sockeye Salmon recipe is my foolproof method for cooking this delicious Wild Alaskan fish in the oven. It is a perfectly moist and flaky salmon recipe that is great for a healthy weeknight meal.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 275kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 sockeye salmon fillet* ~ 1 1/4 to 1 1/2 pounds with skin on
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 small lemon sliced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or dill

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  • Whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a small bowl.
  • Pat dry the salmon fillet on both sides using a few sheets of paper towel. Brush both sides of the salmon with the olive oil-lemon mixture.
  • Line a baking sheet with a large sheet of aluminum foil that is 4 inches longer than your salmon fillet. Place the salmon skin side down in the middle leaving 2 inches on both sides.
  • Distribute the garlic slices and lemon slices on top of the fillets.
  • Bring the excess foil on both long sides of the fish towards the middle and cinch loosely. Fold the end pieces of the aluminum foil onto the fish and seal it loosely.
  • Transfer it to the preheated oven and Bake for 10 minutes without opening the packet of salmon. When cooking time is complete, you can carefully open the foil packet and check doneness. If you have an instant read thermometer, insert it into the thickest part of the fish, if it registers 125 degrees F, it is ready to be served.
  • Remove from the oven, carefully open the foil. Sprinkle it with chopped parsley and/or dill.
  • If preferred, cut into slices, garnish with lemon slices and chopped fresh herbs, and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe make a whole fillet of salmon and serves a family of 4 easily. You can multiply the recipe as need if preferred. Though we recommend baking each fillet in their own foil packets.
  • Fresh or Frozen Sockeye Salmon: This recipe will work with fresh or frozen salmon. If you use frozen salmon fillets make sure to thaw them fully before baking them. You can use this recipe to roast King or Coho Salmon, but keep in mind that they tend to be thicker so the cooking time might be different.
  • Not a fan of using aluminum foil? You can cook Sockeye salmon in a parchment packet instead (following the recipe as written.) However, we recommend extending the cooking time by 2-3 minutes.
  • Can I roast sockeye salmon fillet on a sheet pan without covering it in foil? I prefer to roast sockeye salmon in foil to ensure a moist, succulent texture. However, you can make this recipe without aluminum foil by preheating the oven to 350 degrees F. and placing the fillet on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Then, brush both sides of the fish with the olive oil mixture and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and minced garlic. Bake the salmon in the oven for 12-14 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 125 degrees F.
  • A note about the cook time: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of your fillet and the cook time. We find that baking it in a milder heat (375 degrees) will cook it gently. For best results, we recommend checking doneness after the 10-minute mark. However, be careful as you open the foil packet as it is packed with hot steam.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container after they come to room temperature for 2-3 days. You can reheat them in a low heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 275kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 745mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Sockeye Salmon Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/feed/ 0
Avocado Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/#comments Mon, 03 Jul 2023 21:34:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6943 You heard that right – vegan avocado ice cream is made with coconut milk and ripe avocados for a homemade treat you can feel good about. Much like my other vegan frozen desserts, including Strawberry Coconut Milk Popsicles and Cashew Ice Cream, this one gets its richness and fatty texture from whole plant foods. And because it is a no-churn recipe, no ice cream maker is required. If you are...

The post Avocado Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
You heard that right – vegan avocado ice cream is made with coconut milk and ripe avocados for a homemade treat you can feel good about. Much like my other vegan frozen desserts, including Strawberry Coconut Milk Popsicles and Cashew Ice Cream, this one gets its richness and fatty texture from whole plant foods.

And because it is a no-churn recipe, no ice cream maker is required. If you are a fan of avocados, you are going to love this one.

Avocado Ice Cream placed in coconut bowls with an ice cream scoop on the side.

Ingredients

Avocado based ice cream requires just a handful of simple ingredients you can pick up from your local grocery store. For the complete list of ingredients, we will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Coconut Milk: We recommend a can of full-fat coconut milk, shaken or blended until smooth, for the best flavor. That being said, coconut cream can also be used. Though I liked the version of it made with coconut milk better. Do not use a carton of coconut beverage, as this does not impart the same flavor or creamy texture.
  • Avocado: Look for avocados with dark green to black skin that yield slightly to pressure. When you pop the cap off the top, the avocado flesh should be bright and green. This means they are ripe but not browned and spoiled.
  • Banana: One ripe banana adds creaminess and a slightly sweet flavor.
  • Maple Syrup: Go for pure maple syrup for the best flavor.
  • Lime Juice + Lime Zest: The lime juice and lime zest add a beautiful pop of citrus flavor. Lemon juice and lemon zest can be used instead. You could also add 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract to further enhance its flavor profile.
  • Unsweetened Coconut Flakes: Coconut flakes add a nice crunch and tropical finish. Make sure to toast the coconut flakes for the best flavor.
  • Coconut shells: If you have access to coconut shells, they make the pretties “bowls”.

Optional Add-Ins & Variations

  • Chocolate: With a little inspiration from Tom Brady and for a chocolate avocado ice cream treat, add 2-3 tablespoons cocoa powder or antioxidant-rich cacao powder. And if you are a fan of chocolate mint ice cream, add a mere ¼ teaspoon of peppermint extract, too.
  • Keto: To make keto avocado ice cream, omit the banana and maple syrup. Replace the banana with ½ cup heavy cream and sweeten it with ⅓ cup of your favorite keto sweetener (such as allulose).

How to Make Avocado Ice Cream?

This creamy homemade avocado ice cream recipe comes together after a quick whiz in your food processor and some freezing time – no ice cream machine required. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Chill loaf pan: Place a 9×5 inch loaf pan in the freezer for 30 minutes before making the ice cream.
A collage of images showing how to make vegan avocado ice cream.
  1. Puree ingredients: Place the coconut milk, avocados, banana, maple syrup, lime juice, and Kosher salt in a food processor fitted with the S-blade. Puree for about 1 minute, until all the ingredients reach a smooth texture, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through. Once the avocado mixture is smooth, add the lime zest and pulse a few times.
  2. Store: Transfer the ice cream base to the chilled loaf pan. Smooth into an even layer with a spatula or the back of a spoon. Cover the surface of the ice cream mixture directly with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible.
  3. Freeze: Place the avocado ice cream into the freezer for at least 4 hours before serving. 
  4. Scoop: Remove it from the freezer 15 minutes before serving for it to soften. Scoop into bowls (or coconut bowls) and garnish with coconut flakes, if preferred.

How to Store?

This dairy-free avocado ice cream will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer if stored properly. For best results and prolonged shelf life, make sure to:

  • Use a frozen container: We found a pre-chilled loaf pan to be the best mode of storage for this avocado frozen dessert as the larger surface area makes it easier to scoop. That being said, you can store it in an ice cream container (affiliate link) or a freezer-safe airtight container.
  • Cover with plastic wrap: Place a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface of the ice cream to prevent air bubbles and the formation of ice crystals.
  • Allow good airflow: Place the loaf pan in the coldest part of your freezer (usually in the back, away from odorous foods) with good air circulation. A consistent temperature maintains the texture and flavor.
  • Avoid frequent thawing and refreezing: Constant temperature fluctuations may create an icy texture.
  • Consume within one week: Homemade ice cream does not have as long a shelf life as commercially-made ice cream. For the best texture and flavor, enjoy within 5-7 days.

How to Serve

This healthy avocado ice cream recipe can be served just as is or jazzed up to really play up its tropical vibe. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Person holding guacamole ice cream in a coconut bowl from the front view.
  • Cone or Bowl: Keep it simple by scooping into your favorite cone or ice cream bowl.
  • Coconut Bowls: If available to you and to really give it the island appeal, serve it in fresh coconut halves with a sprig of fresh mint and toasted coconut flakes, as pictured here.
  • Blend into Smoothies and Milkshakes: This avocado ice cream has a minimal amount of natural sugars, which means it is healthy enough to enjoy on the regular in daily smoothies or milkshakes.
  • With Toppings: Finish with any and all of your favorite healthy or crunchy toppings, such as fresh fruit, dark chocolate chips, toasted nuts, or even granola.

Expert Tips

  • Blend coconut milk well: Whether you shake the can vigorously or blend the coconut milk in a blender, make sure the coconut milk is a smooth consistency before pureeing.
  • Process well: Be sure to use a high-powered food processor or high-speed blender, such as a Vitamix, to achieve optimal texture.
  • Ripeness is key: Since avocados are the main ingredient in this recipe, it’s important that the avocados are at the right degree of ripeness. Brown or mushy avocados will result in a bitter flavor. The same is true for the banana.
  • Add lime zest at the end: A few specks of lime zest running throughout the ice cream add visual appeal and pops of citrus flavor. And adding it at the end prevents it from disappearing into the ice cream.
  • Churn, if desired: While we did not find it necessary to churn the avocado ice cream in an ice cream maker, you can certainly do so following the manufacturer’s instructions. It takes about 15-20 minutes for it to fully freeze in my ice cream maker (affiliate link.)
  • Allow to thaw for 15 minutes before serving: Because this ice cream with avocado has a ton of healthy fats and lower water content when compared to dairy-based ice cream, it takes longer to reach a softer consistency. Allow to sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes, or until it is scoopable.
  • Fun fact: Did you know that avocado ice cream is Tom Brady’s favorite ice cream? 

FAQs

What is avocado ice cream made of?

Avocado ice cream is made with ripe avocados, coconut milk, banana, and maple syrup, along with lime juice and lime zest for a tropical feel.

What does avocado ice cream taste like?

Avocado ice cream tastes like avocados, with its earthy, mild, almost fruity flavor coming through with each bite. It is pleasant, delightful, and refreshing, with a creamy and rich texture.

Other Ice Cream Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Avocado Ice Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Avocado ice cream with coconut milk in coconut bowls garnished with coconut flakes.
Print

Avocado Ice Cream Recipe

Here’s a creamy and rich avocado ice cream that requires no ice cream maker. Made with healthier ingredients and sweetened with maple syrup, this is the perfect vegan ice cream to serve on a hot summer day.
Course Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cooling Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 527kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 2 Hass Avocados ripe, total weight 1 pound with pits; skinned and pitted
  • 1 banana ripe
  • ½ cup maple syrup
  • 2 teaspoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest from 2 limes

Optional Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons Unsweetened toasted shredded coconut

For Serving (Optional)

  • Coconut Bowls

Instructions

  • Place a 9×5 inch loaf pan in the freezer for 30 minutes before making the ice cream.
  • Place the coconut milk, avocados, banana, maple syrup, lime juice, and Kosher salt in a food processor and puree until all the ingredients are smooth for approximately 1 minute. Scrape down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing so that all the ingredients are pureed.
  • Add the lime zest and pulse into the mixture for a couple of “bursts.”
  • Transfer the mixture to the loaf pan and smooth it out evenly. Cover with stretch film, removing as much air as possible.
  • Place the covered ice cream into the freezer for at least 4 hours before serving.
  • Remove it from the freezer 15 minutes before serving for it to soften. Scoop into bowls (or coconut bowls) and garnish with coconut flakes, if preferred.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields a little less than 1-quart ice cream.
  • Coconut Milk vs Cream: This recipe was tested both with canned coconut milk and canned coconut cream. We prefer the version made with the milk better as the version made with cream had an overwhelming coconut taste whereas the milk version allowed the avocado flavors to shine. 
  • Storage: Be sure to store in an airtight container, cover it tightly and consume within 5-7 days.
  • This recipe is adapted from David Lebovitz’s Avocado Ice Cream recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 527kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 23g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 951mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Avocado Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/feed/ 18
Honey Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/#comments Sat, 01 Jul 2023 21:20:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1393 If you have never made homemade ice cream with honey before, consider this a sign. Making ice cream at home is not only easy to make, but it also gives you complete control over the ingredients used. This simple vanilla ice cream recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand. The best part, you ask? You can use it as a base for...

The post Honey Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have never made homemade ice cream with honey before, consider this a sign. Making ice cream at home is not only easy to make, but it also gives you complete control over the ingredients used. This simple vanilla ice cream recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand. The best part, you ask? You can use it as a base for (pretty much) any ice cream flavor you like.

Love making ice cream? Put your ice cream maker to good use with Coconut Cashew Ice Cream (dairy-free) or Avocado Ice Cream, or go the no-churn method with Yogurt Bark.

Honey Vanilla Ice cream is being drizzled with honey from the front view.

Ingredients for Honey Vanilla Ice Cream

This homemade honey ice cream requires only 6 simple ingredients. Here’s a look at what we need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Heavy Cream: Pick up a pint of heavy cream or heavy whipping cream for the creamiest texture. 
  • Milk: Use full-fat whole milk for the richest texture and flavor.
  • Honey: Choose high-quality honey, local or raw honey is even better. As always, the honey flavor will determine the flavor of your ice cream. My favorite types of honey are orange blossom and clover. Maple syrup could also be used but be aware that the flavor profile of the overall ice cream would be different.
  • Salt: We are using Kosher salt to season the honey-flavored ice cream. Feel free to give it a finish of Maldon flaky salt upon serving for a salted honey ice cream twist.
  • Vanilla: You can use vanilla extract or the luxurious vanilla bean paste (affiliate link). If using vanilla extract, be sure to add it at the end while the ice cream mixture cools to room temperature.
  • Raw Egg Yolks: Whole egg yolks add texture and richness to the honey and ice cream. The trick is to temper the egg yolks into the cream mixture, but more on this later.

How to Make Honey Ice Cream Recipe?

If you never thought of making vanilla ice cream with honey, think again! Just like all homemade ice cream recipes, this one requires a bit of patience. But your efforts will be rewarded in the end. Here’s how to do it:

Person showing how to make honey ice cream in a collage of pictures.
  1. Heat the cream mixture: In a medium saucepan over medium-high heat, heat the cream, milk, honey, salt, and vanilla paste (if using) for approximately 5 minutes, stirring frequently, until it just barely begins to simmer. Do not let it boil.
  2. Temper egg yolks: While the cream mixture is coming up to a simmer, place the egg yolks in a medium bowl and whisk until smooth. When the cream mixture has just barely reached a simmer, pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup. Slowly pour the cream mixture into the yolks while continuously whisking as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is paramount to prevent the eggs from curdling.
Person tempering eggs to make the ice cream base.
  1. Cook custard: Pour the egg mixture back into the saucepan while stirring constantly with a wooden spoon. Reduce to medium heat and cook for approximately 10 minutes (stirring constantly) until it is slightly thickened or registers 180 degrees F. As you are stirring, ensure that you are scraping the bottom edge of the pan as it thickens. The mixture should produce “milk bubbles” on the edge of the pan, which is a good indication of proper temperature. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk.
  2. Cool ice cream base: Pour the cream mixture into a heat-proof cup or bowl. Allow to cool on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Then, cover it with a lid or plastic wrap and place it in the refrigerator for at least 3 hours or up to 24 hours.
Person churning vanilla honey ice cream and then freezing it in a collage of images.
  1. Churn ice cream: After the custard is thoroughly chilled, churn the mixture in an ice cream maker (affiliate link) according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Mine takes about 15-20 minutes, and in the end, the mixture resembles the texture of soft-serve ice cream. 
  2. Freeze: Transfer the ice cream to an airtight container or a loaf pan and cover it tightly. Freeze the ice cream until firm, at least 2 hours, but preferably overnight. Serve once chilled.

How to Store

This honey milk ice cream will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer if stored properly. Here are my best tips for storage:

  • Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, preferably an ice cream tub (affiliate link.) Use the back of a spoon to gently push it down to remove any air. 
  • Place in the back of the freezer, away from any odorous foods (i.e., fish, onions, etc.).

How to Serve Honey Ice Cream?

Honey-sweetened ice cream will become one of your favorite ice cream flavors you are going to want to put on everything. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

  • Bowl / Cone: Keep it classic by scooping ice cream into a bowl or cone to enjoy all on its own. Use any of your favorite toppings, such as nuts, fresh fruit, or even better, a drizzle of your favorite caramel.
  • Make Ice Cream Sandwich: Sandwich a generous scoop of it in between Almond Flour Cookies, or Almond Flour Peanut Butter Cookies for a scrumptious summer treat.
  • On Top of Baked Goods: Serve it a la mode style on top of Almond Flour Brownies, Peach Galette, or Easy Apple Crisp.
  • Make a Honey Ice Cream Sundae: Create a luxurious ice cream sundae at home by topping it off with dark chocolate, chocolate chips, fresh fruit, or fruit sauce, like my Blueberry Sauce and Maple Whipped Cream.
Copycat Haagen Dazs honey vanilla ice cream in a bowl.

Expert Tips

  • Simmer instead of boiling: Do not bring the cream and honey mixture to a boil. Boiling honey changes its color, texture, and nutrient value. Bringing the mixture to too high of a temperature could also scald the milk as well as break the egg yolk emulsion. 
  • Use good quality ingredients: Good quality ingredients will always yield a more flavorful ice cream. Use your favorite brands of cream, honey, and vanilla, and pay a little extra for organic, if possible.
  • When tempering eggs, be patient: If this is your first time tempering eggs, be patient and confident. It’s always best to work slower rather than faster to avoid scrambling the eggs.
  • Use a wooden spoon: A wooden spoon helps to get into the crevices of your saucepan. This is important because we don’t want the milk to scald at the bottom.
  • Look for ‘nape’: This is a French term that means the ice cream base is ready when it is thick enough to coat the back of a wooden spoon. You can also use a digital thermometer to check doneness. The egg mixture should reach 180 degrees Fahrenheit before getting it off the heat.
  • Strain, if needed: We tested this recipe several times and did not need to strain. However, a few clumps are possible. If that happens to you, straining the mixture through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted egg chunks that may have developed during the tempering of the eggs.
  • Make sure it is completely cool before churning. The ice cream base must be chilled before churning to ensure the proper functioning of your ice cream maker. Chill in the fridge for at least 3 hours or up to overnight.
  • Allow to freeze until firm. While the ice cream can be enjoyed straight from the ice cream machine for more of a soft-serve texture, I find it’s best to freeze for at least 2 hours before enjoying it.
  • Cover the “skin”: For extra precaution, place a piece of stretch film directly over the surface of the ice cream before freezing. This can help to prevent a skin from forming.
  • Store properly. Store the honey vanilla ice cream in a freezer-safe airtight container or your favorite ice cream tub (affiliate link) to prevent freezer burn. This will allow the ice cream to last a week, if not longer.

FAQs

Is honey a good sweetener for ice cream?

Yes, honey is a delicious natural sweetener for ice cream that adds sweet, floral notes. Go for orange blossom or clover honey for the best flavor.

What is the secret to creamy ice cream?

Heavy cream and full-fat milk will produce the creamiest, dreamiest ice cream. Don’t skip on the fat for this recipe.

Other Honey-Sweetened Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe for Honey Ice Cream, please take a minute to rate and comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

honey ice cream being drizzled with honey in a bowl.
Print

Honey Ice Cream Recipe

Try this homemade honey ice cream recipe for a super creamy and naturally sweetened treat that is superior to any store-bought brand. Drawing inspiration from Haagen Dazs’ Honey Vanilla Ice Cream, this simple recipe is an excellent delight to savor all year round.
Course Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting 10 hours
Total Time 10 hours 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 549kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • ½ cup honey
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 ½ teaspoon vanilla paste or pure vanilla extract*
  • 4 large egg yolks

Instructions

  • Heat the cream, milk, honey, salt, and vanilla paste in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat for approximately 5 minutes, stirring frequently, until it just barely begins to simmer. Do not let it boil.
  • While the cream mixture is simmering, whisk the egg yolks in a bowl until smooth. Set them aside.
  • Pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup.
  • Gradually whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is paramount to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  • Pour the egg and milk mixture back into the saucepan while stirring constantly with a wooden spoon. Cook over medium heat for approximately 10 minutes (stirring constantly) until it is slightly thickened or it registers 180 degrees F. As you are stirring, ensure that you are scraping the bottom edge of the pan as it thickens. The mixture should produce “milk bubbles” on the edge of the pan, which is a good indication of proper temperature. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk.
  • Pour the cream mixture into a heat-proof cup and let it cool on the counter for 30 minutes. Cover it with a lid or stretch film and refrigerate for at least 3 hours or for up to 24 hours.
  • Churn the mixture after it has chilled according to the ice cream manufacturer’s instructions. Mine takes about 15-20 minutes, and in the end, the mixture resembles the texture of soft-serve ice cream.
  • Transfer it to an airtight container and cover it tightly. Freeze it until firm for at least 3 hours, preferably overnight. Serve when chilled.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1 quart of ice cream.Storage: Store in an airtight container, preferably an ice cream tub (affiliate link.) or a loaf pan that is tightly covered with stretch film. Use the back of a spoon to gently push it down to remove any air. 
  • Vanilla: If you do not have vanilla paste, you can use vanilla extract. However, be sure to add it at the end while the ice cream mixture cools to room temperature. Otherwise, it will evaporate during the cooking process.
  • This recipe has been adapted with minor changes from The Perfect Scoop.

Nutrition

Calories: 549kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 295mg | Sodium: 359mg | Potassium: 263mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 1705IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 196mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Honey Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/feed/ 15
Honey Chocolate Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/#comments Sat, 01 Jul 2023 21:16:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1509 As with most of my easy chocolate recipes, this chocolate honey ice cream has no high fructose corn syrup and no refined sugar. It is sweetened with only the natural goodness of honey. And if you are a serious ice cream lover, be sure to check out my Avocado Ice Cream and Cashew Coconut Milk Ice Cream. Ingredients This chocolate honey ice cream recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients....

The post Honey Chocolate Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As with most of my easy chocolate recipes, this chocolate honey ice cream has no high fructose corn syrup and no refined sugar. It is sweetened with only the natural goodness of honey.

And if you are a serious ice cream lover, be sure to check out my Avocado Ice Cream and Cashew Coconut Milk Ice Cream.

Honey and Chocolate Ice Cream served over a cone in a person's hand.

Ingredients

This chocolate honey ice cream recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Heavy Cream: Heavy cream, sometimes labeled heavy whipping cream, provides a rich and creamy consistency that is so akin to ice cream. 
  • Whole Milk: Make sure to also use full-fat milk for the richest texture.
  • Honey: Seek out high-quality honey from a brand you trust. Whether it is local or raw honey, or both, pick a flavor you like, like orange blossom or clover.
  • Unsweetened Cocoa Powder: Unsweetened cocoa powder (not Dutch-processed) provides a rich, earthy, chocolatey flavor. I tested this recipe with both Hershey’s (affiliate link) and Valrhona (affiliate link), and both were equally delicious. For even more powerful antioxidants, try organic Cacao Powder (affilaite link), which is not heated to as high a temperature during processing as traditional cocoa powder.
  • Raw Egg Yolks: Egg yolks add richness and create a chocolate custard ice cream dream.
  • Vanilla Paste: Although more expensive, vanilla bean paste (affiliate link) adds richness and specks of vanilla bean. If you would like to use pure vanilla extract instead, make sure to add it while the chocolate ice cream base is cooling, so as to not evaporate the alcohol.
  • Salt: A pinch of Kosher salt enhances the sweet cream and chocolate notes.

How to Make Chocolate Ice Cream with Honey?

Honey-sweetened chocolate ice cream is just as delicious, if not more so, than traditional ice cream recipes. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make chocolate ice cream with honey.
  1. Heat cream mixture: In a medium saucepan, place the cream, milk, honey, unsweetened cocoa powder, vanilla paste, and salt. Cook over medium-high heat, string frequently until it is barely simmering, 7-8 minutes. Do not let it boil.
  2. Whisk egg yolks: While the cream mixture is coming up to a simmer, whisk the egg yolks in a medium bowl.
  3. Temper egg yolks: Carefully pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup. Gradually and slowly whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is very important to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  4. Make the chocolate custard: Immediately pour the egg yolk mixture back into the saucepan. Cook over medium to medium-high heat for approximately 8 minutes, stirring constantly with a wooden spoon, until it is slightly thickened. Make sure to also stir the bottom edge of the saucepan to incorporate the mixture. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk. The mixture should be around 180 degrees Fahrenheit.
Photos showing churned custard based chocolate ice cream.
  1. Chill: Pour the chocolate mixture into a heatproof container or a medium bowl. Keep it uncovered and allow it to cool to room temperature on the counter for 30 minutes. Then, cover it with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 3 hours, or up to 24 hours.
  2. Churn: Once the custard is thoroughly chilled, churn it in your ice cream maker (affiliate link) according to the manufacturer’s instructions. My ice cream maker takes about 20 minutes for it to reach a soft-serve consistency.
  3. Freeze: Transfer the now-churned ice cream to an ice cream tub (affiliate link) or a loaf pan and be sure to cover or wrap tightly. Let it freeze for at least 3 hours before serving.

How to Store

Chocolate ice cream with honey will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer. For proper storage, make sure to:

  • Store in a designated ice cream tub (affiliate link), or freezer-safe airtight container.
  • Store away from any odorous foods (i.e. seafood, onions, etc.), preferably in the back of the freezer.
  • Optionally, place a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface of the ice cream to prevent the formation of ice crystals.

How to Serve Honey Ice Cream?

Naturally sweetened chocolate ice cream is going to become your favorite homemade ice cream flavor. To really bring out its chocolate flavor, I love to serve it in any of the following ways:

  • Bowl / Cone: Scoop into a bowl or cone, and finish with your favorite toppings like fresh fruit, naturally sweetened Strawberry Sauce, dark chocolate chips, melted chocolate sauce, and toasted nuts for a little crunch or flaky sea salt (affiliate link.)
  • Over Cake or Brownies: Get a double dose of chocolate by scooping on top of warm Almond Flour Brownies, or any of our Cake Recipes.
  • Ice Cream Sandwiches: The rich chocolate flavors are perfect in between two Almond Butter Cookies or Chocolate Chip Cookies.
  • Affogato: Pour a shot of hot espresso over a scoop of custard chocolate ice cream for a scoop of Italian flair.

Expert Tips

  • Do not let it boil: We want the custard to simmer rather than boil as too high of a temperature could also scald the milk as well as break the egg yolk emulsion. Boiling honey also changes its color, texture, and nutrient value. 
  • Opt for organic, if possible: Use your favorite brands of cream, honey, and vanilla, and pay a little extra for organic, if within your budget.
  • Patience is key: Be patient and confident when tempering the egg yolks. Work slower rather than faster, especially if this is your first time doing so.
  • Stir with a wooden spoon: Use a wooden spoon when stirring the chocolate custard, as it is easier to get into the nooks and crannies of your saucepan.
  • Do as the French do: A key detail to look out for is nape, a fancy French term that basically means the ice cream base is ready when it is thick enough to coat the back of a wooden spoon. For a foolproof method, this would be 180 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link.)
  • Use a fine mesh strainer for extra insurance: I made this recipe three times and didn’t need to strain the mixture. However, straining through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted clumps of egg yolk that may have developed during tempering the eggs. This is a good practice to follow if you are new to tempering eggs.
  • Chill before churning: It’s important for the chocolate ice cream base to be completely chilled before churning to ensure the proper functioning of the ice cream machine.
  • Freeze until firm: Freezing the ice cream for at least 3 hours (or preferably overnight) before enjoying makes it more like that Haagen Daz texture we all love. While it is tempting to eat it right away, letting it freeze fully is ideal for the best chocolate ice cream.

FAQs

Do honey and chocolate go together?

Yes, the floral notes of honey really complement the deep, dark, earthy flavors of cocoa.

How do I substitute honey for sugar in ice cream?

While the substitution will depend on your specific recipe, I use ½ cup of honey for every 3 cups of total liquid (in this case, whole milk and heavy cream.) However, please keep in mind that when working with honey, boiling it should be avoided as heating honey at high temperatures can change the composition of nutrients and can deteriorate its quality.

Other Ice Cream Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Chocolate Honey Ice Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A person is holding chocolate ice cream in her hand.
Print

Honey Chocolate Ice Cream Recipe

Honey chocolate ice cream is an ultra rich, naturally sweetened custard based ice cream that is the ultimate summer indulgence. Made with just a few basic ingredients, it is an easy ice cream recipe you’ll be making over and over again.
Course Dessert/Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 577kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • ½ cup honey
  • ½ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 4 large egg yolks
  • 1 ½ teaspoon vanilla paste or vanilla extract*
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place cream, milk, honey, unsweetened cocoa powder, vanilla paste, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat. Cook, string frequently until it is barely simmering, 7-8 minutes. Do not let it boil.
  • Whisk the egg yolks in a medium bowl.
  • Carefully pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup.
  • Gradually whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is very important to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  • Pour the egg yolk mixture back into the saucepan. Using a wooden spoon, cook over medium to medium-high heat for approximately 8 minutes, stirring constantly until it is slightly thickened making sure you also stir the bottom edge of the saucepan to incorporate the mixture. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk. The mixture should be around 180 degrees F.
  • Pour the cream mixture into a heatproof container and let it cool (uncovered) on the counter for 30 minutes. Cover it with stretch film (place it on the surface of the custard) and refrigerate for at least 3 hours or for up to 24 hours.
  • Churn the mixture after it has chilled according to the ice cream manufacturer’s instructions. In my ice cream maker, it takes about 20 minutes for it to reach soft serve texture.
  • Transfer the churned ice cream to an ice cream tup (or a loaf pan), put the lid on and let it freeze for at least 3 hours before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1-quart ice cream.
  • You can substitute the vanilla paste with vanilla extract. Use an equal amount but stir it into the custard at the very end (at the cooling stage) to prevent it from evaporating.
  • Check doneness: The proper temperature of the mixture should be no more than 180 degrees F. Boiling or scalding the mixture can cause the eggs to curdle and potentially burn, giving an unpleasant taste. Do not walk away as the boiling point can be very quick! You can easily test for the correct thickness of the mixture by lifting the wooden spoon out and running your clean finger on the back of the spoon. If the other area of the spoon holds on to the mixture and does not run off, it is thick enough.
  • Use a fine mesh strainer (Optional): I made this recipe three times and didn’t need to strain the mixture. However, straining through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted clumps of egg yolk that may have developed during tempering the eggs. This is a good practice to follow if you are new to tempering eggs.

Nutrition

Calories: 577kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 25g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 306mg | Sodium: 362mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 1720IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 211mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Honey Chocolate Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/feed/ 8
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal....

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

  • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
  • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
  • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
  • Oranges
  • Kiwis
  • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

Fruit salad dressing:

  • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
  • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
  • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
  • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

  • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
  • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
  • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
  • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
  • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
  • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
  1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
  4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

  • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

  • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
  • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
  • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
  • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
  • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
  • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
  • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
  • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

FAQs

Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

Can I use frozen fruit?

Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

  • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
  • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
  • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
  • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
  • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 131kcal

Ingredients

For The Fruit Salad

  • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
  • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
  • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
  • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
  • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

For The Salad Dressing

  • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • 2 teaspoons lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

Instructions

  • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
  • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
  • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
  • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
  • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
  • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

Nutrition

Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 2
Red Skin Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 20 Jun 2023 16:27:30 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68332 After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing sides. Whip up a Deviled Egg Potato Salad for a healthy alternative to traditional deviled egg dishes, or prepare a Caper Potato Salad for a gourmet version of this iconic dish. Want to complete your dinner spread? Any of my Summer Salads will enliven your table with crisp, colorful, and...

The post Red Skin Potato Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing sides. Whip up a Deviled Egg Potato Salad for a healthy alternative to traditional deviled egg dishes, or prepare a Caper Potato Salad for a gourmet version of this iconic dish. Want to complete your dinner spread? Any of my Summer Salads will enliven your table with crisp, colorful, and garden-fresh flavors.

Red potato salad with bacon and eggs in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy red potato salad recipe uses a handful of simple ingredients to achieve its creamy texture and irresistible taste:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Red potatoes (aka Red Bliss Potatoes): This recipe requires about three pounds of red skin potatoes. Though you can cook your potatoes whole, I recommend cutting them into one-inch cubes to help them cook faster and to eliminate the need to cut your potatoes post-boiling. I also prefer to leave the skin on, though you can remove the skin before cooking if desired.
  • Bacon: Inspired by the fan-favorite German potato salad, we are adding a generous amount of bacon to the savory salad mixture. I use oven-baked turkey bacon for this dish, though you can also prepare it with my Air-Fried Turkey Bacon recipe to reduce cooking time. You can also make your red-skinned potato salad with regular baked bacon if you prefer something other than turkey bacon.
  • Mayonnaise: You can use whatever quality mayo brand you like for your potato side. However, you can also use vegan mayo to accommodate various dietary lifestyles.
  • Apple cider vinegar
  • Dijon mustard: Though I prefer the tangy, sharp taste of Dijon mustard in my homemade red potato salad, grainy mustard will also work in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to season this dish.
  • Fresh dill: Fresh dill gives this recipe its light, garden-fresh overtones. You can also use one tablespoon of dried dill if you don’t have fresh dill on hand.
  • Celery stalks: Bu sure to chop them finely.
  • Scallions: I recommend using the white and green parts of your green onions to give your salad a delectable balance of robust and mild flavors.
  • Hard-boiled eggs: You can prepare your creamy red potato salad with egg or without egg. If you choose to include boiled eggs, I recommend using a process that I think is the best way to cook hard-boiled eggs. Once cooked, cut the eggs into ½-inch cubes and use them to top your side dish.
  • Dill pickles: Adding a few tablespoons of chopped dill pickles gives this dill red potato salad a deliciously pickled flavor. For a milder taste, you may omit this ingredient.

Substitutions and Variations

  • Potatoes: If you prefer not to use red-skin potatoes, you can use red new potatoes or baby red potatoes. If you use baby red potatoes, be sure that they are of equal size before boiling. You could also use other waxy potatoes that will hold their shape during cooking, such as Yukon Gold or Yellow Finn. Though keep in my that other potatoes, like russet potatoes, will fall apart while boiling.
  • Greek yogurt: For a lighter, tangier version of this potato salad, use ½ cup of Greek yogurt and ½ cup of mayonnaise to make the creamy dressing.
  • Sour cream: Mix ½ cup of mayonnaise with ½ cup of sour cream to make a classic Southern red potato salad. This red skin sour cream potato salad will have a slightly brighter, tarter flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Don’t want to make red potato salad with dill? You can omit this ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley or chives.
  • Vinegar or lemon juice: If you don’t have any apple cider vinegar in your pantry, you can make a red potato vinegar salad with red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar. You may also use fresh lemon juice to make this recipe without vinegar.
  • Red onion: To make this dish milder, substitute the scallions with Pickled Red Onions for a tangier taste or Roasted Red Onions for a more caramelized flavor.
  • Sweet relish or sweet pickles: You can make your red bliss potato salad less briny by swapping the dill pickles for a sweeter alternative, like sweet relish, dill pickle relish, or sweet pickles. Or you can also use briney black or green olives.
  • Garlic: Recipes for old-fashioned red-skin potato salad generally include one teaspoon of garlic powder for bolder undertones. However, you could also make this version with one fresh garlic clove.

How to Make Red Skin Potato Salad

The best part about this recipe is how simple it is. These easy instructions will teach you how to cook red potatoes and prepare a delicious dressing that brings every ingredient to life.

  1. Prepare the potatoes: Place the cubed red-skinned potatoes in a large pot. Fill the pan with enough cold water to cover the potatoes, plus an extra inch of the pot. Cover it with a lid. Transfer the pot to the stove and bring the water to a boil over high heat. Once boiling, reduce the heat to medium so the water maintains a gentle boil.
Person showing how to make potato salad with red potatoes in a collage of images.
  1. Cook the potatoes: Lightly boil the red-skin potatoes for about 7-8 minutes until fork tender. When done, you should be able to spear the potatoes easily with a sharp knife. The cubes should be tender but not falling apart.
  2. Drain: Remove the pot from the heat and drain it so that only the potatoes remain. Place potatoes in a large mixing bowl and let them cool slightly on the counter.
  3. Cook the bacon: If you are new to cooking baking in the oven, be sure to check out my recipe for Baked Turkey Bacon for step-by-step instructions. However, in a nutshell, these are the steps to cook bacon. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Add a wire rack atop the lined tray. Place four strips of turkey bacon on top of the rack, ensuring the strips don’t overlap. Transfer the turkey bacon to the preheated oven. Cook for 10 minutes, flip the strips, and cook them for another 5 minutes. Let them cool for five minutes before roughly chopping them into bite-sized pieces.
  4. Prepare the dressing: Take out a small bowl while the potatoes and bacon cook. Add the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper, and whisk the ingredients. Once combined, add the chopped dill and whisk again.
A collage of images showing how to assemble red skin potato salad.
  1. Assemble the red potato potato salad: Add the chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles, and turkey bacon into the large bowl where you put the potatoes earlier.
  2. Add the dressing: Drizzle the potato mixture with dressing and toss it gently so that it coats all ingredients equally.
  3. Serve: If using, sprinkle the chopped hard-boiled eggs on top of the red potato salad. Serve the dish immediately or cover it with saran wrap and refrigerate until ready to serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

Red-skinned potato salad is a must-have recipe for hassle-free prep time. Prepare it ahead for effortless potluck preparation, or save your leftovers to enjoy days later.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare this delicious recipe one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
  • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

What to Serve with Red Potato Salad?

You’ll have countless pairable meals for any occasion when you make potato salad with red potatoes. This collection has everything from summer cookout menu ideas to weekday sandwiches.

Person mixing red bliss potato salad in a bowl.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making a deliciously savory and tender bacon red potato salad. Everyone can whip up this fan-favorite side using my beginner-friendly cooking suggestions.

  • Cooking potatoes: The trick to making the best red potato salad recipe ever is correctly cooking the potatoes. Begin by filling your pan with cold water and letting your potatoes heat up in the pot. Doing so allows the potatoes to cook in gentle heat resulting in more evenly cooked creamy potatoes. Additionally, this soaking process will reduce boiling time and ensure your potatoes have a tender texture.
  • Dress properly: I recommend letting your potatoes reach a lukewarm temperature before adding the additional ingredients. If your potatoes are too hot, they will absorb the added liquid, which may result in a mushy potato salad. However, the temperature at which you add your ingredients is entirely up to your preference.
  • Presentation tips: One of the biggest complaints about potato salad is that it looks bland. My solution is to reserve some of the ingredients used in the recipe and sprinkle them on top when mixed with the dressing. A redskin potato salad topped off with bacon bits, fresh herbs, and bright veggies is a treat for the eye.
  • Let it rest: While optional, I recommend letting your potato salad rest for 30 minutes to an hour before serving. This resting time will allow your ingredients to mix their flavors thoroughly so that every bite tastes perfectly balanced.
  • Eggs: When you make this red potato salad with eggs, it’s up to you how you prefer to mix them. I like adding the eggs as a topping to keep them from getting buried in the mix. However, you could also add them along with your other dressing ingredients so that they appear evenly throughout the potato salad.
  • Serve warm, at room temperature, or cold: As it is with most potato salads, this red potato and egg salad can be served lukewarm, at room temperature, or cold. However, if you are serving it as a part of your summer barbecue menu on a hot day, it is advised to place it above a bowl filled with icy water to maintain its coolness.

FAQs

Wondering whether red potatoes are good for potato salad or how to prepare your veggies? This handy guide answers all your questions about this delicious potato salad recipe.

Can you make potato salad with red potatoes?

Yes! Not only can you make potato salad with red potatoes, but I also highly recommend it. Red potatoes hold their shape better than other potatoes during the boiling process, and they bring a sweet, buttery flavor to your potato salad.

How long to boil red potatoes for potato salad?

The time it takes to cook red potatoes may vary depending on their sizes. However, after cutting them into one-inch cubes and letting your water boil, your potatoes should only need to cook for 7-8 minutes until they are fork-tender. Keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potato cubes and cooking time. To check for doneness, insert a knife into the center of a potato piece. If it enters and exits easily, your potatoes are ready.

Do I need to peel the skin of red potatoes when making potato salad?

Not at all! I prefer to leave the skin on when I make this red potato salad recipe with bacon. Not only does this add color to the potato salad, but it also ensures you keep the nutrients present in the red potato skin. However, you can peel your potatoes first if you’d prefer not to include the skin.

Are red or white potatoes better for potato salad?

Whether you use red or white potatoes in your potato salad is up to personal preference. I love making this recipe with red potatoes because of their rich, sweet flavor. However, you can use any potato you prefer as long as they are waxy potatoes that can hold their shape during the boiling process, such as Yukon Gold potatoes.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

Whether you are a Pioneer Woman’s Potato Salad fan or have always made your cherished family recipe, I hope you try our red skin potato salad recipe. And if you happened to have any leftover potatoes, here are a few other potato recipes you might also like:

If you try this Red Skin Potato Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Red skinned potato salad with bacon in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Red Skin Potato Salad Recipe

This Red Potato Salad recipe is packed with creamy potatoes, crispy bacon, crunchy celery, and earthy fresh herbs and then drizzled with a creamy salad dressing. It is the perfect side dish for summer BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and more.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 364kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds red potatoes cleaned and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 6 strips turkey bacon* roughly chopped – or regular bacon
  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • ¼ cup scallions thinly sliced or red onions
  • 2 hard-boiled eggs cut into ½ inch cubes – optional
  • 3 tablespoons chopped dill pickles – optional

Instructions

  • To cook the potatoes: Place the cubed potatoes in a large pan and fill them with cold water, making sure that the water covers the potatoes plus an additional inch. Cover the pan.
  • Place the pan on the stove and bring to a boil over high heat. Turn down the heat to medium and let it simmer for 7-8 minutes* or until fork tender (but not falling apart.)
  • Remove from the heat and drain. Transfer it to a large salad bowl and let it cool slightly.
  • To cook the turkey bacon: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Place a wire rack on top of the lined tray. Place the strips of turkey bacon on the wire rack, ensuring the strips do not overlap.
  • Bake for 10 minutes, then flip and cook for an additional 5 minutes. Let them cool slightly, and then cut them into bite-sized pieces.
  • While the potatoes and bacon are cooking, make the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper. Add the chopped dill and give it a good whisk.
  • To assemble the red potato salad: Add chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles (if using), and turkey bacon into the bowl with the boiled potatoes.
  • Drizzle them with the dressing and gently toss them, ensuring that the dressing is distributed throughout.
  • If using, add the hard-boiled eggs on top*. Serve right away or cover with stretch film and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of salad if you cut your potatoes into 1-inch cubes. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cook time for potatoes: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potatoes and cooking time. The best time to check doneness is by inserting a sharp knife into a potato cube.  If it comes in and out easily, it should be cooked.
  • Bacon: I used turkey bacon, but regular bacon can be used. If you are new to cooking bacon in the oven, be sure to check out my detailed post on Baked Turkey Bacon.
  • Eggs: If you are using eggs, you can place them on top at the end or chop them up and incorporate them into the salad with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Make ahead instructions: You can prepare this salad one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
  • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 824mg | Potassium: 861mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Red Skin Potato Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/feed/ 2
Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/#comments Thu, 15 Jun 2023 17:48:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2239 A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much like her Orzo with Shrimp and Feta Cheese, this recipe comes together in no time at all. And if you are a serious shrimp lover, be sure to make Shrimp Scampi and BBQ Shrimp Skewers, too. Ingredients Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a mix of pantry and fresh ingredients that...

The post Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much like her Orzo with Shrimp and Feta Cheese, this recipe comes together in no time at all.

And if you are a serious shrimp lover, be sure to make Shrimp Scampi and BBQ Shrimp Skewers, too.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted shrimp salad with mayonnaise from the top view.

Ingredients

Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a mix of pantry and fresh ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store. Here are my best tips when shopping for this roasted shrimp salad recipe:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Shrimp: Buy whole shrimp labeled 16-20 or 21-25 (this is an indication of the size and number of shrimp per pound). You can peel and devein them yourself or purchase deveined shrimp to save yourself some time. If using frozen shrimp, thaw completely by placing the bag in a bowl of cold water for about 30 minutes.
  • Olive oil: Use good olive oil, preferably extra virgin olive oil if you have it on hand.
  • Mayonnaise: When first testing this recipe, we found the original 1 cup mayo Ina Garten used was too much, so I reduced it to ½ cup. As always, taste and adjust based on your desired preference.
  • Orange zest and orange juice: Orange zest and orange juice are the key ingredients that make this recipe so delicious and unforgettable. Lemon zest and lemon juice can be used in its place, but I highly recommend making it with orange.
  • Vinegar: The recipe uses white wine vinegar, but apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or whatever you have on hand will work.
  • Fresh dill: While fresh dill is very classic and delicious, fresh herbs like fresh parsley would be great, too.
  • Capers: Make sure the capers are drained before adding to the salad. Not a fan? Use dill pickles or omit them altogether.
  • Red onion: Raw red onion adds a nice savory crunch. Replace it with Pickled Red Onions or Roasted Red Onions for a mild onion flavor. Or you can also use an equal amount of chopped scallions.

Optional Add-Ins and Variations

Although not included in the original recipe, here are some fun and creative add-ins to make this shrimp recipe your own:

  • Seasoning: While the shrimp is seasoned simply with Kosher salt and black pepper, you can add some nice flavor with 1 teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning, blackened seasoning, or a pinch of red pepper flakes for some heat.
  • Savory: One teaspoon of Dijon mustard or Worcestershire sauce mixed into the dressing would add a welcome savory bite.
  • Avocado: Add one cubed ripe avocado to the salad for some extra creaminess.
  • Salad greens: Serve it over a bed of mixed greens or thinly sliced romaine lettuce for some extra crunch.
  • Other veggies: Add additional fresh, crisp vegetables like diced English cucumbers, halved red cherry tomatoes, or diced bell peppers.

How to Make Barefoot Contessa’s Shrimp Salad?

This Ina Garten Shrimp Salad recipe is so easy to make and can be ready to serve in just about 1 hour, thanks to the shrimp’s quick cooking time. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

  1. Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
A collage of images showing how to cook the prawns.
  1. Prep Shrimp: Pat the shrimp dry with paper towels. Spread into one single layer on a baking sheet, drizzle with olive oil, and season with salt and pepper. Toss gently to ensure the shrimp is coated with the oil and seasonings.
  2. Roast Shrimp: Roast the shrimp for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until pink, pearly, and slightly curled into a ‘C’. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set aside.
A collage of images showing how to mix the roasted shrimp with the mayo dressing.
  1. Make Dressing: While the shrimp is roasting, whisk together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a large mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix until combined.
  2. Toss: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with plastic wrap and set aside for 30 minutes before serving.

How to Make Ahead and Store

Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and keeps well in the refrigerator. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Make this shrimp salad up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
  • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

What to Serve With This Recipe?

A fabulous Barefoot Contessa shrimp salad can be served in a number of elegant and sophisticated ways. Some of my favorites include:

Roasted shrimp salad in a bowl with bread and wine on the side.

Expert Tips

  • Use good quality ingredients. Your favorite brand of mayonnaise and olive oil will make the shrimp salad taste that much better.
  • A note on frozen shrimp: If you are using frozen shrimp, make sure it is fully thawed before cooking. According to Bon Appetit, frozen shrimp is better than fresh shrimp. But as always, shop for shrimp that is easily available to you.
  • Shrimp cooks very quickly. It is easy to overcook shrimp, so pay attention to the cooking time. Because it cooks so fast, I do not recommend using parchment paper, as the hot heat from the sheet pan does a better job of cooking the shrimp evenly.
  • Allow the shrimp to cool slightly before tossing with the sauce. You want warm shrimp, not piping hot. The gentle warmth will better absorb the dressing.
  • Put the sauce in the shrimp. Just as Ina Garten notes on the Food Network, add the sauce to the shrimp rather than adding the shrimp to the sauce. This way, you can moderate the amount of sauce you want tossed with the shrimp.
  • Let it rest before serving. Once Ina’s shrimp salad is prepared, cover it and allow it to rest for 30 minutes at room temperature to allow the flavors to marry together. Or, just as Ina Garten recommends in her cookbook, set it in the fridge for up to 6 hours before serving.

Other Shrimp Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Adapted from Ina Garten’s  Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That? cookbook – Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe.

Ina Garten's roasted shrimp salad recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad Recipe

Ina Garten’s roasted shrimp salad is a deli-style salad perfect for BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and holidays all year round. Surprisingly delicious, thanks to the addition of orange juice and orange zest, once you try this easy recipe, you will never buy roasted shrimp salad from the store again.
Course Lunch, Seafood Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 48 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 276kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Shrimp:

  • 2 lbs shrimp 16-20 or 21-25 peeled and deveined
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest from 2 oranges
  • 2 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 tablespoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill
  • 2 tablespoons capers drained
  • 2 tablespoons red onion small diced

Instructions

  • Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prepare Shrimp: Using a sheet of paper towel, pat dry the shrimp on both sides. Transfer onto a sheet pan. Spread the shrimp on a single layer, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss together to ensure that the shrimp is evenly coated with oil and seasoning.
  • Roast Shrimp: Roast for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through roasting. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set it aside.
  • Make the salad dressing: Meanwhile, make the dressing by whisking together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix to combine.
  • Toss, rest and serve: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with stretch film and let it rest at room temperature for 30 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of salad, good for approximately 6 (appetizer) servings. The approximate nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make it up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
  • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 243mg | Sodium: 556mg | Potassium: 435mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/feed/ 8
Blackened Mahi Mahi https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-mahi-mahi/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-mahi-mahi/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:57:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68049 Also known as “dolphin fish,” mahi mahi is a majorly versatile ingredient. With its mild flavor and tender texture, this Hawaiian fish is a blank canvas that you can season and cook in dozens of different ways. Pan-fry, oven-bake, or prepare it on the grill (i.e., my Grilled Mahi Mahi recipe complete with my fan-favorite Mahi Mahi Marinade!), and you’ll never run out of ideas for an easy weeknight dinner....

The post Blackened Mahi Mahi appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Also known as “dolphin fish,” mahi mahi is a majorly versatile ingredient. With its mild flavor and tender texture, this Hawaiian fish is a blank canvas that you can season and cook in dozens of different ways. Pan-fry, oven-bake, or prepare it on the grill (i.e., my Grilled Mahi Mahi recipe complete with my fan-favorite Mahi Mahi Marinade!), and you’ll never run out of ideas for an easy weeknight dinner.

Love blackened fish? Be sure to also try our Blackened Cod recipe.

Cajun blacken mahi mahi placed on a bed of mango salsa.

This Blackened version is inspired by the cult favorite Costco blackened mahi mahi. Once you master the easy steps to making it at home, you won’t have to buy it from the store ever again.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need a few fresh, simple ingredients to prepare this blackened mahi mahi recipe: 

Ingredients for blackened dolphin recipe from the top view.
  • Mahi Mahi: If you can get your hands on them, use fresh mahi mahi filets. However, frozen mahi mahi would also work. If you use frozen filets (pre-cut slices), thaw them overnight in the fridge or place them in a bowl of cold water, store them in the refrigerator, and wait until it thaws fully (1-2 hours). If you purchase a whole mahi mahi, I suggest cutting it into evenly sized portions. You also have the choice to prepare this dish as a skin-on mahi mahi recipe or remove the skin before cooking.
  • Olive oil: I use olive oil to brush the mahi mahi steaks, but you can use any oil with a high smoke point, such as canola, grapeseed, or avocado oil. 
  • Unsalted Butter: Searing the fish in butter is the key to giving this recipe a rich, sumptuous taste. However, you may substitute it with olive oil if you are following a dairy-free diet.
  • Lemon or lime: I love topping this seafood dish with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten its natural flavors. However, you can also prepare this mahi mahi recipe without lemon juice by using lime juice instead or omitting the ingredient entirely.
  • Mahi mahi seasoning: In my opinion, the best seasoning for mahi mahi is my Homemade Blackened Seasoning, which uses a classic Louisianian mix of spices:
    • Paprika: Though I prefer smoked paprika for this seafood recipe, regular paprika will also work.
    • Onion powder
    • Garlic powder
    • Dried oregano
    • Dried thyme
    • Black pepper
    • Kosher salt: Salt is a simple, pantry-ready ingredient that helps add depth to your blackened seasoning for mahi mahi. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re watching your sodium intake or prefer a less salty version. 

If you don’t have these spices for mahi mahi on hand, I recommend using Old Bay Blackened Seasoning (affiliate link) as an easy, store-bought substitute.

How to Make Blackened Mahi Mahi?

My favorite way to blacken mahi mahi on a busy weeknight is using a cast iron skillet. However, you can also use a frying pan or a nonstick skillet. Follow these easy instructions for perfectly blackened fish filets any night of the week.

A collage of images showing how to prepare mahi mahi for blackening.
  1. Dry the mahi mahi: Use a paper towel to pat dry the fish fillets on both sides.
  2. Brush with olive oil: Lightly coat both sides of the mahi mahi with olive oil, then set aside.
  3. Prepare the seasoning for mahi mahi: Gather a shallow baking dish or a large plate. Then, mix the smoked paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, dried oregano, dried thyme, ground black pepper, and Kosher salt, ensuring that the spices blend evenly.
  4. Season the mahi-mahi fillets: Dredge each piece of fish in the dry rub until you coat both sides. Set the seasoned steaks aside.
A group of images showing how to blacken mahi mahi steaks.
  1. Melt butter: Heat a cast-iron skillet or frying pan over medium-high heat. Add the butter to the skillet and cook until entirely melted.
  2. Add the mahi mahi: Gently transfer the seasoned fish to the hot pan, ensuring you don’t overcrowd it. You can cook this recipe in two batches if your fish doesn’t fit.
  3. Cook the fish: Cook the mahi mahi steaks for two minutes. Then, flip them over and cook on the opposite side for another two minutes. Try to flake a small piece of the filet to test for doneness. If it flakes easily and is opaque, it’s ready to serve. If not, cook for 30 seconds on each side until done. Your mahi mahi should reach an internal temperature of 130 degrees F. before eating.
  4. Serve: Remove the mahi mahi from the cast iron skillet and cover with aluminum foil. Let the fish rest for a few minutes, then serve with lemon/lime wedges. Garnish with my pineapple mango salsa, if desired.

How to Grill Blackened Dolphin Fish?

Grilling blackened mahi mahi is a breeze when you use these simple instructions. In a total time of 15 minutes, you’ll have the ultimate summer dish ready to serve.

  1. Preheat: Set the grill to medium-high heat and wait until it reaches 425 degrees F.
  2. Prep the grill: Clean off previous food debris from the grill. Then, use tongs to dip a wad of paper towel into the oil and generously coat the cooking surface of the grates.
  3. Cook the mahi mahi: Lay the seasoned filets on the grill, place the cover on, and grill for two minutes. Use a good fish spatula to gently flip each steak, then grill for another two minutes. Use a digital thermometer to check the internal temperature of the mahi mahi steaks. When they reach 130 degrees F., remove them from the grill.
  4. Serve: Transfer the mahi mahi steaks from the grill to a plate. Cover them with aluminum foil and let them rest for a few minutes. Serve!

How to Store and Reheat?

There’s no denying that this Cajun mahi mahi recipe tastes best when served fresh. However, with these storage tips, you can keep your leftovers fresh for quick lunches and easy meal prep.

  • Store: Let your leftover mahi mahi filet reach room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Then, store it in the fridge, and your blackened fish will stay fresh for up to two days. 
  • Reheat: To reheat your Cajun mahi mahi, place it in the oven at low heat (300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes. Because this fish can dry out quickly, keep an eye on it during the warming process.

What to Serve with this Recipe?

Look no further if you’re looking for an Instagram-ready main course guaranteed to satisfy your tastebuds. Transform your fish filet into a sophisticated mahi mahi dinner with these tasty sides.

  • Fruity salsa: Who can resist a pairing that’s both iconic and colorful? Top your filets with Peach Salsa or Mango Pineapple Salsa to balance out the bold spice of blackened mahi mahi seasoning with luscious, sweet flavors.
  • Make tacos: Everyone loves Blackened Mahi Mahi Tacos’ fresh, bright taste. Skip the grocery store with my easy recipe for Corn Tortillas. Then, customize your fish tacos with delicious toppings, like my Easy Guacamole, Avocado Crema, and Mayo and Sugar Free Coleslaw.
  • With corn: Add sweet, tender veggies to your plate with mouthwatering corn recipes. Transform your table into an authentic Mexican market with my zesty recipes for Street Corn and Mexican Street Corn Salad. Or, give your menu a rustic, golden-yellow touch by preparing Air Fryer Corn on the Cob.
  • Rice: This spicy Cajun recipe tastes out-of-this-world when served atop a bed of fresh, steaming white rice. My favorites are simple basmati and coconut rice, which take minutes to prepare. However, you can also take your rice game to the next level by preparing low-carb, lime-infused coconut cauliflower rice.
  • Vegetables: Balance your hearty mahi mahi steaks with a light, healthy veggie side. My Buttery Garlic Beans give a rich, seasoned flavor to each bite. You can also take the hassle out of meal prep with 10-minute Air Fryer Green Beans or Steamed Asparagus.
Blackened mahi mahi with skin on garnished with mango salsa.

Expert Tips

While I think that this is the best way to cook mahi mahi, below are a few things to keep in mind when making this recipe:

  • Thaw if frozen: If you use frozen mahi mahi steaks, be sure to thaw them fully before cooking. One option is to thaw them in the fridge or overnight. Otherwise, you can thaw them in 1-2 hours by placing them in a bowl of cold water and transferring the bowl to the fridge until ready to cook.
  • Timing: Cooking times may vary based on the size and thickness of your mahi mahi filets, so keep an eye on your fish to avoid over or undercooked pieces. If possible, purchase fish fillets that are equal in size to ensure even cooking.
  • Seasoned skillet: The best way to keep your mahi mahi from sticking to the pan is to use a well-seasoned cast iron skillet. Not only will this allow your filets to come off the pan in one piece, but it will also give your fish a deliciously complex flavor profile. If you feel uncomfortable cooking blackened mahi mahi in a cast iron skillet, a ceramic frying pan (affiliate link) is a great option.
  • High heat: The best tip for making this quick mahi mahi recipe is to fully heat your pan or grill before adding your meat. This high temperature will ensure a short cooking time, keep your fish moist, and—if you don’t touch your filets during the cooking process—will ensure they don’t break apart when flipping them.
  • Dry the fish and season well: If you want every bite of this blackened mahi mahi recipe to have maximum flavor, fully dry and add the blackened seasoning mix to all sides of the fish—not just the top and bottom. I also recommend gently pushing the seasoning into the meat so it doesn’t fall off during cooking.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Mahi mahi cooks incredibly quickly, so watch it closely throughout the process to ensure it doesn’t overcook.
  • Rest for a few minutes: After removing them from the heat, let your blackened fish filets rest under an aluminum foil tent for 1-2 minutes. This step will allow your mahi mahi to reabsorb its flavorful juices, resulting in a juicy, tender fish.
  • Proper ventilation: This recipe uses many aromatic spices, so it tends to smoke when placed on a high-heat grill or cast-iron skillet. I recommend preparing this dish in a well-ventilated area to avoid coughing or discomfort, using a kitchen fan or open windows.

FAQs

You don’t have to stress over this quick mahi mahi recipe. These expert answers will eliminate all your cooking worries, from oven-baked alternatives to adjusting spice levels.

What is meant by blackened fish?

If you’re wondering, “What is blackened mahi mahi?” you’re not alone! “Blackening” is a process in which something—usually a protein—is pat-dry, brushed with melted butter or oil, and heavily coated in a Cajun seasoning blend. The fish is then cooked at a high temperature until it forms a crispy crust of external seasoning.

How to blacken mahi mahi in the oven?

To make oven-baked blackened mahi mahi, preheat your oven to 375 degrees F. Then, cook your seasoned filets for 8-10 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 130 degrees F.

What does blackened mahi taste like?

Blackened mahi mahi boasts one of my recipe book’s most balanced flavor profiles. Its bold seasoning gives it a smoky, savory, and spicy kick, while the fish provides a mild and sweet base.

Can I use this cooking method and blackening spices using other fish than mahi mahi?

Yes, you can. Other firm and mild white fish, such as halibut, grouper, and snapper, would also work.

Is blackened fish spicy?

Though blackened fish is mildly spicy, the level of spiciness may vary depending on the rub used for mahi mahi. Specific blackened seasoning mixes may use more cayenne pepper than others, producing a spicier taste. Make your own blackening seasoning mix so you can adjust the spiciness according to your taste buds.

Other Fish Recipes You Might Also Like

Can’t get enough of this mahi mahi with homemade Cajun seasoning? These other fish dishes will give you fresh coastal vibes, satisfying your seafood cravings with tender, buttery flavors.

If you try this Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened mahi mahi fillets on a plate from the top view.
Print

Blackened Mahi Mahi Recipe

Up your weeknight cooking game with this easy blackened mahi mahi made with a homemade blackening spice mix. Ready in 15 minutes, this Cajun mahi mahi recipe is naturally gluten-free, low-carb, and keto and paleo-friendly.
Course Dinner, Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 276kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 mahi mahi filets 4 ounces each – thawed if frozen
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more if grilling
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter

Blackened seasoning:

  • 3 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 2 teaspoon onion powder
  • 2 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme
  • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ¼ teaspoon Cayenne pepper (optional)
  • Lemon or lime wedges

Instructions

  • Prepare the mahi mahi fillets: Pat the filets dry on both sides with using a few sheets of paper towels.
  • Lightly brush the fillets with olive oil on both sides. Set aside.
  • Make the blackened seasoning by mixing together the smoked paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, dried oregano, dried thyme, ground black pepper, and Kosher salt in a shallow baking dish or large plate. Make sure that it is fully blended.
  • Dredge each mahi mahi filet in the blackened seasoning, making sure that they are coated on both sides. Set aside.
  • To blacken mahi mahi on the stove, start by heating a cast iron skillet (or a frying pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Add the butter and cook until fully melted but not browned.
  • Gently add the seasoned mahi mahi fillets to the pan. Do not overcrowd the pan. If all four of them don’t fit, you can do it in two batches.
  • Cook for 2 minutes, then gently flip and continue to cook the other side for an additional 2 minutes. To test for doneness, try to flake a small area of the fish. It should flake easily and look opaque. If it does not, cook for an additional 30 seconds per side until done. If you have a digital thermometer, you can insert it into the thickest part of the fish. If it registers 130 degrees F, it should be cooked.
  • Remove from the skillet, cover it with aluminum foil, and let your blackened mahi mahi rest for a few minutes. Serve with lime or lemon wedges on the side. If preferred, garnish with mango salsa.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 blackened mahi mahi fillets and serves 4 people.
  • Timing: Cooking times may vary based on the size and thickness of your mahi mahi filets, so keep an eye on your fish to avoid over or undercooked pieces. If possible, purchase fish fillets that are equal in size to ensure even cooking.
  • Seasoned skillet: The best way to keep your mahi mahi from sticking to the pan is to use a well-seasoned cast iron skillet. A ceramic frying pan (affiliate link) is a great option if you do not have a cast iron skillet.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Mahi mahi cooks very quickly, so it is recommended that you watch it closely as it cooks.
  • Storage of leftovers: Let your leftover mahi mahi filet reach room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Then, store it in the fridge for up to two days.
  • To Cook Blacken Mahi Mahi on the grill:
    • Heat a grill to medium-high until it reaches 425 degrees F.
    • Prepare the grill by cleaning off any previous food debris. Using tongs, dip a wad of paper towel into the oil and generously coat the grates where you will be cooking the filets.
    • Gently place the mahi mahi steaks on the grill. Put the cover on and grill for 2 minutes. Using a spatula, carefully flip them and grill for another 2 minutes. If you have a digital thermometer, you can check doneness by inserting it into one of the fillets. The internal temperature should be 130 degrees F.
    • Remove from the grill onto a plate. Cover with foil and let them rest for a few minutes before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 139mg | Sodium: 735mg | Potassium: 803mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 1313IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Blackened Mahi Mahi appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-mahi-mahi/feed/ 0
Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and...

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

“Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

What is Blackened Seasoning?

Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

What is in Blackened Seasoning?

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
  • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
  • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
  • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

How to Make It?

Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

  1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
  2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
  • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
  • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
  • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
  • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
  • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

Expert Tips

There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

  • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
  • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
  • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
  • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
  • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

FAQs

Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

Is blackening seasoning spicy?

It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

What does blackened seasoning taste like?

Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
Print

Blackened Seasoning Recipe

Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 13kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
  • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
  • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

Nutrition

Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it. Ingredients This recipe for...

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

If you try this Mango Pineapple Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2